Home

Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User`s Manual

1. Tracking cable 223322222 Communication path 1 Communication path 2 62 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION c Restrictions on the use of the functions When an E71 is mounted on a main base unit the available functions are restricted as follows O Available x Not available Function Availability Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT protocol communications o Communications using SLMP Data communications using the predefined protocol Communications using a fixed buffer Pairing open Broadcast communications o Communications using a random access buffer Remote password Router relay function Communications using an auto open UDP port Connected device alive check function E mail function o CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay o communications Communications using data link instructions o File transfer FTP server function Web function 1 Available with restrictions For the restrictions refer to the functions that can be used in redundant system Page 215 Section 14 6 4 ulejs s juepunpeJ e esn 104 LG ulejs s 3 ue jo 63 64 2 Mounting an E71 on the extension base unit of a red
2. m al C je B 5 B 8 a e 8 o Tracking cable System switching request No response from the connected device t QJ71E71 100 station No 1 Operating as a control system Operating as a standby system Issuing a system switching request Scan time of the system A CPU System A Control system Standby system Tsw 1 System Standby system system 1 Scan time of the system B CPU ee es oe QJ71E71 100 station No 2 Operating as a standby system Operating as a control system 1 Tnc gt i 1 For details on CPU system switching time refer to the following QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 338 APPENDICES b When disconnection is detected Td St Tsw System switching time Disconnection detection monitoring time eSt One scan time Tsw CPU system switching time The following shows the system switching operation timing if disconnection is detected Disconnected Control system system A Standby system system B QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 100 Station No 1 Station No 2 Lee
3. Network address Own station E71 81H 05H 2FH 01H Connected device 3 05H 29H 02H IP address Class B 1 1 0 1 0 11 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Set the subnet address of the connected device 3 Subnet address Subnet address setting value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 189 190 b Router IP address Set the IP addresses of the routers when the E71 communicates with the connected devices on other Ethernet networks via a router other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The subnet address of the router is the same as that of the E71 on the own station Condition 3 The host address bits are not all or all 1 Point When the E71 communicates with the connected devices via a router in Passive open status communications can be performed without using the router relay function The router relay function is not needed in a system that uses the Proxy router CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 2 Communications Using an Auto open UDP Port This section describes communications using the auto open UDP port 14 2 1 Application The auto open UDP port is a UDP IP port that automatically opens and closes at the following
4. Client Server 1 I open request AE N LL Response gt RW E71 Passive open Connection Active open passive active 85 SUOHESIUNWWOD dl dOL 2 2 uonoeuuoo e Buiusilqeis3 2 7 7 2 2 Communication process This section describes the process from establishing a connection to terminating communications Server After the server performs Passive open it will wait for an open request from the client Passive open Connected device When the client sends an Active open request Open request KS tative open _ ee Connection established and the server accepts it a connection is established between the client and the server Connection established Data sending Data s The client requests data sending and sends data ending o Hl SS Receive process Data sending Data sending The client receives the response to the data The client receives data and sends back the response to the data a R eceive process Close request Close process ln a Close request Close request p gum d Closed The packet to stop communications is exchanged
5. 279 16 5 4 MC protocol communications cannot be 280 16 5 5 Communications using SLMP cannot be 281 16 5 6 Communications using the predefined protocol cannot be performed 281 16 5 7 The protocol setting data cannot be read or written 282 16 5 8 Data cannot be sent with communications using a fixed 283 16 5 9 Data cannot be received with communications using a fixed buffer 284 16 5 10 Communications using a random access buffer cannot be 285 16 5 11 An e mail cannot be sent 2 286 16 5 12 An e mail cannot be received cece ete eee ees 287 16 5 13 Communications using data link instructions cannot be performed 288 16 5 14 Communications cannot be performed during OPS connection in a redundant system 288 16 5 15 Systems cannot be switched a redundant system 289 16 6 Error Code EISE vs ss cts s edet a oes eue eee a on 290 16 6 1 End codes returned to a connected device during data communications 300 16 6 2 Abnormal codes returned during communications using an A compatible frame 303 16 6 3 Error codes stored in the buffer 304
6. alata lt IP Address and Port will be displayed by the selected format Please enter the value according to the selected number Item Description Setting range IP Address Port No Input DEC Select the input format for the IP address and port number Format HEX E Select the communication protocol the connected device TCP rotoco Page 85 Section 7 2 Page 93 Section 7 3 UDP Active Set this item when TCP is selected under Protocol uUnpassive Open System Fullpassive gt Page 86 Section 7 2 2 Page 87 Section 7 2 3 Page 89 Section 7 2 4 VMERSOET Connection For communications using a fixed buffer select whether to use the buffer for sending or for receiving in a connection to the connected device When not Send Fixed Buffer performing communications using a fixed buffer select Send gt 135 Receive CHAPTER 12 Fixed Buffer Communication Select a communication method for communications using a fixed buffer gt Page 135 CHAPTER 12 Procedure Exist No Procedure Predefined protocol Configure the pairing open setting for communications using a fixed buffer Disable Pairing Open L gt Page 155 Section 12 7 Enable No Confirm Existence Confirmation Select whether to use the alive check function lt gt 225 Section 14 7 Confirm Host Station Port No
7. XW 6 xipueddy 3 Usea function to write the program that reads the Private Sub Buttoni Click ByVal sender s System Obj Dim rtn Integer device data Dim iData Integer rtn AxdctEasyIF1 Open rtn AxdctEasyIF1 GetDevice DO iData Labeli Text End Sub 4 Click the Read Device button Form1 BEE Appendix 9 2 Sample Program The following sample program is used to read DO to D4 five points of a target programmable controller using a logical station number 1 Window example Form1 Text1 A logical station No is entered Form1 Logical Sa Pocos station No mw Button1 or Command1 550 Connects the communication line Button2 or Command2 Reads the device data Button3 or Command3 Cuts off the communication line ACT control ActEasyIF ACT control for the utility setting type 2 Program example Program examples for development software below are described on the following pages Visual Basic NET 2003 Visual 2003 382 APPENDICES a Visual Basic NET 2003 Private Sub Command1 Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command Click VKH KK ee fee deese dee dee eee fee dee fee de dee KER k kk kk kk k k Connection Dim rtn As Integer Get LogicalstationNumber AxActEasylF1 ActLogicalStationNumber Val Text1 Text Connection
8. pesn si 1 399 400 Redundant setting Redundant Setting m System B Setting r Station No and Mode Setting System Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout Cable Disconnection Timeout Setting 2 0 sec 0 05 30 0sec Station No 1 Issue system switch in communication error System switching settings when communication error occurs 1 IP address DEC Port No DEC r Station No and Mode Setting System B Station No 2 Mode Online x IP Address Setting Input Format DEC bd System 0 252 System B Enable HTTP Communi Port 192 0 is necessary to set the remote password if the system switch setting during communication error is enabled in 7 Check Cancel 4 Sample program on the connected device The program example of the connected device accessing the Q25PRHCPU in the E71 mounted station is described When this program is executed the contents of the following communication messages are displayed in order Version of used Winsock Test starting message Batch write command message in word units Batch read response message in word units Test end message The following is an outline of how to compile a program created using Microsoft Corporation Visual NET Start Visual Create a project From File New Project select in Pro
9. i 207 sending rec ND ZNRD instruction eiving 208 instructions Data link SS 0 instruction 209 execution Dj r sul ZNWR instruction 210 10 223 D2 to DFy System area 224 to 226 to E2 System area 227 Error log area Number of errors 228 4 Error log write pointer Ou x 41 Kiowan yng S E 10157 Z G Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 229 Error code end code H 230 Subhead 0 ubheader H 231 H Sa tion 0 onnection No H E84 Error log 233 block 1 E9 Own station port No H 234 and 235 and EB Destination IP address H H 236 Destination Port No H 237 Goat ystem area 238 246 SN EE to F6 Error log block 2 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 H H 247 to 255 T F74 to FF Error log block 3 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 H H 256 to 264 100 to 108p 265 to 273 109 to 1111 274 to 282 1124 to 283 to 291 11By to 123p 292 to 300 124 to 12Cp 301 to 309 120 to 135p 31010 318 136 to 1 319 to 3
10. s Ie HIE 9 eo 16 wa Leere eere Te 1 6 Tracking cable During normal communications The system A is operating as a control system and the System B as a standby system The connected device is communicating with the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module By connecting the connected device to the E71 mounted with the standby system CPU module in TCP IP an error in the standby system CPU module can be detected At error detection If a communication error has occurred between the connected device and the E71 and the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module detects an error a System switching request is issued to the control system CPU module 2 After system switching The system A operates as a standby system and the System B as a control system The connected device changes the destination and communicates with the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module system B 207 uonouny ulejsAs 9 uiejs s y 5 1 The following shows the timing of issuing the system switching request System switching timing when an alive check is used When the E71 has not communicated with the connected device where a connection is open for a certai
11. 231 15 5 ZP OPEN This instruction establishes opens connection with the connected device to perform data communications Command ZP OPEN ZP OPEN 51 82 01 a Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent 5 12 Index Constant Setting data system user File JEN function module register Others register device Zn Bit Word Bit Word uo co K H S1 p s 52 01 1 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later Universal model QCPU or safety CPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted 2 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Un U Start I O number of the E71 00 to FE The first two digits Character string BIN n Un of the three digit I O number User 16 bit 51 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit 52 Start number of the device that stores control data User system Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 1 For safety CPUs only connection numbers 1 to 8 can be specified If the specified value is out of range OPERATION ERRO
12. 27 593 ied d e e e 80 OMIM Lc 80 OPEN ud atte p a iios end d 227 Open setting 83 Open system oe iL ec LR 83 OBS ee wave ard arare a a a TA 16 426 Q R Packing listie enel Sees ee ieee 17 Paing Opel 2 cas ala ghee RR RAE 155 Parameter 151 79 Part oa b xp aes 25 ose ep Pa ced 89 Performance 27 Physical addresses 184 PING 359 PING IESi 2 Ss 354 POP3 nnb LU 16 Port numbers used for the 71 340 Predefined protocol support function 16 Procedute exist x RAE 135 Procedures before operation 57 Process CPU co e ex LE 16 Product information list window 419 Programming tool 16 cuv iE Lus 16 QCPU mounted station 16 QnA compatible 100 QnACPU iu sie eie eue 16 Rating plate 418 E REDI ER 228 teeta a 228 va m eR Ea ueni 228 Redundant CPU 16 Redundant system function 205 Reini
13. 2 140 12 4 1 Data receiving using the main program BUFRCV 140 12 4 2 Data receiving using an interrupt program BUFROVS 143 12 5 Parameter Setting os oe nd ae dr er eto ee ewes 145 12 5 1 Parameter setting when using an interrupt program 146 12 6 Data Format nsu ERU ewe MEER ee DP a 148 12 613 Header e dan dct eara ee ig Ros 148 12 6 2 Application datai 2 erre taht tees 148 12 7 Paring Open eo ERE OM NO ARRAS PERS eee 155 12 7 4 m ee Rhea OG hs de akan Bs A ES Ee 155 12 7 2 Male ee hea ee A a i 156 12 8 Broadcast Communications 000 ccc ete teens 157 12 8 1 Sending receiving 0 157 12 8 2 Paramieter setting o ea ED URN ee a oa ae he ee 159 12 8 3 wedi tite ecce al Ais etas ode Leo ate 161 12 9 Example of Communications Using a Fixed Buffer 162 12 971 System config ration ze eec ee Ate aha os due e e ees 162 12 9 2 Parameter 162 129 9 Programu CR ein oe epu e TE de poire M eee is 166 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 171
14. Function Availability Program setting x Initial process Network parameter setting Program setting x Open close processes Network parameter setting Connection with products and GOT MC protocol communications O Refer to clause 5 Communications using SLMP Data communications using the predefined protocol x Communications using a fixed buffer x Pairing open x Broadcast communications x Communications using a random access buffer Remote password o Router relay function Communications using an auto open UDP port Connected device alive check function E mail function x CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H o MELSECNET 10 relay communications Communications using data link instructions x Can be relayed File transfer FTP server function x Web function x 1 This function can be used in MELSECNET H remote I O station with the function version D or later For the version of a programming tool check the corresponding software version lt gt Page 420 Appendix 11 1 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 Access using MC protocol communications Access to a MELSECNET H remote I O station using the MC protocol and access to other stations via a MELSECNET H remote I O station are described below a Compatible frames Use a QnA compatible 3E frame or 4E frame for communications An A compatible 1E frame cannot be used b Available functions
15. Hub Configuration device Description Straight cable A Category 3 4 or 5 straight cable is usable Unshielded twisted System operation using connection with a cross cable is not guaranteed Note however that a Category 3 4 or 5 cross cable can be used for data communications with an E71 between QJ71E71 100 pair cable UTP or shielded twisted pair Cross cable cable STP modules or connection with a GOT Connector RJ45 connector Hub 10Mbps hub Up to four levels of cascade connection can be configured 1 This applies when a repeater hub is used For the number of levels that can be constructed when a switching hub is used consult with the manufacturer of the switching hub used Consult a network specialist for required devices 69 sjueuoduio2 YOMION Z S uonoeuuoo ASVEOL XL ASVAOO pesn L z G 5 2 2 Configuration devices used 10BASE5 connection A QJ71E71 B5 is used for 1OBASE5 connection Use devices that meet the IEEE 802 3 10BASE5 standards N type terminating N type terminating resistor resistor eas Die 9 Connected device DC power supply Configuration device Description 10BASES coaxial cable N type terminating resistor The Ethernet standards need to be satisfied
16. 0 6 9 1 6 5 11 An e mail cannot be sent The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot send an e mail 1 When sending an e mail with a program Check item Action Was the MSEND instruction executed Correct the execution conditions of the MSEND instruction Check the error code in the MSEND instruction completion status area and Was the MSEND instruction completed normally j the e mail sending error log to correct the error Check with the system administrator that the following settings are correct DNS setting E mail setting Is the error response received from the mail server using the MRECV instruction If the action above does not solve the problem check the following s the e mail parameter setting of the E71 correct s the mail server system down s there any error in the communication path 2 When sending an e mail with the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Check item Action Are the monitoring conditions satisfied Check the notification setting with the programming tool Was the first sending performed using the programmable Check if there is any device outside the range of the device settings among controller CPU monitoring function the condition devices and correct the condition device Correct the following so that the monitoring condition disable time becomes longer than the value set in PLC Inq
17. 376 Appendix8 3 Data examples of packet elements 377 Appendix 9 Usage example of MX 381 Appendix 9 1 How to create 381 Appendix 9 2 382 Appendix 10 Sample Program on the Connected Device Side 387 Appendix 10 1 When Visual C NET is used single CPU 389 Appendix 10 2 When Visual C NET is used redundant 398 Appendix 10 3 When Visual Basic NET is used 409 Appendix 11 Checking the Serial Number and Function Version 418 Appendix 11 1 Compatible software versions 420 Appendix 12 External Dimension Diagram 421 Appendix 13ASCII Code 81 2 2 rr 423 425 REVISIONS io x RE DEN d NU ELO tbe er eo 428 WARRANTY e ga ptu eri tote Sahel abe bv en etus teal e ate tete fi d ste 431 13 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation is used for window names
18. y 5 lt pesn s 3N 5 3 Programming tool setting Set the parameters using the programming tool as shown below a Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting b Open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 lunpassive Send Procedure Exist Disable x No confirm zoo n pepe p n n 4 je 4 Ie n n 4 n l F F c c c Pea m 390 APPENDICES 4 Sample program on the connected device side The program example of the connected device accessing the Q25HCPU in the E71 mounted station is described When this program is executed the contents of the following communication messages are displayed in order Batch write command message in word units Batch write response message in word units Batch read command message in word units Batch read response message in word units The following is an outline of how to compile a program created using Microsoft Corporation Visual C449 NET Start Visual Create a project From File 2 New Project select NET in Project Types a
19. Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 373 to 375 S 175 to 1775 376 and 377 aca ert kd i 0 x 1784 and 1795 eceive packet coun H 378 and 379 nado ius 17Ay and 17B iscarded due to H error aandaa Sent IP ket total t 0 17Cy 170 b ent IP packet total coun H 382 to 397 San 17E to 1803 QNS 398 399 Simultaneous transmission 0 2 18E and 18 error detection count 400 to 407 Susi 190 to 197 dod 408 and 409 Recslved ICMP T i 0 x 1984 and 199 eceive packet coun H 410 411 pais a packet dion 19 and 198 iscarded due to sum chec H error 412 and 413 ceni db Status for Sent ICMP packet total count Error log area each 414 and 415 protocol Echo request total count of 0 19E and 19 ICMP received ICMP packets 416 and 417 Echo reply total count of sent 0 s 1A0 and 1A1 ICMP packets 418 and 419 Echo request total count of 0 1A2 and 1434 sent ICMP packets 420 421 Echo reply total count of 0 1 4 1 5 received ICMP packets 1 422 to 439 Quse 1A6 to 1B7 db ees 440 and 441 Received TCP ket t 0 x 1B8 and 1B9 eceive packet coun H 442 and 443 ORDER FRE x 1BAy and 1BBy iscarded due to sum chec H TCP error Sent ket total t 0 x 1BCy and 1
20. to 8 The bit configuration is the same as Conversion information No 1 937 and 938 Net mask pattern for CC Link IE Controller Network 8A9 and CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 routing 939 to 943 3AB to 3AF ystem area 944 to 949 3B0 to 3B5 FTP login name QJ71E71 H H 950 to 953 3B6 to 3B9 Password QJ71E71 H H 954 setting area Command input monitoring timer 7084 H 955 Programmable controller CPU monitoring timer H 956 to 1663 PN 3BCy to 67Fy ie Data length 0 ata leng H x 6801 Fixed buffer 1665 to 2687 No 1 Fixed buffer data 6814 to A7Fp 2688 to 3711 to 3712 to 4735 E804 to 12725 4736 to 5759 1280 to 16724 5760 to 6783 1680 to 1A7Fp 6784 to 7807 to 1 7 7808 to 8831 1 80 to 227 8832 to 9855 2280 to 2672 Fixed buffer data area Fixed buffer No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 Fixed buffer No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 Fixed buffer No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 Fixed buffer No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 Fixed buffer No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 Fixed buffer No 7 The bit configuration is the sam
21. Explanation Solution uonoun uonoeljo 0413 eu uj 9r 275 16 4 checking the LEDs The following describes how to troubleshoot the problem by checking the LEDs Point P The on off status of the INIT LED OPEN LED ERR LED and COM ERR LED is stored in Area for module status address C844 of the buffer memory gt 35 Section 3 5 2 16 4 1 Ifthe RUN LED turns off The following table lists the items to be checked and the actions to be taken if the RUN LED turns off after the E71 is powered on Check item Action Reset the CPU module and check that the RUN LED turns on If the RUN Is it a watchdog timer error LED still does not turn on the E71 may be faulty Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Is the E71 mounted properly Securely mount the E71 on the base unit Is the power capacity of the power supply module sufficient Check if the power supply module has enough power capacity If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 7 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test Page 364 Appendix 6 1 16 4 2 ifthe ERR LED or COM ERR LED turns on Connect the CPU module connected to the E71 with the ERR LED or COM ERR LED on to a programming tool to identify the cause lt 273 Section 16 2 If the
22. Initial error code Own station IP address Own station MAC address System area Auto open UDP port number System area Station number bO to 67 Network number of the own station b8 to 615 Own station group number m x 38 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 179 tati rt N 0 wn station port No H x 784 p 121 and 122 cum T94 and 7A estination IP address H ir Destination Port N 0 estination Port No H x 7By 124 A 4 H x TCh p 125 Connection Fixed buffer sending error 0 E 7D No 1 code io C ti d cod 0 onnection end code H x 127 Fixed buffer communication 0 time Maximum value d 128 pr Fixed buffer communication 0 808 Communication Connection time Minimum value H status storage information mE 129 A Had Fixed buffer communication 814 time Current value C tion No 2 The bit fi tion is th C tion No 1 82 to 8B onnection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 tion 3 The bit fi tion is th C tion No 1 8C to 95 onnection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 T 188 C tion No 4 The bit fi tion is th
23. Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent 12 i Index Constant Setting data system user File JEN function module y register Others register device Zn Bit Word Bit Word unco K H S1 O F gt 52 83 01 s i 1 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later Universal model QCPU or safety CPU 232 Section 15 5 double quotation of the first argument can be omitted 72 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Start I O number of the E71 00 to FE The first two digits Character string BIN n Un of the three digit I O number User 16 bit 51 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit S2 Start number of the device that stores control data System Device name S3 Start number of the device that stores send data User Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 1 For safety CPUs only connection numbers 1 to 8 can be specified If the specified value is out of range OPERATION ERROR error code 4101 occurs 2 Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by 52 0 System area Stores the status at complet
24. Has the correct number been selected in System switching settings when communication error occurs in Redundant settings Select the correct number in System switching settings when communication error occurs in the Redundant settings Do the settings of the programming tool match those of the buffer memory After writing the parameters to the CPU module power off and on the CPU module or reset the system Has disconnection been detected Check if the communication target is faulty Has Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout been selected in Redundant settings Select Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout in Redundant settings Is the disconnection detection monitoring time setting correct Is the setting value in TCP ULP Timer in the initial setting correct Check and correct the disconnection detection monitoring time setting Check and correct the setting value in TCP ULP Timer Has Confirm been selected in Existence Confirmation in the open setting Is the setting value in Dest Confirmation Start Interval in the initial setting correct Select Confirm Check and correct the setting value in Dest Confirmation Start Interval Is the setting value in Dest Confirmation Interval in the initial setting correct Check and correct the setting value in Dest Confirmation Interval Is Broadcast Communications displayed in
25. each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C116 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Cf System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C118 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module Check if the power capacity is sufficient Check if the h
26. AUI cable transceiver cable The Ethernet standards need to be satisfied The SQE TEST Signal Quality Transceiver Error TEST or the heartbeat needs to be supported DC power supply power supply for a m The specifications of the transceiver and the AUI cable need to be satisfied transceiver Point The transceiver electrical characteristics are as follows The power supply for the transceiver needs to be 13 28VDC to 15 75VDC Input terminal voltage 12VDC 9 to 15vDC 5 AUI cable direct resistance 40Q km or less maximum length 50m 164ft Maximum current consumption 500mA or less The voltage drop V of the power supply for the transceiver is calculated as follows Voltage drop V AUI cable direct current resistance x AUI cable length m x 2 both directions x transceiver current consumption A Ex 2 0 VDC 0 04 0 x 50 m x 2 x 0 5 A In this case the recommended power supply for the transceiver is more than 13 28VDC 13 28 VDC 12VDC x 11 28VDC 2 0 VDC A communication error may occur due to high frequency noise from devices other than a programmable controller in given installation environment The following describes countermeasures to be taken on the E71 side to avoid high frequency noise influence Install a ferrite core gt Page 74 Section 6 2 2 Increase the number of retries of communications for TCP IP communicat
27. FTP The abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol This protocol is used to transfer data files over a network GX Developer The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers GX Works2 HTTP The abbreviation for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol This protocol is used to send and receive content such as HTML files between a Web browser and a Web server ICMP The abbreviation for Internet Control Message Protocol This protocol is used to exchange messages of errors in an IP network or other information related to an Ethernet network IP The abbreviation for Internet Protocol MAC address A unique identifier assigned to each external device on a network This address is also known as an Ethernet hardware address The abbreviation for MELSEC Communication Protocol This protocol is used to access MC MC protocol protocol supporting modules such as the C24 and E71 or programmable controllers connected to MC protocol supporting modules from external devices MELSECNET H The abbreviation for a MELSECNET H network system MELSECNET H remote I O station A generic term for the QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G and QJ72BR15 MELSECNET 10 MRECV The abbreviation for a MELSECNET 10 network system The abbreviation for MSEND The abbreviation for MX Component The abbreviation for MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later OPEN The abbreviatio
28. Put Windows base software products together from Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEC series to Mitsubishi integrated FA software MELSOFT series Standardize the name from software package GPP function to product name GX Developer Correction Entire manual change MELSECNET 10H to MELSECNET H SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Contents About Manuals The Manual s Usage and Structure Structure of this manual 2 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 3 1 3 2 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 2 4 1 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 1 4 5 entire 4 5 1 Table 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 entire 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 5 5 5 6 entire 5 7 2 5 8 Chapter 6 entire Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 4 2 7 5 2 Chapter 8 Section 8 1 8 2 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 5 1 8 6 2 9 2 3 10 2 to 10 8 Chapter 11 Section 11 1 1 11 1 2 2 11 2 11 2 2 11 2 4 11 3 5 6 11 3 1 to 11 3 3 11 4 11 4 4 Appendix 1 entire Appendix 2 entire Appendix 3 Appendix 8 entire Appendix 11 Addition Entire manual add the explanation MELSECNET H remote I O station The Manual s Usage and Structure 2 e Section 5 4 11 2 11 2 1 11 2 3 11 3 1 error code 63H 11 3 3 error code 00634 C0864 C0874 CODBy C1194 C200 to C205 Jun 2001 SH NA 080009 C Added the description of the model QJ71E71 100 Ethernet interface module Model Addition QJ71E71 100 Correction Comp
29. no response is received from Connected device the connected device Point For an error occurred when the communication ends abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory Page 304 Section 16 6 3 102010 8 jo adA uoee jo 8 xipueddy peuyepeug JO pue g xipueddy 371 2 When the communication type is Receive Only The receive process completes when the data received from a connected device match the receive packet expected packet If they do not match the data are discarded E71 Receive data 1 Not B itched lt LLL Receive packet expected packet Discarded Data Receive data 2 Siteen receive packets 4 reme Data can be specified 1 Received Connected device 372 The operation image of Receive Only is as follows a When the instruction ends normally ECPRTCL instruction Completion device Completion device 1 E71 Receive data The receive data matched the receive packet expected packet Connected device Receive data APPENDICES b When the instruction ends abnormally timeout error An error has ECPRTCL instruction x occurred Completion device The device
30. return SOCK OK Waiting for key input BOOL DataRecv int socketno unsigned char pR buf int size max Receive processing function int length int rbuf_idx int recv_size 1 Communication data length 1 Receive data storage starting index 1 Number of received data 1 Performs receive processing while simultaneously making size check rbuf idx 0 Receive data storage starting index initialization recv size 0 Initializes the number of received data while 1 length recv socketno char pR buf rbuf idx BUF SIZE rbuf idx 0 1 Response data receive if length 0 1 Has connection been cut return FALSE 1 Error handling if length SOCKET ERROR nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError if nErrorStatus WSAEWOULDBLOCK return FALSE else continue else rbuf idx length recv size length if recv size gt size max break pR buf rbuf_idx 10 return TRUE To the next page 406 1 Error handling 1 Repeated until data are received 1 Updates receive data storage position 1 Updates the number of received data 1 Have all response messages received Stops repeating as data are received At the end of received data set NULL Normal termination APPENDICES void Sockerror int error kind A int error kind B Error handling function if error kind A ERROR INITIAL printf Initial processing is
31. Unit of Stored Data When sending Each lower byte data in the data storage area is sent The E71 ignores data in the upper byte Lower Bytes Only When receiving The receive data is stored to each lower byte in the data storage area The E71 stores 00 in the upper byte When sending When Enable is selected data in the upper byte and lower byte are swapped by word 2 bytes and sent When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the upper byte is sent at transmission of the last byte When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only and Data Length is an odd number of bytes data without any byte swap is sent at Byte Swap Disable Enable transmission of the last byte When receiving When Enable is selected data in the upper byte and lower byte are swapped by word 2 bytes and sent When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the last byte is stored to the upper byte When Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only and Data Length is an odd number of bytes the last byte is stored without any byte swap 117 Item Description Specify a start device to store variable value Available devices are as follows Internal user 2 Input relay X Output relay Y Internal relay M Latch relay L Data Storage Area Link relay B Specification Data register D Link register W File regi
32. ejej F LI De Sr eres pere 5 Tracking cable Connected device Tracking cable g H System switching request Disconnection monitoring The E71 always monitors the connected cable for disconnection The monitoring result is stored to the buffer memory area Hub connection status area address 201 9 Upon disconnection detection If the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module detects disconnection it performs a disconnection status time check If the disconnected status continues for the period of the disconnection detection monitoring time the E71 issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module 209 uonouny ulejsAs 9 Wass eui 0 15enbau 5 ueis S 3 After system switching connected device The system A operates as a standby system and the system B as a control system 670 210 Tracking cable
33. i lue zi ___ ___ ___ ___ _ _ _ rl e 126 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL d Protocol setting data The value in D100 to D109 of the destination station can be read by using SLMP Device Read command in the Predefined Protocol Library The followings are setting examples of the protocol setting data using the Predefined Protocol Support Function Protocol Setting Si MELSOFT Series lt Predefined Protocol Support Function Ethernet Module Protocol Setting Sample epc File Edit Module Read Write Tool Debugging Support Function Window z m gt Send Manufacture Model Protocol Name Communication Type Packet Name Packet Setting Protocol in Predefined Protocol Library EEE Protocol Line Send Packet Line Receive Packet Line Kana characters CAP NUM SCRL Protocols 1 128 Packets 3 256 Packet Data Area Usage 2 0 Module for Debugging l Packet Setting Send Packet Request Packet Setting Protocol Name p401 Read word equest Element Name Element Setting Fixed data 5400 2Byte Serial No 100 Length 2Byte LowerUpper Byte No Swap Fixed data 0000 2Byte fi Send Packet
34. 146 Interrupt settings 147 IE ck pd WN etn eee Rk 15 lP address netu 81 IP address in use detection function 203 IP address 81 LED indication 26 List of buffer memory addresses 35 List of dedicated instructions 227 List of VO signals 32 Logical addresses 184 Loopback test 360 MAGC address 5 os gae eda 15 MG protocol sas tes be Re b seed 15 MC protocol communications 99 0 15 15 MELSECNET H remote I O station 15 MELSOFT application transmission port 340 MELSOFT application transmission port 340 MELSOFT connection 97 ree ale gate bc meats ed 80 MREGW ouo ursa iode as re s 228 Rs B e ats 228 MX Component 15 381 Network components 68 Network 80 Network 79 Network 80 135 N type terminating resistor 70 Number of occupied I O points
35. 15 the IP address setting of the connected device correct Check and correct the IP address of the connected device Does the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP match with that of the connected device Use the same communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP as that of the connected device Was the BUFSND instruction executed Correct the execution conditions of the BUFSND instruction Check if the send receive process for I O signals and the BUFSND BUFRCV instructions are used together for the same connection If so correct the program Was the BUFSND instruction completed normally Check the error code in the BUFSND instruction completion status area and correct the error Has the data length of the send data been set in the control data Write the data length 15 the communication status of the connected device normal Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Correct the error in the connected device Check and correct the error If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 Page 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test 7 gt Page 364 Appendix 6 1 283 wojdwAs Aq BunoousejqnoJ 9 Jeynq pexy e suoneoiunululoo ui jues eq jouueo eed 8 69 16 5 9 Data cannot be received with communications using a fixed buffer The following table
36. 21698 to 21713 Connection Received data verification result receive 0 x 54C2 to 54D14 No 1 packet No 1 to 16 a 21714 54021 Number of protocol executions Oy m 21715 i ificati 0 54D3 Protocol cancellation specification H Kowen yng S E 21716 to 21735 Predefined FECE 54D4 to 54E7 protocol support Connection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H H 21736 to 21755 54E8 to 54 function execution status Connection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 check area 21756 to 21775 54F Cy to 550F p Aiowaw 10157 Z G Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21776 to 21795 B510 to 55234 Connection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21796 to 21815 8524 to 5537p Connection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21816 to 21835 5538 to 55481 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 21836 to 21855 B54C to 555 Connection No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 51 Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 21856 to 21875 5560 to 5573 Connection No 9 The bit configurati
37. 27 CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications 30 CLOSE eias ue SE PAN GRO 227 Communication data code 81 Communications using a fixed buffer 135 Communications using a random access buffer 171 Communications using an auto open UDP port 191 Communications using data link instructions 30 Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives a 6 Connecting MELSOFT products and a GOT 96 Connection 97 Cross cable codo num Hea EDO A 68 Data receiving using an interrupt program 143 Data receiving using the main program 140 Data transmission 27 DC power supply power supply for a transceiver 70 Dedicated 227 Default router IP 188 Device obe x Eie esed 16 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible atSTOP time 2 us RARA 82 sd ce 15 E71 mounted station 15 eee 227 E mail function 30 Enable online change 81 s e te 300 ERRGER iix oe Ree ate ee 227 ERRRD
38. Appendix T Comparison with a Built in Ethernet port QCPU For comparison of the specifications and functions between an E71 and a Built in Ethernet port QCPU refer to the following QnUCPU User s Manual Communication via Built in Ethernet Port Appendix 7 2 Comparison with QnA A Series Modules This section provides the functional comparison between an E71 and QnA A series modules and precautions for using the same program The QnA A series modules are the following products Series Model name Product name AJ71E71 AJ71E71 A1SJ71E71 B2 A1SJ71E71 B5 AJ71E71 S3 AJ71E71 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 A series AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N T AJ71E71N B5ST A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N B5 A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N T A1SJ71E71 B5T AJ71E71N AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QE71 B2 A1SJ71QE71 B5 AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 QnA series QE71 N AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N T AJ71QE71N BST A1SJ71QE71N3 T A1SJ71QE71N B5 A1SJ71QE71N B2 A1SJ71QE71N T ATSJ71QE71N BS5T 366 1 Functional comparison The following table lists the functional comparison between an E71 and QnA A series modules APPENDICES d QE71 N Function AJ71E71 POEL SS E71 AJTIE71N 9706 or earlier 97068 or later Initial process with the program O O Initial process Initial process with parameter set
39. AxActEasyIF 1 Open If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The Connection was successful Else MsgBox Connection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub Private Sub Command2 Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command2 Click V oec ee KKK deese dee dee fee e fee dee ee de dee dee ee k kk kk kk k k Read Dim rtn As Integer Dim idata 5 As Short DO DA 5 points are read AxActEasyIF 1 ReadDeviceBlock2 DO 5 idata 0 If rtn 0 Then MsgBox D0 D4 amp idata 0 amp amp idata 1 amp amp idata 2 amp amp idata 3 amp amp idata 4 Else 2 6 xipueddy 6 xipueddy MsgBox Read Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub To the next page 383 Private Sub Command3 Click ByVal sender As System Object ByVal e As System EventArgs Handles Command3 Click VKH KKK KKK dee e dee dee fee KKK dee dee RK KKK kk kk k kk k Disconnection Dim rtn As Integer Disconnection rtn AxActEasylF1 Close If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The disconnection was successful Else MsgBox Disconnection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub 384 APPENDICES b Visual C NET 2003 1 ee ee e e e e e hehe fee je ehe e e hehe e hehe fee ERE ee dee ee kk k kk Connection RERLERERESE EERE ES private System Void button1_Click System Object sender System EventArgs
40. Check if the server is busy server Abort Communications cannot be performed with the POP3 C143 Check if the POP3 server is busy server Reset response C144 A response from the POP3 server could not be Check for an error in the POP3 server received Check if the network is heavily loaded C1454 Forcefully disconnected from the POP3 server Check for an error in the POP3 server Check for an error in the server C1464 The POP3 server could not be closed Check if the network is heavily loaded C1474 Closing the POP3 server gave an error response Check for an error in the POP3 server C150 POP3 server verification error Check the status of the POP3 server The Ethernet module s mail address e mail setting SON Check the account name of the mailbox on the server side and C1514 parameter is different from the account name in the 5 p correct the account of the mailbox set in the Ethernet module mailbox on the server side The Ethernet module s password e mail setting Check the password on the server side and correct password C1524 parameter is different from the password on the server of the Ethernet module side An error has occurred in acquisition of the received mail Reset the server inquiry time to the default value and restart the C1534 list The list of the mail that arrived at the POP3 server CPU module of the own s
41. Default router IP address Number of registered routers Sub net address Router 1 Router IP address Router 2 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 3 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 4 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 5 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 6 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 7 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 Router 8 The bit configuration is the same as Router 1 System area 44 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 550 and 551 226 227p 552 228 Number of conversion table data O H 553 and 554 Communication request destination source 0 2294 and 22 5 stations network number and station number 555 556 Conversion 22 and 22C information External station Ethernet module IP address O No 1 557 and 558 Station No 22D and 22 lt gt 1P 559 to 564 inrormation Conversion information No 2 22 to 2348 setting area The bit configuration is the same as Conversion information No 1 to to 931 to 936 Conversion information No 64
42. The client opens the port The client specifies the destination and sends data to it The client performs the close process Point After the connected device sends a close request to the E71 wait for 500ms or more before performing an open process again 93 SsseooJd uoneoiunuluo2 pg suogeoiunulul07 Z 7 3 2 The open close processes are performed by the procedures described below according to the Ethernet operation setting 1 When Always wait for OPEN is selected for the Ethernet operation setting After the E71 mounted station has been started up the connection in UDP IP communications automatically opens and data sending receiving are enabled Creating open close processing programs is not required Point When open close processes are performed from the E71 side using a dedicated instruction even if Always wait for OPEN has been selected for the Ethernet operation setting all open close processes after the connection to the connected device is established must be performed in a program 94 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 2 When Do not wait for OPEN is selected for the Ethernet operation setting Executing the OPEN CLOSE instructions is required on the E71 to make the E71 enter open close wait status open close wait status before receiving an open close request from the connected device When the open process is normally completed
43. ULP EIE ovi 32 3 5 Buffer Memory Eben PEDI bees ete et Ch Ye Bees dk oe aed 34 3 5 4 Configuration of the buffer memory l i 34 3 5 2 List of buffer memory addresses ne 35 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 57 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 59 5 1 Configuration of an E71 mounted System 59 5 1 1 Applicable modules and base units and the number of connectable modules 59 5 1 2 For use with a Basic model QCPU or safety 60 5 1 3 For use in a multiple CPU system 61 5 1 4 For use in a redundant system ne 62 5 1 5 For use in a MELSECNET H remote I O station 65 5 2 Network hr ra 68 5 2 1 Configuration devices used for 1OOBASE TX 10BASE T connection 68 5 2 2 Configuration devices used for 1OBASE5 connection 70 5 2 3 Configuration devices used for TOBASE2 connection 71 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 72 6 1 Installation i i vn oak Ode et Ge a Ne ee 72 6 2 Mitinig de att eat a oU Bede GE OME ee ns el ew Dem ei 73 6 2 1 Wiring with the QJ71E71 100 73 6 22 Wiring with the QJ71E71 B5 sacos knee Eb DERI REA ETE 74 6 2 3 Wiring with the QU71E71 B2 e a e eaa 76 CHAPTER
44. VEM oet 15 6 ZP CLOSE ELE were QUERER RA 15 7 GEREGCPREG ratos ga bd eL utr reca 15 8 ZZRB FESND RETE RE ud dut ER PA B ee een 15 9 testeur admet wea e cete e ee healers hes 15 107 BUERGWMS Mock rede b eee e ae n eene 15 11 ZRERRGER As Mas ites iu ee eta wo Rei 19 12 so ERE Soph RE RP ERE ELI 11 12 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 273 16 1 Before Troubleshooting isses m 273 16 2 Troubleshooting Procedure 273 16 3 Checking with the Module Error Collection Function 275 16 4 Checking the LEDS Sadan tese te e ERE doe e uns 276 16 4 1 If the RUN LED 2 276 16 4 2 If the ERR LED or COM ERR LED turns on 2 276 16 4 3 If the SD LED does not flash when data is 277 16 4 4 If data cannot be received with the RD LED 277 16 5 Troubleshooting by 2 278 16 5 1 Communications cannot be performed with the connected 278 16 5 2 The E71 frequently fails to receive a message sent from the connected device 279 16 5 3 A dedicated instruction is not
45. error log area and perform the required action 305 1511 JOA 9 94 JONG eui ui peJojs sepoo JON 9 9 Error description Action code Aresponse could not be received within the response Check the operation of the connected device C022 monitoring timer value Correct the response monitoring timer value 2 The connection with the connected device was closed Check the open status of the connection with the connected while waiting for a response device The connection with the connected device has not been opened C023 Open the connection with the connected device The connection with the connected device has been closed When Predefined protocol is set in Fixed Buffer 1 es Correct the connection number of Communication setting communications using a BUFSND BUFRCV BUFRCVS ECPRTCL instructions fixed buffer or a random access buffer are executed DA 4 C024 Correct the Fixed Buffer Communication setting Procedure When Procedure Exist or No Procedure is set in MM Exist No Procedure Predefined protocol of the corresponding Fixed Buffer Communication setting a predefined connection protocol is executed When starting the open by using the OPEN instruction correct the There is an error in the usage setting area when starting f usage setting area of the control dat
46. 1 When the cable is not connected from the start the E71 does not determine it as disconnection Disconnection is detected only when normal status turns to abnormal 2 The following shows the timing of issuing the system switching request System switching timing at disconnection detection The E71 starts disconnection detection after initial process completion On detection of disconnection the E71 performs a disconnection status time check and when disconnected status continues for the period of the disconnection detection monitoring time the E71 issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module When the disconnected status returns to normal within the disconnection detection monitoring time the E71 does not issue a system switching request Disconnected Cable connected Disconnected link down link up link down Detection for Disconnected Disconnected disconnection is 1 71 started after the initial process is completed i imm lt gt Disconnection detection Disconnection detection monitoring time monitoring time A request for system switching to the control system CPU is issued CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 6 2 Communication path bypass function When any of the following redundant system supported applications is used the path where a communication error has occurred is automatically bypassed to continue communications if an error occurs in communications wi
47. 20639 to 20643 BO9F to 20644 to 20648 BOA4 to 50A8 20649 to 20653 B0A9 to 50ADp 20654 to 20658 BOAE to 50821 20659 to 20663 to 50871 20664 to 20668 50B8 to 50BC 20669 to 20673 BOBD to 50 1 20674 to 20678 50 2 to 50 6 20679 to 20683 50 7 to 50CB 20684 to 20688 50CCy to 50001 20689 to 20693 B0D1 to 50D5 Monitoring area Remote password function monitoring area Connection No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 9 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 10 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 11 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 12 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 13 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 14 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 15 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Auto open UDP port The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 MELSOFT application transmission port UDP The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 MELSOFT application transmission port TCP The bit configuration is t
48. 270 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS a Changing the Ethernet operation setting The following shows a sample program that changes the Ethernet operation setting enables writing during RUN when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F SM400 UO Mov G20480 M6500 SET M2500 M2500 X19 MO M1 4 K2 D252 Specify the change in the operation setting UO Read the current MOV G203 D255 J operation setting SET D255 6 4 Enable writing during RUN ZP UNI 0250 250 RST M2500 RST M3001 M250 M251 zx VE Process upon completion m N U SET M3000 c M251 Process upon abnormal end M3000 UOGS31 F UO 0 4 9105 n Process upon completion RST M3000 SET M3001 UO lt gt G105 HO Process upon abnormal end M3001 X19 Communications enabled Point For safety CPUs data stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module cannot be used The program must be modified using the I O signals of the intelligent function module corresponding to the buffer memory For use with safety CPUs refer to the following LL QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 271 272 b Changing the transmission speed and communication mode The following shows a sample program that changes the transmission speed to 10Mbps and
49. Copy File 1824 0000 Copies the specified file in the CPU module where an E71 is mounted File Change File State 1825 0000 Changes the attributes of the file in the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Change File Date 1826 0000 Changes the creation date of the file in the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Locks a file so that the data of the file is not changed by other devices in 1827 0000 Open pile the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Read File 1828 0000 Reads the data of a file from the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Write File 1829 0000 Writes the data to a file in the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Close File 182A 0000 Cancels the file lock by the open process Clear Error 1617 0000 Turns off the COM ERR LED on the E71 107 SI 9 0 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL Data can be transferred between a connected device and the CPU module with a protocol appropriate to the connected device such as a measuring instrument or a bar code reader Device or buffer memory data can be taken into communication packets and thereby this protocol communications are suitable for data that may change in each communication The protocol setting required to communicate with the connected device can be configured in GX Works2 Protocols can be selected from the Predefined Protocol Library or can be created and edited This function is available only in the
50. Power off the E71 mounted station and ground the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module User s manual hardware design maintenance and inspection for the CPU module used 3 After grounding the terminals start the E71 to perform communications with the connected device again 1 Devices on an Ethernet network contain the IP to Mac address mapping called an ARP cache If a device on a line is replaced by another device with the same IP address the MAC address contained in the ARP cache and the MAC address of the replaced device do not match therefore communications may not be performed normally The ARP cache is updated when the device is reset or after a certain period of time The time varies depending on the devices 2 If the communication data code setting is different between the E71 and the connected device error codes that are not found in the error code list may be returned to the connected device When receiving data with different data codes the E71 cannot decode commands normally The E71 returns an error response according to the communication data code setting _ Page 152 Section 12 6 2 1 e Remark 3 If the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module of the E71 mounted station are not connected the communication line may be closed disconnected due to noise therefore communications with the connected device may not be performed If the action above does not solve the problem check for an
51. Seats edad 227 Ethernet cable 73 Ethernet 329 Ethernet operation setting 81 External dimension diagram 421 File transfer FTP server function 30 Fixed oe eL ES ees 145 Fixed buffer communication 145 poeta hata eddie 15 Pull duplex sr rend Ra en 27 F llpassive Re es uS 89 General 5 27 GP EGPRTUTCL Pun raten teme she Reds 239 Group N v d sel E Res d aA 80 GX Developer 15 GX WOIKS2 BE dhe BAe 15 H W test usum ove Be aa ented od Balad wala 80 Half duplex sene oS aka 27 Hardware 1 51 365 High Performance model 16 How to turn off the COM ERR LED 330 HTPR e xL ere Dd REDE eec erdt 15 Hub connection status monitor function 202 425 IGMP EE 15 Initial process an eA 344 81 82 Input 81 Installation ahaa an 72 Intelligent function 16 Interface ort Beg 27 Internal current consumption 5VDC 27 Interrupt pointer setting
52. Term Description ACPU A generic term for ANNCPU AnACPU and AnUCPU AnACPU A generic term for the A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 R21 A2ACPUP21 R21 S1 and A3ACPUP21 R21 ARNCPU A generic term for the ATNCPU A1NCPUP21 R21 A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2NCPUP21 R21 A2NCPUP21 R21 S1 A3NCPU and ASNCPUP21 R21 AnUCPU A generic term for the A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU ARP The abbreviation for Address Resolution Protocol This protocol is used to obtain the MAC address of Ethernet from an IP address BUFRCV The abbreviation for ZP BUFRCV BUFRCVS The abbreviation for 2 5 BUFSND The abbreviation for ZP BUFSND CLOSE The abbreviation for ZP CLOSE C24 Another name for the Q series serial communication module DNS The abbreviation for Domain Name System This system is mainly used to convert host names on the Internet or domain names used for e mails to IP addresses ECPRTCL The abbreviation for GP ECPRTCL ERRCLR The abbreviation for ZP ERRCLR ERRRD The abbreviation for Built in Ethernet port QCPU A generic term for the QOS3UDVCPU QOSUDECPU Q04UDVCPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDVCPU Q0GUDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU E71 E71 mounted station A generic term for the Ethernet interface modules QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 and QJ71E71 B2 The abbreviation for the station where the E71 is mounted
53. Was a response returned to the device that had sent the command Check if the correct IP address was specified in the command If not correct the IP address and send the command again Check if the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP matches with that of the connected device If not correct it Does the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP match with that of the connected device Use the same communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP as that of the connected device Does the communication data code ASCII or binary setting match with that of the connected device Is the end code of the response 0 If the data code settings do not match data cannot be sent or received because the connected device cannot normally decode commands 2 Use the same setting of Communication Data Code in the Ethernet operation setting as that of the connected device Page 81 Section 7 1 3 Check the end and error codes to correct the error Is the correct command format used for the command type device address and others Correct the command format Is the write operation during RUN enabled Check the checkbox next to Enable Write at RUN time in the Ethernet operation setting Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Check and correct the error 1 If the connection of only the connected device is closed due to cable disconnection personal computer restart or other
54. When receiving The data setting value corresponds to the Length in the receive data is verified as the data length of the specified range Length elements can be placed anywhere in the data part The following table lists the items Item Description Remark Element Name Set name of the element Select a format of the data length Code Type ASCII Hexadecimal HEX Select the data length on the line Data Length The range is 1 to 4 When sending The calculated Length is sent from the upper byte When receiving The data is received from the upper byte Forward Direction Upper ByteLower Byte When sending The calculated Length is sent from the lower byte Not settable when Data When receiving The data is received from the lower byte Length is 1 byte Reverse Direction Data Flow Lower Byte Upper Byte When sending The calculated Length is sent swapping the upper byte and lower byte by word When receiving The data is received swapping the upper byte and lower byte by word Sjueulo 3 jex oed Byte Swap by Start Select the start element number of the calculating range Calculating The range is 1 to 32 Range End Select the end element number of the calculating range The range is 1 to 32 1 Available only when the Data Length is 4 bytes 115 Point Multiple Length elements can be placed in a packet When there is no eleme
55. receive data n 3 n setting data length 1 word 2 bytes Communications using an ASCII code Command format Maximum of 1016 words 6 30 0 to L H to L H to L H to L qM Subheader Data specifying USE receiving instructions ASCIl binary conversion Bm n Data length setting z 9 z jeuuoJ ejeq 9 ZL Send receive data Maximum of 508 words 1 word 2 bytes 151 152 e End codes An error code is stored in the end code added to a response For the error codes refer to the error code list LF Page 300 Section 16 6 1 End codes are stored in the complete status area in the control data of the BUFSND and BUFRCV instructions as well as the communication status storage area of the buffer memory Point If an error code related to MC protocol communications or communications using a random access buffer is stored during communications using a fixed buffer it may be caused by the following Cause Action The data length value specified in the application data of the message sent from a connected device to the E71 is different from the actual text data size Specify the actual text data size for the data length in the application data Refer to Remark in this page The subheader of the message sent from a connected device to the E71 is incorrect Correct the subhead
56. timer value timer value When connecting Mitsubishi products to the line configure the same settings for both modules Specify the setting value of each timer on the connected device side so that the following formula is met The frequency of a communication error such as a transmission timeout may be higher if the timer values do not meet the formula timer value on on the E71 TEF resend gt TCP resend timer value the connected device Monitoring timer value of the application software gt pur ULP timer value the connected device on the E71 1 n is the number of TCP segment transmission and is calculated by the following formula Message size sent by the E71 n A value that is rounded up to the nearest integer Maximum Segment Size The number of TCP segment transmission when communications are performed on the same line The Maximum Segment Size is 1460 bytes on the same line without a router and the number of TCP Segment transmission is as follows 1 when the size of the message sent by the E71 is 1460 bytes or less e 2 when the size of the message sent by the E71 is greater than 1460 bytes The number of TCP segment transmission when communications are performed on a different line The Maximum Segment Size is at least 536 bytes on another line via a dialup router or other communication device and the number of TCP Segment transmission is as follows 1 when th
57. 00 Bunoouse qnoij p94 When an error in the E71 is reported select the E71 and click the Detailed Information button When an error in a module other than the E71 is reported refer to the manual for that module _ Network No Pon Address Staton No Power CPU 4 QICOUDELCPU E a IEEE 01 Empty 1ePont oma Oz _ _ o Empty 1 Pont 0030 273 274 Module s Detailed Information Monitor Status HIW Information Module 3 The Module s Detailed Information window is Model Name 10271 71 100 pooo displayed Clicking the Update Error History button Address Mount Position Main Base 0 Slot displays the error details and corrective action Product Information 131120000000000 D Production Number p Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status Status of Address Verify Agree 10 Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting Input Type E Remote Password Setting Status Nothing Error Information C017 p Error and Solution Latest Error Code Update Error History Contents A connection could not be established during the open processing of a TCP connection Error Code Dey Format cose G Hex 10 C030 a 11 CO gi Check operatio
58. 1 Connect processing error information initialization for System if nErrorStatus SOCK OK Sockerror ERROR INITIAL ERROR INITIAL Error handling return SOCK_NG printf Winsock Version is 1d 1d n HIBYTE wsaData wVersion LOBYTE wsaData wVersion printf QJ_test Start n To the next page 402 APPENDICES 1 System A connect processing SocketnoA socket AF SOCK STREAM 0 TCP IP socket for System A connection creation if socketnoA INVALID SOCKET hostdataA sin family AF_INET hostdataA sin port scA my port hostdataA sin addr s addr scA my addr s addr if bind socketnoA LPSOCKADDR amp hostdataA sizeof hostdataA SOCK OK 1 Bind System A qj71e71A sin family AF INET qj71e71A sin port scA qj port qj71e71A sin_addr s_addr scA qj addr s addr if connect socketnoA LPSOCKADDR amp qj71e71A sizeof qj71e71A SOCK OK 1 Connect Active open System A ShutdownflagA FLAG ON 1 Shutdown flag ON CloseflagA FLAG ON 1 Connection end flag ON 1 Set to non blocking mode ulCmdArgA 1 ioctlsocket socketnoA FIONBIO amp ulCmdArgA 1 Set to non blocking mode for System A connection else ConnectLastErrorA ERROR CONNECT Connection establishment failure else ConnectLastErrorA ERROR_BIND Bind failure else ConnectLastErrorA ERROR SOCKET Socket creation failure System B connect processing socketnoB socket AF_INE
59. 1 Update the receive data storage II position Update the number of receive data 1 Have all response messages been 1 received 1 Stop repeating as messages have been received Set NULL at the end of receive data 1 Processing to disable 1 sending receiving Error handling 1 Close processing 1 Error handling 1 Connection completion flag off 1 Release Winsock DLL printf nAJ test End n n Normally completed M printf Press any key to exit the program n Dmykeyin getchar Wait for key input return SOCK OK void Sockerror int error kind Error handling function if error_kind ERROR_INITIAL printf Initial processing is abnormal else nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError switch error_kind case ERROR_SOCKET printf Failed to create socket break case ERROR_BIND printf Failed to bind break case ERROR CONNECT printf Failed to establish connection break case ERROR SEND printf Sending failed break case ERROR RECEIVE printf Receiving failed break case ERROR SHUTDOWN printf Failed to shutdown break case ERROR CLOSE printf Failed to close normally break printf Error code is d n nErrorStatus if Closeflag FLAG_ON nErrorStatus shutdown socketno 2 nErrorStatus closesocket socketno Closeflag FLAG_OFF printf Press any key to exit the program n Dmykeyin getchar WSACleanup return 1 Shutdown processing 1
60. 16 7 Ethernet Diagnostics llis m 329 16 8 How to Turn Off the COM ERR LED 2 330 APPENDICES 331 Appendix 1 Processing 331 Appendix 2 Port Numbers Used for the 71 340 Appendix New and Improved 2 341 Appendix 4 Initial Process isses mm 344 Appendix4 1 Setting the initial process 344 Appendix4 2 Reinitialization process ee 348 Appendix 5 Line Status Check 2 2 0 n 354 Appendix5 1 354 Appendix 5 2 Loopback testis mas DU READS ERR CARES 360 Appendix 6 Self Diagnostic 364 Appendix6 1 Self loopbacktest 364 Appendix 6 2 Hardware test H W 365 Appendix 7 Differences from Ethernet Modules of Other Series 366 Appendix 7 1 Comparison with a Built in Ethernet 366 Appendix 7 2 Comparison with QnA A Series 366 Appendix 8 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol 370 Appendix 8 1 Operation image of each communication type 370 Appendix8 2 Verification operation of receive
61. 1st retry 2nd retry TCP resend TCP resend TCP resend timer value timer value timer value ME 4 4 ULP timer value A request for system Switching to the control System CPU is issued 2 Set whether to issue the system switching request in the redundant settings of the programming tool gt 212 Section 14 6 3 208 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Issuing a system switching request upon disconnection detection The E71 mounted on the control system CPU module monitors the connection status of the cable connected to the E71 and on detection of disconnection it issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module Disconnection is detected in the following cases Disconnection between the E71 and a hub Cable removal from the hub side connector Hub power off Cable removal from the E71 side connector This function is available for the QJ71E71 100 only a System switching request operation The E71 always monitors the connected cable for disconnection 1 Connected device 1 1 Disconnected Standby system system B li ontrol system system J 5E 051697 ree rele
62. 3 Functions This instruction reads the error information of the module specified by Un tern Target specification Function Error information to be read 51 2 specification 51 3 buffer memory Initial error 0000 0000 Initial error code address 694 0001 to 0010 0000 Open error code for a connection with the M connected device address 7Cy 86 Completion of the ERRRD instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Completion device Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ERRRD instruction is D1 0 completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ERRRD instruction D1 1 Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ERRRD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the ERRRD instruction is being executed END END END Program process process process ERRRD instruction h Executed Completion device 7 __ Completion device 1 ____ __ Abnormally ended 4443 82 The ZP ERRRD instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the read command 4 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status 5
63. 5 3 dez Necessary Setting Setting Already Set Set f it is needed No Setting Already Set Start JO No Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 Please input 16 point unit HEX to start No in which module is mounted Routing Parameters Assignment Image Check End Cancel Print Window Print Windowns Preview neters 162 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER b Ethernet operation setting The following is an example of the Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting c Open setting The following is an example of the open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 5 _______ n e o p n 4 e pepe 4 Ie p pn n 4 p p n m Dues 76 ZL Jeyng e jo 6 2 163 164 2 Receiving side QCPU 2 side The following is an example of the parameter settings of the receiving side QCPU 2 side a Basic setting The following is an example of the basic setting Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Necessary Setting No Setting Already
64. Calculation example 2 The time between the QJ71E71 B5 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing writing when the QJ71E71 B5 communicates with the personal computer in TCP IP and writes 100 point data of an ASCII code to the data register D in the own station unit ms Assume that the scan time of the QJ71E71 B5 mounted station is 10ms the command data length is 221 words the response data length is 11 words and writing during RUN is enabled 40 58 ms 22 0 037 x 221 11 10 x 1 4 Processing time of the dedicated instructions The following table lists approximate operation processing time of each dedicated instruction The operation APPENDICES processing time differs depending on the system configuration and the scan time on the sending receiving stations a QJ71E71 100 Number of access Processing time unit ms QnHCPU 4 1 i 1 model nstruction Instruction points Basic model QCPU Q02CPU Process CPU Universal mode QCPU execution name Redundant CPU condition Conditi Conditi on For4 For2 Fori For2 For Fort For 2 A UDP IP OPEN 4 2 3 8 3 0 2 9 transmission port is open 1 port A UDP IP CLOSE 4 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 transmission port is closed BUFSND 14 0 235 12 8 19 2 11 5
65. Protocol No Packet Type Packet Name Element List Element No Element Type Static Data Non conversion Variab Static Data Non conversion Variab Network No D1 D1 Fixed Lengthi1 Byte LowerUpper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variab Station No D2 D2 Fixed Lenath 1 Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variab Requested module No D3 D3 Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data For future expansion 004 Byte w n Lenath Request data length Object element9 1 4 HEX Reverse 2Byte Non conversion Variab Monitoring timer D4 D4 Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Static Data Command 0104 2 Static Data Subcommand 0000 2Byte Non conversion Variab Head device No D5 DBl Fixed Length 3Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variab Device code D7 D7 Fixed Length Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variab Number of device points D8 D8l Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swa Change Type Add New Copy Paste Delete 127 Bumes Z G LL ejduex3 Receive Packet Normal response Packet Setting 0 JNomaltesponse 7 E Static Data
66. QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System 1 Precautions Note the following precautions for when using an E71 in a multiple CPU system a Writing network parameters Configure network parameters only on the control CPU of an E71 b Accessing an E71 non control CPU from a connected device When accessing a non control CPU in a multiple CPU system use an E71 with the function version B or later E71 Non control CPU Control CPU Connected device c Accessing other stations A control CPU and non control CPU in a station to be accessed are accessible even when a relay station or station to be accessed is configured in a multiple CPU system To access a non control CPU use modules of the function version B or later in the own station and all relay stations and for all relay modules in stations to be accessed and CPU modules Ex When the relay modules are CC Link IE Controller Network modules TA ulejs s eidninu e uresn 104 ulejs s ue jo LG CC Link IE Connected device Programming tool Controller Network Relay station CC Link IE Controller Network Station to be accessed 61 5 1 4
67. Set the E71 connection port numbers 401 to 1387 138 to FFFE 1 Destination IP Address Set the IP address of the connected device to FFFFFFFF Destination Port No Set port numbers for connections of connected devices 1 to FFFFj 1 13884 to 138A cannot be specified 7 340 Appendix 2 83 Bumes uedo v4 5 Dumes L7 Point Note the following points when setting port numbers O Can be set x Cannot be set Communication Connection status Description protocol TCP IP UDP IP Connected device E71 m When connecting multiple connected devices set multiple O7 own station port numbers o o O r O Connected device When connecting multiple connected devices set a single own station port number However connections need to be opened by number of connections Connected device This setting cannot be configured when the own station is Unpassive E71 Connected device When connecting multiple ports on a connected device set ES O multiple port numbers of the E71 o When connecting multiple ports on a connected device set E71 Connected device a single port number of the E71 However connections oH need to be ope
68. _ Sixteen receive Not matched Matched packets can be registered Eb Au wv Receive data gt Received 3 When received data are not matched to all receive packets expected packets The received data are discarded Receive packets When sixteen expected packets No 1 No 2 17 16 receive packets were registered Not matched Not matched Receive data gt po gt Discarded e 376 APPENDICES Appendix 8 3 examples of packet elements This section describes the procedures for the processing and practical data examples of each element placed in a packet 1 Length a Procedures The E71 processes a Length element as follows When sending Data flow Forward direction Sd Connected device 30H 31H gt 3210 0123 32H 33H 32H 31H 30H Length calculating result 33H 123u Reverse direction Conversion to 33H peel 32H gt 0123 gt 3210 hexadecimal 31H 30H 31H 32H 33H 0 30H 30H 1 31H 2 32H Byte swap 3 33H 31H 30H gt 2301 1032 4 33H 32H 33H 30H 31H 32H W
69. 13 1 Applications 1v _ _ iOS 171 13 2 Communication 5 e 172 13 2 1 How data is read from a connected device 173 13 2 2 How a connected device writes 173 13 3 Parameter Setting und Liste be QN a adu DI 174 13 4 Data Eorm t os RENS pen edo be a HR oa AR RR ECRANS 175 13 41 Header ecusoane da t b Ree Elus 175 13 4 2 Application data teg e ete ret Rte ed dde i s 175 13 4 3 Examples of command and response 180 13 5 Precautions when Creating Programs 184 13 6 Physical and Logical Addresses of a Random Access Buffer 184 13 7 Example of Communications Using a Random Access 185 10 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 1 Router Relay FUNCUON ts temet detecte red edes 14 1 1 gt Applicatioris Sm Rr qe eere PE STR RU eR Re dos try 14 1 2 Parameter settings eene mx meer cR ente bentes 14 2 Communications Using an Auto open UDP Port 14 2 1 Application haa tt Ra Ho E RU 14 3 Remote Password e hh 14 3 1 Application 25hsskbermoiiddccetiusbinter6sliibW
70. 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusio
71. 21 2696H 9878 BCH 16H 22 269DH 9885 BCH 1DH 29 10 words 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 182 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER b Communications using an ASCII code Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader Start address Data length D D 36H 31H 30H OOH OOH 31H 34H OOH OOH OOH 41H Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader End code 454 31H 30H Text 20 words H O 6 0 6 D H D 31H 329 334 344 354 364 37H 41H 424 434 e 394 41H 424 434 13 Random access buffer Physical address L Logical address 2680H 9856 0 2694 9876 14H 20 2695H 9877 15H 21 eed v l 2696H 9878 9AH BCH 16H 22 269DH 9885 BCH 1DH 29 mE 17 6143 10 words pue evel 183 13 5 Precautions when Creating Programs This section describes the precautions when creating programs for communications using a random access buffer 1 Completion of the initial and open processes The initial process and the connection open process need to be completed 2 Send request from a CPU module A CPU module cannot issue send requests In addition reception completion in a CPU module
72. Fel QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 100 Station No 1 Station No 2 xipueddy 164 rij System switching Tracking cable request Communications have not been performed with the connected device for a fixed period 3 QJ71E71 100 station No 1 Operating as control system a System Tsi i Ti i Ti i Ti bit gt gt Issuing a system switching request Scan time of the system A CPU CHAE HH System A Control system Standby system T i Tsw i 1 reh System B Standby system Control system Scan time of the system B CPU T 1 1 QJ71E71 100 station No 2 Operating as a standby system a pu Em i 1 For details on CPU system switching time refer to the following LL QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 337 When ULP timeout occurs Tnc 7 Ttu St Tsw Tnc System switching time Ttu TCP ULP timer value e St One scan time Tsw CPU system switching time The following shows the system switching operation timing if a ULP timeout occurs Connected device A communication error occurred Standby system system B QJ71E71 100 Station No 2 QJ71E71 100 Station No 1
73. If a data link instruction results in an error with either of the aforementioned error codes execute the data link instruction again c SEND instruction When the target station is in a redundant system the communication request source station must identify that the target station is the control system to execute the SEND instruction When the target station is the standby system the target station storage channel cannot be used since the RECV instruction is not executed at the target station after data is sent by the SEND instruction Channel being used When a redundant system exists on the network where a broadcast is performed the storage channel cannot be used since the RECV instruction is not executed for the standby system Channel being used d RECV instruction and interrupt program RECVS instruction When the SEND instruction is executed for the redundant system the process of the RECV instruction or interrupt program RECVS instruction changes depending on the following conditions When system switching occurs between execution of the SEND instruction for the control system and execution of the RECV instruction or interrupt program When the control system is switched to the standby system before execution of the RECV instruction or interrupt program it holds the buffer memory area data RECV instruction execution request address 205 and the interrupt factor interrupt pointer of the interrupt program When sys
74. OPEN instruction completion device nac Abnormally OPEN instruction ended 1 1 Open abnormal detection Abnormally ended signal X18 i i NN CLOSE instruction i i i 50 20 CLOSE instruction 2 0 completion device Abnormally 9 tr V 8 EE 1 1 ded 1 1 3 CLOSE instruction puo 23 completion device 1 58 Open completion signal 8 5 address 5000 Open request signal address 5002 SYN ACK FIN ACK SYN ACK FIN ACK 91 92 After parameter communications check that initial process of the E71 is normally completed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open process using the OPEN instruction Open request signal address 5002 b0 ON The E71 starts the open process upon receiving the open request SYN from the connected device When the open process is normally completed Open completion signal address 5000 bO turns on and data communications are enabled The E71 starts the close process upon receiving the close request FIN from the connected device When the close process is completed Open completion signal address 50004 bO turns off and data communications are disabled Q Start the close process using the CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF 1 An open request SYN received after the normal comp
75. Process upon abnormal end M1000 M3001 x19 M20 PAR 0100 L ZP OPEN 00 Ki D100 M100 M100 M101 Process upon completion Communications enabled Process upon abnormal end 351 sseooJd uonezijeniuies Zp xipueddy sseooJg elu p xipueddy d Writing directly to the buffer memory The following shows an example where the stored values in the TCP Maximum Segment Transmission setting area and Communication condition setting Ethernet Operation Setting area is changed when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F Create a program with a contact such as a flag for user indicating the status 352 of the open completion signal storage area SM400 UO 0920480 M6500 SET M2500 M2500 X19 MO M1 UO WE P As MOVP H8000 G30 1 UO SET G31 1 UO SET G314 UO SET G31 5 UO SET G31 6 UO SET G31 8 UO G31 F 5 2500 1 RST M3001 SET M3002 1 M3002 U0 G31 F UO YE G105 Process upon completion RST M3002 SET M3001 UO lt gt 8105 Process upon abnormal end H M3001 X19 Communications enabled Set Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission Set ASCII Code Set Use the KeepAl
76. Remote password password QCPU E71 5 check QCPU E71 Station C QCPU E71 E71 Station D The following are the connected devices that can perform unlock lock processes 1 of the station 1 1 By the station A only 1 of the station 2 2 By the station C only 1 of the station 3 2 By the station D only Stations that can be accessed from the connected device after the remote password unlock process O Stations that can be accessed from the connected device without performing the remote password unlock process x Stations that cannot be accessed from the connected device Connected Target programmable controller station request destination device ET Station 1 2 Station 2 1 Station 2 2 Station 3 1 Station 3 2 ion 1 request source QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU Station A x Station B O Q O x x x Station C O O O Station D 12 The station A can access the stations marked with after the remote password unlock process is completed for 1 of the station 1 1 and can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open The station B can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open The station C can access the stations marked with after the remote password unlock process is completed for 1 of the station 2 2 and can access the stations marked with when the communication lines are open T
77. The first eight words of the sender s e mail address of the error e mail in the communications with the mail server are stored in the ASCII code Example If the sender s e mail address is use from add sample co jp use from add sam is stored in the ASCII code Date 58834 The date and time when the e mail was received are stored in the BCD code b15 to 6867 to bO Month 01H to 12 Year 00H to 99 Last two digits of the year 615 to b8 b7 to bO Hour 00H to 23H Day 01H to 31 615 to b8 b7 to bO b15 to b8 b7 to bO Year 00H to 99 First two digits of the year Day of the week 0 to 6 Subject 5887 The first 30 words of the e mail subject are stored A subject is not stored successfully if it contains characters other than alphanumeric and ASCII code characters 298 1 A receiving error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order b Send area CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Buffer memory name Dedicated instruction normal completion count Address 5B39 Description The cumulative number of normal completions of the dedicated instruction MSEND is stored 0 The MSEND instruction has not been executed or no executions have resulted in normal completion 1 or more The cumulative number of normal completions of the MSEND instruction Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count 5B3Ay The cumulativ
78. The following functions can be used in MELSECNET H remote stations Reading writing of device memory 2 Reading writing of buffer memory Reading writing of intelligent function module buffer memory 1 For accessible MELSECNET H remote I O station devices refer to the following MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 2 This function cannot be used in QnA A series compatible MELSECNET 10 remote I O stations c Access to other stations through MELSECNET H remote I O stations MELSECNET H remote master station and MELSECNET H remote stations can be accessed Ex The MELSECNET H remote master station and MELSECNET H remote I O stations can be accessed from a connected device Remote master station a lel SS ae B TD suman Connected device 1 C MELSECNET H remote I O network Eales mo a lt Access allowed t 4 Access not allowed The following methods cannot be used to access other stations through MELSECNET H remote I O stations Access to other stations from a MELSECNET H remote master station via the E71 connected in MELSECNET H remote I O
79. The specified communication line is closed Correct the target connection number COBD Requests have been accepted successively and cannot Check if requests have been sent successively without waiting for be sent a response Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module COBE System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 311 157 JOA 9 94 JONG eui ui peJojs sepoo JON 9 9 Error description Action code Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative CoC The open process of the UDP connection has not been Perform the open proce
80. When an error has occurred in protocols the following protocols will not be executed When a value other than Predefined protocol is set in Fixed Buffer Communication for connection No specified by n1 5 Program example For the program example refer to Page 124 Section 11 5 6 Canceling protocol execution A protocol can be canceled during its execution This function is used to terminate the protocol execution forcibly when a communication error occurs with the connected device a Execution method for cancel request Set the cancel request to Protocol cancellation specification address 54D3 Connection No 1 User Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 1 Cancellation request 2 Cancel completed 5403 when the value of n is 1 The E71 cancels the E71 protocols being executed in connection No n CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS b Operations after execution of cancel request Operations of the ECPRTCL instruction The ECPRTCL instruction ends abnormally and Protocol cancel request error error code C4041 is stored in Completion status S 1 When cancel request is executed to the nth protocol while multiple protocols are being executed consecutively the E71 terminates the nth protocol forcibly and the following protocols are not executed The following table lists the control data that are stored when protocols are canceled Device Item Stored value The n
81. a Communications using a fixed buffer Up to 1K word data can be exchanged among programmable controllers or between a programmable controller and the host system While MC protocol communications are passive communications using a fixed buffer are an active protocol If an error occurs in equipment or certain conditions are met the programmable controller can send data to the host system Using an interrupt program allows the CPU module to quickly read received data gt Page 135 CHAPTER 12 Sending receiving iS Sending receiving Own station Another station Connected device b Communications using a random access buffer Up to 6K word data can be communicated This buffer is useful when the data size is too large for communications using a fixed buffer capacity 1K word 171 CHAPTER 13 d Reading writing A eS Reading writing ERAT AER a Fy E71 Connected device Connected device 6 Prevention of unauthorized access through a remote password This function prevents unauthorized remote access to the CPU m
82. gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET lt gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt Operation Setting Ethernet Operation Setting Communication Data Code Initial Timing e Do not wait For OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time Always wait For OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Send Frame Setting Binary Code ASCII Code IP Address Setting Input Format DEC av Ethernet V2 0 IP Address 192 1 1 802 3 Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting Use the Keepalive C Use the Ping Cancel Item Description Setting range Communication Data Code Select the communication data code for the connected device Binary Code ASCII Code Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at eae s STOP time Initial Timing Refer to 1 in this section Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Input Format Select the IP address input format HEX IP Address Set the IP address of the own station Make sure that the E71 on the Setting IP Address own station and the connected device to be communicated with have to the same class and subnet address Consult with the network administrator for the IP address setting Send Frame Setting Select the frame of the Ethernet header for the data link layer to be sent by the E71 Ethernet V2 0 IEEE802 3 Enable
83. if iRet 0 MessageBox Show The disconnection was successful MessageBox Show String Format Disconnection Error 0x 0 x8 HEX box iRet APPENDICES Appendix 10 sample Program on the Connected Device Side The following shows a sample program for the connected device on the same Ethernet network as the E71 Each program example describes only the minimum programming that is required to perform a communication test Change the IP address port number and other values according to the system configuration used Other processes such as a process performed upon an error can be added 1 Receive process of the connected device A receive processing example on the connected device side is shown below Communication process on the connected device Request message send process Response message receive process Is the TCP connection open The TCP connection is closed Receive the remaining response messages Were the data received within the monitoring timer value Timeout of the monitoring timer value The received data size is insufficient Check the received data size If the response message to the next request has been received Response message process Have all the received messages been processed Error process Point For Ethernet communications the TCP socket functions are used inside the personal compute
84. in the buffer memory Action Open the connection with the connected device Check if the open close process for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are used together for the same connection If so correct the program Did the connected device send a command Send a command to the E71 Was a response returned to the device that had sent the command Check if the correct IP address was specified in the command If not correct the IP address and send the command again Check if the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP matches with that of the connected device If not correct it Is the end code of the response 0 Check the end and error codes to correct the error Is the correct buffer memory address specified for the command Correct the buffer memory address and send the command again Has data been set in the specified address of the random access buffer Write the data Has the write data been set in the connected device Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Set the data Check and correct the error If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 Page 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test 7 s Page 364 Appendix 6 1 285 Aq 9 peuuojied eq 1ouueo sseooe wopue e
85. is not required 1 Detailed header sizes 13 Ethernet IP TCP 14 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes b UDP IP Ethernet IP UDP 14 bytes 20 bytes 8 bytes 13 4 2 Application data oo aA In the application data for communications with the Procedure Exist control method the following data code is T S expressed in a binary code or an ASCII code To switch between a binary code and an ASCII code use the Ethernet 8 RU 3 5 operation setting Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Operation Setting 175 1 Format Communications using a binary code Applicatio n data area command message data ES Maximum of 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1017 words A A E Y Y Communication Subheader Start address Data length command request setting none at read source 00H L H L H request Text Communication Subheader response request none at write destination request V 7 Y Y 1 byt Maximum of eee 1 byte 1017 words Application data area response Communications using an ASCII code Application data area command message Maximum of 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 1016 words Data length command Communication Subheader Start address setting hans at
86. p xipueddy 347 pendix 4 2 Reinitialization process The reinitialization process sets the E71 to the status after startup without restarting the programmable controller or resetting the CPU module Perform the reinitialization process using a program 1 Purpose of a reinitialization process The purpose of a reinitialization process is described a To update address information of a connected device held by the E71 To prevent other devices from illegally accessing the programmable controller using the IP address of the connected device with which communications are normally performed the E71 holds the IP address of the connected device and the corresponding MAC address If a module or the board of the connected device is replaced due to a failure the address information of the connected device held by the E71 must be cleared by the reinitialization process 1 MAC address is unique to a device No devices share the same MAC address b To change the IP address of the E71 on the own station When system is changed by only changing the own station IP address set by the programming tool communications with the connected device can be resumed c To change the Ethernet operation setting By changing the communication conditions in the Ethernet operation setting set using the programming tool communications with the connected device can be resumed d To change the transmission speed and communication mode
87. such as antivirus measures so that the mail server for this module does not receive harmful e mails To maintain the safety of the programmable controller system against unauthorized access from external devices via the network take appropriate measures To maintain the safety against unauthorized access via the Internet take measures such as installing a firewall When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting an external device such as a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not write any data in the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the programmable controller C
88. the service processing time in Time reserved for communication processing SD315 For a Universal model QCPU configure Service Processing Setting in the PLC System tab of the PLC parameter window 229 suononuisur eyep 1 9 peyeoipeg 104 sBunjes 2 6 15 4 Organization of the Dedicated Instruction Sections The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation Instruction name A device with O is applicable to the instruction Descriptions of setting data and data type 10 4 JPIGP READ Beading Data from Another Station s rogrammable Controller Reads data from the device of another station progra Start contact 2 JP READ JPREAD Jn 51 05 02 2 nE Start contact 52 GP READ JH GPREAD Un 51 01 02 1527 Available devices Internal device Linkdirectdevice Intelligent Setting data System user File function module oe register device ees Word Bit Word UG Zn KH 6n 62 o o o 02 3 1 Local devices and file registers set for each program cannot be used 2 T C D W ST SD and SW can be used When the target station is a Universal model QCPU or a Basic model QCPU
89. 0 No designation 1 or higher Notification accumulated count 20594 Accumulated count of unlock 0 X 50724 process normal completion i 20595 Accumulated count of unlock oe Remote 5 cs 50734 process abnormal end Yo password 5 20596 Monitoring area function Connection Accumulated count of lock Q 50744 monitoring No 1 process normal completion 5 20597 Accumulated count of lock 0 T 5 50754 process abnormal end 3 20598 Accumulated count of lock E 50764 process based on close D 20604 to 20608 507 to 50804 20609 to 20613 50814 to 50854 20614 to 20618 5086 to 508 20619 to 20623 508 to 508 20624 to 20628 5090 to 50944 Connection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 47 Address Decimal Hexadecimal Application Name Initial value Hexadecimal Decimal Programming tool setting applicability 20629 to 20633 095 to 5099 20634 to 20638 B09A to 509
90. 0 No received mail in the server 110 15 The number of mails remaining in the server 16 The number of mails in the server is 16 or more Dedicated instruction normal completion count 58714 The cumulative number of normal completions of the dedicated instruction MRECV is stored 0 The instruction has not been executed or no executions have resulted in normal completion 1 or more The cumulative number of normal completions of the MRECV instruction Dedicated instruction abnormal completion count 58724 The cumulative number of abnormal ends of the dedicated instruction MRECV is stored 0 The MRECV instruction has not been executed or no executions have resulted in abnormal end 1 or more The cumulative number of abnormal ends of the MRECV instruction Normal receiving count 58734 The cumulative number of received e mails forwarded by the E71 to the mail buffer data area is stored 0 No mail has been transferred 1 or more The number of normal mail transfer completions Attached file receiving count 58744 The cumulative number of e mails with an attachment received by the E71 is stored 0 No e mail with an attachment has been received 1 or more The number of normal reception of e mails with an attachment Server inquiry count 58754 The cumulative number of inquiries to the receive mail server according to the parameter setting is sto
91. 009 9 9 Error description Action C113 An e mail without an attachment was received This error occurs when an attachment is not read normally Specify the attachment on the sending side Check the program on the sending side If data sending using the MSEND instruction previously failed with the sending source of the mail server check the destination of the MSEND instruction Check if the e mail specifications such as the encoding decoding style and file format on the sending side are the same as those for the Ethernet module Receive an e mail with an unknown destination and unknown destination server from the SMTP server C1144 An e mail that was received has an attachment with an invalid name Check if the file extension of the attachment is bin or asc on the sending side Check that the e mail is not compressed or encrypted Check the destination of the MSEND instruction Receive an e mail with an unknown destination and unknown destination server from the SMTP server C115 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual
92. 1 289 Aq 9 5 e ui eq sueis S 9 1 6 6 Error Code List This section describes the error codes abnormal codes of the errors that may occur in each process for performing communications between the E71 and a connected device as well as errors caused by process requests issued from the CPU module of the own station the error details and the actions to be taken The following table lists the types of errors that may occur Error type Description Buffer memory area that stores the error code Errors occurring in the initial process Setting value error Initial process error Page 291 Section 16 6 1 Errors occurring in the open process Setting value error Open process error Page 291 Section 16 6 2 Errors occurring in communications using a fixed buffer sending with the connected device Specified data error Sending error Page 291 Section 16 6 3 Page 291 Section 16 6 4 Errors occurring in communications using a fixed buffer with the connected device Specified data error Communication error excluding errors occurring in communications using a fixed buffer sending with the connected device Page 291 Section 16 6 4 Errors returned to the connected device when communicating with it Errors occurring while communicating with the des
93. 1 _ 2 PING Test Check at Communication Time 10 Seconds Close r Result IP Address Etror Code 1 10 397 85 223 10 97 85 224 Station IP Address Input Style DEC HEX Number of Response Nodes 2 2 APPENDICES Click the button in the Ethernet Diagnostics window Loop Test Diagnostics lt gt Ethernet Diagnostics gt Target Module Setting under Module No Configure the settings and click the Execute button to display the test results Point If the same IP address or station number is assigned to multiple stations only the results of the station that responds first are displayed 361 1591 3oeqdoo Z S xipueddy x99u2 snjejs eur c xipueddy c Action for abnormal end If the loopback test fails No response or an error code is displayed Displayed test Status of the target Cause Action result E71 Initial processing normal completion address Normal completion status INIT LED turns on Correct the following parameter settings The initial process for the target E71 has not Basic setting been completed normally Ethernet operation setting Initial setting There is an error such as cable 6 Check the cable disconnection and line disconnection in the Check the transceiver line connection to the target E71 The IP address of the target E71 is No error No response No er
94. 1 Execution environment of the program example a CPU module side Item Description A model name of the QCPU in the E71 mounted station Q25HCPU E71 I O signal X Y00 to X Y1F E71 IP address C0 00 01 FDy 192 00 01 253 E71 port number 20006 Ethernet operation Refer to 3 a in this section Programming tool setting setting Open setting Refer to 3 b in this section b Connected device side Item Description Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Ver 2002 Service Pack2 Operation environment Ethernet interface board model name WINSOCK compatible board Library to link WSOCK32 LIB Visual C9 NET 2003 manufactured by Microsoft Corporation Software development environment This setting is not required because the ARP function can be MAC address used IP address Received upon an Active open Port number Received upon an Active open c Communication protocol TCP IP is used 2 Outline of the program example a Program on the CPU module side Because parameters are set on the programming tool no program is required b Program on the connected device side Read write data from to the CPU module using the library described above Write in word units for five points from DO to 04 Read in word units for five points from DO to D4 389 0 uSUM 0 xipueddy ejdures xipueddy OPIS
95. 18 1 8 2 15 7 BUFRCV 22 5 8 1 3 1 8 0 9 14 0 7 1 1 communications binary code word 1017 communications words and fixed buffer BUFRCVS 0 8 2 9 0 5 0 9 0 3 0 7 0 2 0 6 communications procedure exists ERRCLR All error information is 34 22 20 17 cleared ERRRD An initial error code is 24 12 07 _ 960 words 16 4 15 7 154 15 4 SEND 11 5 7 9 7 5 15 480 words 16 8 11 2 10 8 10 8 960 words 6 8 4 3 3 8 3 8 RECV 1 8 2 1 2 0 2 0 480 words 4 3 3 2 2 9 2 9 960 words 1 5 0 9 0 7 0 6 RECVS 0 8 0 6 0 3 0 2 icafi 480 words 12 0 8 0 5 pa Sommunications 1 d between READ d 960 words 24 3 28 8 28 2 M 19 2 E71 mounted 17 1 SREAD 480 words 20 9 227 2177 13 9 Stations WRITE 960 words uE 24 4 wa 28 8 s 284 18 9 SWRITE 480 words 19 8 23 0 22 271 13 7 ZNRD 12 1 14 1 14 4 17 1 13 8 16 6 9 8 11 8 230 words ZNWR 12 0 14 8 14 2 17 5 13 9 16 4 9 8 12 0 Time between the UINI instruction UINI 26 9 26 7 26 7 26 7 accepted and a reinitialization process completed ECPRTCL 2 1 When data is sent through the tracking cable of a redundant system add the tracking transfer time For data transfer time of when the tracking cable is used refer to the following LL QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 The processing time of the ECPRTCL instruction differs depending on a connected device or a protocol 335 xipueddy QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B
96. 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C136 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C1374 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C138 The SMTP server is in process and an error response Check if the mail address of the Ethernet module has been was received Mailbox not found correctly set Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C1394 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the
97. 2 to 32767 TCP Resend Timer Set the time to resend ACK if it is not returned when a connection is opened or data is sent in TCP IP This timer is also used for Time to Live for the ARP function ARP is resent by the time of TCP resend timer value 2 if no response to an ARP request is returned This timer is also used as the minimum set time for arrival monitoring time for data link instructions 2 to 32767 TCP End Timer When closing the TCP IP connection by the own station set the monitoring time for waiting for a FIN from the connected device after the own station sends a FIN and an ACK is returned from the connected device If a FIN is not received from the connected device within the time specified by the TCP end timer value a RST is sent to the connected device and the connection is forcibly closed 2 to 32767 IP Assembly Timer Response Monitoring Timer The communication data may be divided at the IP level before being sent due to the buffer limitation of the sending station or the receiving station Set the waiting time for the divided data in such a case Set the following waiting time Time for waiting a response after a command is sent For receiving divided messages time until the last message is received after the first message is received 1 to 32766 2 to 32767 Dest Confirmation Start Interval Set the time until starting the alive check after communications with the connected devi
98. 3 7 5 1 10 9 11 3 1 Table 11 3 3 REMARKS 11 4 2 Figure Appendix 1 1 2 Table Appendix 2 2 2 a Appendix 8 Addition Section 11 3 3 error code C1BAy 11 4 2 Appendix 4 4 Apr 2003 SH NA 080009 F Model Addition QJ71E71 B5 Model Deletion QJ71E71 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 5 6 1 3 1 4 1 2 1 2 2 2 5 2 6 2 7 3 1 3 4 3 8 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 5 2 2 REMARKS 5 5 2 3 REMARKS 5 3 5 4 2 1 c 5 4 3 5 5 6 5 6 2 POINT 5 9 1 5 9 6 3 6 6 2 10 8 10 9 11 1 1 11 2 2 2 11 3 11 4 5 Figure Appendix 1 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 4 Appendix 7 Appendix 10 Appendix 11 Addition Section 11 2 1 POINT 11 3 3 error code COB2 COEO to COEF C171 to C17F Appendix 9 Jul 2003 SH NA 080009 G Correction The Manual s Usage and Structure Section 1 4 1 2 2 1 2 7 3 8 4 7 5 2 2 REMARKS 5 5 POINT 5 6 1 5 6 2 7 5 2 8 6 2 11 4 Appendix 2 Appendix 8 1 Appendix 11 Appendix 12 Sep 2003 SH NA 080009 H Correction Section 1 4 1 3 8 5 2 3 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 8 Aug 2005 SH NA 080009 J Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 1 5 1 3 2 2 2 7 5 2 3 5 11 3 10 9 11 3 3 error code C0624 9 COCOH COC44 COD74 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 4 4 Appendix 11 Appendix 8 1 Appendix 8 2 Appendix 9 Jun 200
99. 3 3 Remote password check procedure This section describes the procedure of the remote password check performed by the E71 1 Communications in which an entered remote password is checked When the following parameters have been set for the E71 mounted on the QCPU station the E71 checks a remote password for communication requests listed below When a remote password has been set in the CPU module When the connection where the E71 communicates with a connected device has been set as the target for the remote password check The E71 checks an entered remote password for a communication request addressed to the own station another station received from a connected device The E71 performs a send process upon the following send requests without checking an entered remote password Send request from the CPU module on the own station such as communications using a fixed buffer Communication request from the connected device including the programming tool connected to the CPU module on the own station to send data to another station upon request from the CPU module Remote password Path checked using a remote password 99 Path not checked using a remote password Programming tool Remote Remote password password Programming tool 1 A communication request from the connected device cannot be accepted because a remote password check has been set If the remot
100. 5 2 3 5 11 5 8 5 1 10 9 Appendix 1 1 Aug 2010 SH NA 080009 O Correction Addition of CC Link IE Field Network to the whole manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 2 1 2 5 2 4 1 1 4 9 1 5 9 3 5 11 5 12 3 11 3 3 11 4 May 2012 SH NA 080009 P The entire manual has been revised due to the manual layout change Jun 2013 SH NA 080009 Q Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELEVANT MANUALS TERM Chapter 1 Section 3 1 3 2 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 4 3 5 2 5 1 7 1 1 7 1 4 12 4 12 8 12 9 3 14 3 4 14 6 2 14 6 3 14 6 4 14 7 15 1 15 2 1 15 5 15 6 15 8 15 9 15 10 15 11 15 12 15 13 16 4 16 6 Appendix 1 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 Appendix 5 Appendix 7 Appendix 10 Appendix 11 1 Addition Chapter 10 11 Section 15 7 16 3 16 5 5 16 5 6 16 5 7 Appendix 8 Japanese Manual Version SH 080004 W This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 430 Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to b
101. 5000 in the buffer memory Open the connection with the connected device Check if the open close processes for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program Read Open error code address 124 7 in the communication status storage area Then check the error details and correct the error Is the IP address setting of the connected device correct Does the Protocol in the open setting match with that of the connected device TCP IP or UDP IP Check and correct the IP address of the connected device Check and correct the settings if they are unmatched Is Predefined protocol set to Fixed Buffer Communication in the open setting Set Predefined protocol to Fixed Buffer Communication in the open setting Configure the setting so that the fixed buffer setting Send or Receive in the open setting matches the communication type of the protocol Send Only Receive Only or Send amp Receive 1 Is Predefined protocol ready X1D on Write the protocol setting data to the E71 Was the ECPRTCL instruction executed Correct the execution conditions of the ECPRTCL instruction Was the ECPRTCL instruction completed normally Check the error code in the ECPRTCL instruction completion status area and correct the error Is the execution protocol number set to the control data of the ECPRTCL instruction Set the e
102. 9 pL the redundant system supported application and the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module the redundant system supported application automatically changes the communication path and communicates with the control system CPU module through the standby system CPU module 169 Tera 6 Operation of the standby system CPU module 1 The connected device accesses the control system CPU module around the path Because the received data is addressed to the control 2 Communications with the control system CPU module is system CPU module data is relayed to the control continued via a tracking cable system CPU module through the tracking cable 211 14 6 3 Parameter settings This section describes the parameter settings for using the E71 in a redundant system The following settings are required Basic setting Ethernet operation setting Open setting if necessary Chapter for each function Redundant settings 1 Basic setting Only the settings for a redundant system that differ from those for a single CPU system are listed Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Necessary Setting Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting
103. Already Set Start No Valid Module During Other Station Access In terli issi etel Interlink Transmission Parameters Please input 16 point unit HEX to start If No in whic 1 lj bed Routing Parameters Assignment Image Group Setting Check End Cancel MEUS Print Window Print Window Preview Item Description Setting range Network Type Select Ethernet Main Base Set the station number of the E71 in the system A Set the Station No station number of the E71 in the system B in the 1 to 64 Redundant Setting Online Select the operation mode of the E71 in the system A Set Offline Mode the operation mode of the E71 in the system B in the Redundant Settin Self Loopback Test d HW Test 2 Ethernet operation setting The IP address configured in the Ethernet operation setting becomes the IP address of the E71 in the system A Set the IP address of the E71 in the system B in the redundant settings 212 3 Redundant settings CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS Configure the settings of the system B and issue of a system switching request Redundant Setting r System B Setting Station and Mode Setting System Station No i Mode Station No and Mode Setting System B Station No Mode IP Address Setting Input Format DEC Y System System B Online Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout Cable Disconnectio
104. CODD System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative E Correct the specified arrival monitoring time Data could not be received within the specified arrival L CODE Correct the specified channel number monitoring time Check the status of the send source station and relay station 314 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action CODFy System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 0 An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists tak
105. CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific
106. CPU module in a redundant system The following shows a communication procedure example Place the E71 in open wait status and perform open close processes from the connected device Example of a communication procedure Perform the open process to the system A Perform the open process to the system B ON The system A is the control system Is SM1515 operating system status on OFF The system A is the standby system The TRK CABLE ERR has occurred For details refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Is SM1516 operating system status on ON The system A is the standby system ON The system B is the control system Is SM1515 operating system status on OFF The system B is the standby system Is SM1516 operating system status on ON The system B is the standby system Acommand message is sent No of the request destination module 03DOH Acommand message is sent No of the request destination module O3DOH uonouny uiejsAs Was the response message normally sent Was the response message normally sent ulejs s juepunpai e ui suoneoiunuiuioo p 9 vL Is this process repeated Is this process repeated Perform the close process to the system A Perform the close process to the system B Perfor
107. CPU module of the own station Specified data error Communication error Not stored stored in the complete status area of the instructions Errors occurring in communications using the dedicated instructions from the CPU module of the own station Specified data error Communication data error Not stored stored in the complete status area of the instructions 290 1 2 3 4 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Initial error code address 69 The error codes generated when the initial process is executed are stored Error codes are stored in binary when Initial abnormal completion signal X1A is on The error codes are cleared when Initial normal completion signal X19 turns on but can be also cleared by the following processes Resetting or powering off the CPU module Writing O to the initial error code storage area using a program Open error code address 7Cy to C14 58241 to 58694 The result of the open process for connection with the connected device is stored in binary 0 Normal completion Values other than 0 Abnormal end Open abnormal detection signal X18 ON The error codes are cleared by the following operations Reopening the connection that caused an open error Powering off and on or resetting the CPU module Fixed buffer sending error code address 70 to C24 5825 to 586 The error codes generated when an error has occurred in data sending to the d
108. Destination existence confirmation resending time the instruction ends abnormally Point For the error occurred when the communication ends abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory 304 Section 16 6 3 jo90 0 d jo adA uoneoiunuuuoo uoee jo uonejedo 8 xipueddy peuyepeug JO pue 8 xipueddy 375 Appendix 8 2 Verification operation of receive packet This section describes the verification operation for a receive packet expected packet when the E71 communicates with a connected device with protocols whose communication type includes receiving 1 When received data are matched to a receive packet expected packet The receive process is completed when the receive data are compared with the receive packet expected packet and they are matched Receive packet expected packet Matched Receive data J Received 2 When multiple receive packets expected packets are specified The predefined protocol support function enables to register up to 16 receive packets expected packets When the data are received the registered receive packet expected packet is verified in order of registration When the receive packet expected packet is matched to the data the receive process is completed Receive packets m expected packets No 1 No 2 No 3 No 16 pu
109. ERR LED Off request ON Open completion signal OFF ON At off request OFF Open abnormal detection signal 2 X18 Y18 Use prohibited ON At off request OFF x19 Open abnormal detection signal Y19 Initial request signal ON Normal completion OFF ON At request OFF Open abnormal detection signal X1A Y1A Use prohibited ON Abnormal end OFF X1B Use prohibited Y1B Use prohibited COM ERR LED lit confirmation 2 X1C Y1C Use prohibited ON lit OFF Predefined protocol ready X1D Y1D Use prohibited ON Ready OFF X1E Use prohibited 1 Use prohibited Watchdog timer error detection m Y1F Use prohibited ON Watchdog timer error OFF Point Do not use any use prohibited signal as an I O signal to the CPU module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system The I O signals listed in this section are mainly applied when QnA series module programs are used For the Q series the signals for intelligent function modules are turned on and off with dedicated instructions When QnA series module programs are used it is recommended to replace the signals with the dedicated instructions described in the section that describes the corresponding functions 33 sjeuBis Jo 1S1 3 5 Buffer Memory This section describes the E71 buffer memory 3 5 1 Configuration of the buffer memory This section describes a buff
110. FLAG OFF if CloseflagB FLAG ON nErrorStatus closesocket socketnoB CloseflagB FLAG OFF printf Program is closed Press any key M Dmykeyin getchar WSACleanup return Shutdown processing System Shutdown flag OFF System A Shutdown processing System B Shutdown flag OFF System B 1 Close processing System A 1 Connection end flag OFF System A 1 Close processing System B 1 Connection end flag OFF System B 1 Waiting for key input Winsock DLL release APPENDICES Appendix 10 3 When Visual Basic NET is used This section describes the program execution environment data communication details and a sample program for when Visual Basic NET is used on the program of the connected device 1 Execution environment of the program example a CPU module side Item Description A model name of the QCPU in the E71 mounted station Q25HCPU E71 I O signal X Y00 to X Y1F E71 IP address C0 00 01 FD 192 00 01 253 E71 port number 20004 Ethernet operation Refer to 3 a in this section Programming tool Setting setting Open setting Refer to 3 b in this section b Connected device side Item Description Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Ver 2002 Service Pack2 Operation environment Ethernet interface board model name WINSOCK compatible board Visual Basic NET 2003 manufactured by Mi
111. Fixed data D400 2Byte b Non conversion Variable Serial No D10 D10 Fixed Length 2Byte LowerUpper Byte No Swap 3 Static Data Fixed data Non conversion Variable Network No D11 D11 Fixed Length 1 Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Non conversion Variable Station No D12 D12 Fixed Length 1 Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap Variable Requested module VO No D13 D13 Fixed Length 2Byte LowerUpper Byte No Swap Static Data For future expansion ies Length Response data length Object element9 1 J HEX Reverse 2Byte 9 Static Data 0000 2Byte HEN Non conversion Variable Response data D1000 D1001 D1960 Variable Lenath 1 920Byte LowerUpper Byte No Swap Change Type Add New Paste Delete Receive Packet Error response Packet Setting wp D400 2Bve D20 D20 Fixed Length 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 0000 2Byte D21 D21 Fixed Lenath 1 Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap D22 D22 Fixed Length 1 Byte LowerUpper Byte No Swap D23 D23l Fixed Lenath 2Byte Lower Upper Byte No Swap 04 Byte Object element9 15 HEX Reverse 2Bvte J Non conversion Variable Endcode _________ D24 D24 Fixed Length 2Byte Lower UpperByte No Swap 10 Non conversion Variable Network No D25 D251 Fixed Length iByte Lower UpperByte No Swap Non conversion Variable Station No D26 D261 Fixed Length iByte Lower UpperByte No Swap 12 Non conversion Variable Requ
112. Manual MODEL QJ71E71 U KI E MODEL 13JL88 SH NA 080009 Q 1306 MEE s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 iem NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
113. Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay function b7 b6 4 00 Automatic response system default 01 IP address computation system 01001 10 Table exchange system 11 Use together system FTP function setting b9 b8 00 Do not use 01 Use default Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use 510 10 Initial process E By to Ay parameter ystem area setting 11 mE TCP ULP timer value 8 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 60 12 TCP zero window timer value 144 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 20 13 TCP resend timer value 144 8 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 20 14 TCP end timer value 284 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 40 15 IP assembly timer value Au Monitoring Setting time setting value x 500 ms 10 timer 16 Response monitoring timer value 101 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 60 47 Destination existence confirmation starting ABO interval timer value 1200 Setting time setting value x 500 ms Destination existence confirmation interval 18 i 144 imer value 124 n 20 Setting time setting value x 500 ms 19 Destination existence confirmation resending 13 time 3 35 Kowen yng sesseJppe 10157 Z G Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal
114. No 9 Fixed buffer No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 56 CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION CHAPTER 4 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION This chapter describes how to connect an E71 to Ethernet For how to communicate with connected devices after the E71 is connected refer to the communication procedure Page 78 CHAPTER 7 Checkbox System planning 1 5 Page 27 CHAPTER 3 Plan the system configuration of the E71 Page 59 CHAPTER 5 Mounting 37 25 CHAPTER 2 Mount the E71 on the base unit Page 72 Section 6 1 Connect an Ethernet cable to the E71 Page 73 Section 6 2 Setting parameters 80 Section 7 1 2 Set following parameters which are required to start up Page 81 Section 7 1 3 the E71 on a programming tool Basic setting Ethernet operation setting Restarting the CPU module CS QCPU User s Manual Reflect the parameter settings by powering off and on the CPU Hardware Design module or resetting the CPU module Maintenance and Inspection Network diagnostics Page 354 Appendix 5 Check that the cables are connected properly or that communications are performed normally with the set parameters PING test loopback test v Continued to COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 57 58 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter describes the system configuratio
115. Online lt gt Write to PLC 1 0 Address Model Select a target module and write the protocol setting data to the flash ROM Please save in the protocol setting file because the data to be written to module does not include the following information Non written Data Manufacturer Packet Name Protocol Detailed Setting Type Version Explanation Packet Setting Element Name 1 When the initial process is not completed the protocol setting data cannot be written to the flash ROM Before writing the data set the network parameters and check that the initial process is completed The initial process completion can be checked using Initial normal completion signal X19 Point When writing the data to the Redundant CPU pay attention to the followings To write the data connect directly to the CPU module or connect via an intelligent function module on a main base unit connection via an intelligent function module on an extension base is not available Select Not specified for Target System in the Transfer Setup of GX Works2 When the Target System 15 specified an error occurs in the CPU module A system switching during data writing may cause the data not to be written to the flash ROM Change the operation mode of the Redundant CPU to separate mode before writing to prevent such situation from occurring If a system switching has occurred during data writing write the data
116. Online Change Select whether to enable connected devices to write data in MC protocol communications while the CPU module is in RUN Selected Enable Not selected Disable TCP Existence Confirmation Setting Select an alive check method in TCP IP communications Use the KeepAlive Use the Ping 1 Do not use a programming tool that supports this setting together with one not supporting the setting Doing so may change the setting to Use the Ping This setting is ignored if the E71 does not support the alive check function using KeepAlive The PING command is used for alive check RESET For settings to use the E71 in a redundant system refer to the parameter settings for the redundant system function Page 212 Section 14 6 3 81 Bues uonejedo jeuieuj3 LZ 5 Bumes pZ 82 1 Initial Timing This setting configures the open timing of the connection where TCP Passive open or UDP has been selected under Open System in the open setting gt Page 83 Section 7 1 4 a Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time Connections are opened or closed using a program Communications cannot be performed while the switch on the CPU module is set to STOP b Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Connections always wait for the open status according to the Open System para
117. QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 TCPIIP TCP IP UDP IP gt communications communications communications communications 5 Kdf Ke Kdf 2 Communications using a binary code 12 0 0065 10 0 0069 25 0 020 20 0 019 a Communications using an ASCII code 12 0 030 10 0 029 25 0 068 21 0 068 3 A b No procedures Tfs St Kdf x Df Tfs time from the start of sending to the completion of sending unit ms St Sending station scan time Ke Kdf Constant Refer to the table below Df Number of send data bytes QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 UDP IP TCP IP UDP IP communications communications communications communications Ke Kdf Ke Kdf Ke Kdf Ke Kdf Communications using a binary code 7 0 0018 4 0 0014 16 0 0057 9 0 0025 Calculation example The time between the QJ71E71 B5 sending 1017 word data of a binary code and it completing the sending when the QJ71E71 B5 communicates with another QJ71E71 B5 in TCP IP by the Procedure Exist method unit ms Assume that the scan time on the sending side is 10ms and the scan time on the receiving side is 8ms 63 34 ms 10 25 0 020 x 1017 8 331 2 Minimum processing time of communications using a random access buffer Trs Kr Kdr x Df ACK processing time of a connected device added only for TCP IP communications 5 The time betwee
118. Self loopback test 7 Page 364 Appendix 6 1 16 5 3 A dedicated instruction is not completed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when a dedicated instruction is not completed Check item Action Set the network parameter mode to Online lt Page 80 Section 7 1 2 If a dedicated instruction is executed in the Offline mode no error occurs but the instruction is not completed 15 the network parameter mode set to Online If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 Page 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test 7 s Page 364 Appendix 6 1 279 wojdwAs Aq BunoousejqnoJ 9 pejoeuuoo y jues e 9A189931 5 73 SUL 0 69 16 5 4 MC protocol communications cannot be performed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the E71 cannot perform MC protocol communications Check item Action Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of 5000 in the buffer memory Open the connection with the connected device Check if the open close process for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program Did the connected device send a command Send a command to the E71
119. System B Wn Jelse printf Send failure System B M Send completion processing if SendFlag FLAG OFF Sockerror ERROR_SEND ERROR SEND Error handling return SOCK if CloseflagA FLAG_ON ShutdownflagA FLAG_OFF Shutdown flag OFF if shutdown socketnoA 2 SOCK OK Send receive inhibit processing System A Sockerror ERROR_SHUTDOWN ERROR NO ERROR 1 Error handling return SOCK if CloseflagB FLAG ON ShutdownflagB FLAG OFF Shutdown flag OFF if shutdown socketnoB 2 SOCK OK Send receive inhibit processing System B Sockerror rERROR NO ERROR ERROR SHUTDOWN Error handling return SOCK CloseflagA FLAG OFF 1 Connection end flag OFF if closesocket socketnoA SOCK OK 1 Close processing System Sockerror ERROR_CLOSE ERROR NO ERROR 1 Error handling return SOCK CloseflagB FLAG OFF 1 Connection end flag OFF if closesocket socketnoB SOCK OK 1 Close processing System B Sockerror ERROR NO ERROR ERROR CLOSE Error handling return SOCK_NG To the next page 405 0 EnSIA UBYM 2 01 xipueddy ajdwes 0 xipueddy y 5 pesn si 19 WSACleanup Winsock DLL release printf nQJ_test End n nNormally completed n printf Program is closed Press any key M Dmykeyin getchar
120. The program example of the connected device accessing the Q25HCPU in the E71 mounted station is described In this program data of DO to 04 five points in the Q25HCPU in the E71 mounted station are read with an A compatible 1E frame command 01 Batch read in word units The following are basic operation procedures Sending a command with the line disconnected Connect the line After completing the connection the E71 sends a command Reconnecting the line with it connected Disconnect the line After the disconnection is completed reconnect it The following is an outline of how to compile a program created using Microsoft Corporation Visual Basic NET Start Visual NET Create a project From File 2 New Project select Visual Basic Project in Project Types and Windows Application in Templates and set the project name e g AJSAMP and location Create a form and a program Use the toolbox Button to create the sample window shown below Form1 vb and create a program referring to the sample program On the Build menu click Build Solution to create an execution AJSAMP EXE Exit the Visual Basic NET Execute the Window example Form 1 vb Form1 Object name eed CD BEH Button1 Connects the station with the E71 commandsend 4 Button2 Sends the 1E frame command reading in units of words 1 Disconnect pa Butto
121. abnormal M else nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError Switch error kind case ERROR SOCKET printf Socket could not be created System A n break case ERROR BIND printf Bind could not be executed System break case ERROR CONNECT printf Connection could not be established System A n break case ERROR SEND printf Send could not be executed M break case ERROR SHUTDOWN printf Shutdown could not be executed System A n break case ERROR_CLOSE printf Normal close could not be executed System A n break 55 Switch error kind o case ERROR SOCKET printf Socket could not be created System B n F break 8 case ERROR BIND 25 printf Bind could not be executed System B n 29 break S 5 case ERROR CONNECT printf Connection could not be established System B n 5 break case ERROR SHUTDOWN 9 8 printf Shutdown could not be executed System B n 3 5 case ERROR CLOSE 58 printf Normal close could not be executed System B n 2 2 break 5 printf Error code is n nErrorStatus To the next page 407 408 if ShutdownflagA FLAG ON nErrorStatus shutdown socketnoA 2 ShutdownflagA FLAG OFF if ShutdownflagB FLAG ON nErrorStatus shutdown socketnoB 2 ShutdownflagB FLAG OFF if CloseflagA FLAG ON nErrorStatus closesocket socketnoA CloseflagA
122. access buffer i Device memory R20000 Data received Data received k R2oo09 __ process nse Q Receive completion flag 11720 0 U0 4L BMOV G11710 R20000 K10 i The receive completion flag is provided at the end of the received data The receive completion flag is monitored When the receive completion flag turns on the data is transmitted from the random access buffer to the CPU module sseooy wopuey e Burs 1 ajdwexg 2 185 CHAPTER 14 oTHER FUNCTIONS This chapter describes basic functions of the E71 other than those described in the preceding chapters 14 1 Router Relay Function This section describes the router relay function 14 1 1 Applications This function allows the E71 to communicate with connected devices on other Ethernet networks via a router and gateway This function does not allow the E71 to operate as a router One default router and up to eight routers can be set 14 1 2 Parameter settings Configure the settings in the following window D Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Select Ethernet under Network c Operation Setting Network Parameter Setting the Ethernet Router DE Router Relay Function 4 Subnet Mask Pattern I Default Router IP
123. an error with the cable connection between the own station and the connected station If the line is heavily loaded reduce the load C083 The communication process was abnormally ended in Increase the number of resends for the data link instructions E communications using data link instructions Increase the time reserved for the communication process For a Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU use Time reserved for communication process SD315 For a Universal model QCPU configure the service processing setting in PLC System under PLC Parameter Check if the own station relay station connected station is running normally Check if there is a problem with the cable connection between the own station and the connected station 2 5 Increase the TCP resend timer value The communication process was abnormally ended in M C084 bie Increase the time reserved for the communication process communications using data link instructions j For a Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU or Redundant CPU use Time reserved for communication process SD315 For a Universal model QCPU configure the service processing setting in PLC System under PLC Parameter The own station s channel specified by another station C0854 communications using data link instructions is Execute the request from another station again currently in use A message ex
124. before the open process already completed 325 157 JOA 9 94 JONG eui ui peJojs sepoo JON 9 9 Error description Action code The open process of the specified connection has not C1B1y Perform the open process been completed The OPEN or CLOSE instruction is being executed in AM C1B24 Try again after the OPEN CLOSE instruction is completed the specified connection C1B3 Another send or receive instruction is being executed in Change the channel number H the specified channel Try again after the send or receive instruction is completed n ES Set the arrival monitoring time to a value within the allowable C1B4 The specified arrival monitoring time is incorrect range Data could not be received within the specified arrival m 1 5 OMM Correct the specified arrival monitoring time monitoring time 2 ds Correct the specified send mail address number 1 6 The specified send mail address number is incorrect ne Correct the send mail address setting in the parameter setting C1B7 A reading operation was executed while no receiving If there is a mail received in the mail information execute the H e mail was stored in the mail buffer data area MRECV instruction The RECV instruction was executed for the channel that Correct the execution condition of the RECV
125. change the Ethernet operation setting 5000 Set the parameters in 51 5 0 Do not change 1 Change Specification of transmission speed and communication mode changes b12 to b15 Specify the transmission speed and the communicate mode 0 Do not change 1 Auto negotiation 2 100Mbps full duplex 3 100Mbps half duplex 4 10Mbps full duplex 5 10Mbps half duplex 51 3 Own station 000090041 51 4 IP address Specify the IP address of the own station to User Specify the Ethernet operation setting Communication data code setting b1 0 Binary Code 1 ASCII Code TCP existence confirmation setting b4 0 Use the Ping 1 Use the KeepAlive Ethernet Send frame setting b5 As described in 51 5 operation 0 Ethernet User the left setting 1 IEEE 802 3 Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 0 Disable 1 Enable Initial timing setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN Communications possible at STOP time 51 the E71 and performing a reinitialization process Initial normal completion signal X19 turns on 268 The E71 enables data exchange to be resumed by clearing the address information of the connected device retained in 3 Functions This instruction re initializes the module specified by Un CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Completion of the UINI instruction can be checked wi
126. completion signal address 50001 b0 turns off and data communications are disabled After the internal process of the E71 is completed the connection returns to the open acceptance enable status 1 An open request SYN received after the normal completion of an initial process and before the E71 is in the open acceptance enable status will cause an error and the E71 sends a connection forced close RST Point When the open close processes are performed from the E71 side using a dedicated instruction even if Always wait for OPEN has been selected for the Ethernet operation setting the connection will not return to the open acceptance enable status after the close process is completed CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 2 When Do not wait for OPEN is selected for the Ethernet operation setting Executing the OPEN CLOSE instructions is required on the E71 to make the E71 enter open close wait status before receiving an open close request from the connected device When the open process is normally completed data sending and receiving are enabled For the OPEN CLOSE instructions refer to DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Page 227 CHAPTER 15 Ex Open close processes for the connection number 1 Parameter communications Power on completed Open status Open enable status closed Active open acceptance enabled Closed status Initial normal completion signal X19 OPEN instruction
127. connection can be configured 1 This applies when a repeater hub is used For the number of levels that can be constructed when a switching hub is used consult with the manufacturer of the switching hub used 68 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Point During high speed communications 100Mbps using 100BASE TX connection a communication error may occur due to high frequency noise from devices other than a programmable controller in a given installation environment The following describes countermeasures to be taken on the E71 side to avoid high frequency noise influence Wiring connection Do not bundle the cable with the main circuit or power cable or do not place it near those lines Put the cable in a duct Communication method Use TCP IP for data communications with connected devices Increase the number of retries of communications if needed 10Mbps communications Use 10Mbps hub for the E71 and set the data transmission speed to 10Mbps Change the transmission speed of the E71 to 10Mbps using the UINI instruction 7 5 267 Section 15 13 Consult a network specialist for required devices 2 10BASE T connection To configure a system for 10BASE T connection use devices that meet the IEEE 802 3 10BASE T standards E71 Connected device EIL 6905069011
128. data sending and receiving are enabled For the OPEN CLOSE instructions refer to DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS s Page 227 CHAPTER 15 Ex Open close processes for the connection number 1 Parameter communications Power on completed Open status Open enable status closed Closed status Initial normal completion signal X19 OPEN instruction OPEN instruction completion device OPEN instruction completion device 1 CLOSE instruction gt 1 scan CLOSE instruction completion device Abnormally ended CLOSE instruction completion device 1 eunpeooud uedo Zg Z Open completion signal address 5000H o Q Internal process Internal process After parameter communications check that the initial process of the E71 is normally completed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open process using the OPEN instruction Open request signal address 50024 b0 ON The E71 performs the open process Internal process only Data communications are enabled when the open process is normally completed Start the close process using the CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF The E71 performs the close process Internal process only 000000 When the close process is normally completed data communications terminate 95 CHAPTER 8 CONNECTING MELSOFT PRODUCTS AND A G
129. dedicated instructions from other stations a communication timeout may occur CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 5 For use in a MELSECNET H remote I O station This section provides information on using an E71 in MELSECNET H remote station 1 System configuration The following shows the system configuration Remote master station Remote station pomme pee B Connected device C MELSECNET H remote network erreg Remote I O station 2 Parameter settings Configure the network parameters as follows a Ethernet operation setting Select Always wait for OPEN for the initial timing setting b Open setting Select Unpassive or Fullpassive in the open system for the TCP IP communication An auto open UDP port Vs Vs can be also used for UDP IP communication 3 Open close processes Perform the open close processes on the connected device side ulejs s 3 ue jo uonejs BOWS H LANDAS TA ur esn 103 9 65 4 Restrictions on the use of the functions The available functions are restricted as follows O Available x Not available
130. e int iRet Get LogicalStationNumber axActEasy F1 gt ActLogicalStationNumber Convert Tolnt32 textBox1 gt Text Connection iRet axActEasyIF1 Open if iRet 0 MessageBox Show The connection was successful else MessageBox Show String Format Connection Error 0x 0 x8 HEX box iRet S88 ER ER Kk Read Pokal o OH OH OH OH E E E ER private System Void button2 Click System Object sender System EventArgs e int iRet short sData 5 String szMessage String IpszarrData int iNumber String szReadData weJ6olg 2 6 xipueddy 6 xipueddy 0 4 are read iRet axActEasyIF1 ReadDeviceBlock2 DO 5 sData if iRet 0 IpszarrData new String 5 IpszarrData 0 DO D4 To the next page 385 386 Result display data is stored for iNumber 0 iNumber lt 5 IpszarrData iNumber sData iNumber ToString szReadData String Join IpszarrData MessageBox Show String Format DO D4 0 szReadData MessageBox Show String Format Read Error 0x 0 x8 HEX box iRet Disconnection AERA REAR EAE private System Void button3_Click System Object sender System EventArgs e int iRet Disconnection iRet axActEasylF1 gt Close
131. error in each communication process and take corrective action 7 s 280 Section 16 5 4 to Page 289 Section 16 5 15 278 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 5 2 The E71 frequently fails to receive a message sent from the connected device The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the E71 frequently fails to receive a message sent from the connected device Check item Action Are there many detected errors in Simultaneous There may be a heavy load on the Ethernet line due to data sending and receiving between connected devices 18 Taking action such as separating networks decreasing the number of data transmission error detection count address 18E and Has the error code 7 been stored in Error code end sending reduces the load on the Ethernet line code address 5 in the error log block Consult the network administrator and reduce the load on the Ethernet line If the packets cannot be received even though the number of received TCP Has the number in Received TCP packet count address packets has increased set the value of TCP Maximum Segment Transmission 1B8 and 1 9 increased setting area address to 80006 Then perform the initial process again Page 344 Appendix 4 If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 365 Appendix 6 2
132. examples of packet element data refer to Page 377 Appendix 8 3 1 Static Data Element Setting Static Data Send Element Name ASCII String X Setting Value 0 byte Setting Range 1 to 50 Cancel This element is used when a specific code or character string such as a command exists in a packet When sending The specified code and character string are sent When receiving Receive data are verified Multiple Static Data elements can be placed anywhere in the data part The following table lists the items Item Description Remark Element Name Set name of the element Select a data type of the setting value Code Type ASCII String ASCII Control Code HEX Set data within 1 to 50 bytes Code type and setting range are as follows Ex Setting Value ASCII String 204 to ASCII String ABC ASCII Control Code Control code of 00 to 1Fy and 7 ASCII Control Code STX HEX Hexadecimal data of 00 to FFy HEX FFFF 114 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 2 Length Element Setting Length Send Element Name Code Type Data Length Data Flow Calculating Range Start Calculating Range This element is used when an element indicating the data length is included in a packet When sending The data length of the specified range is calculated and the result is added to a send packet
133. has already been set in Pairing Open the setting is overwritten Point Because the fixed buffer of the connection with the connected device dedicated for receiving and the fixed buffer of the next connection dedicated for sending are paired set connection numbers 1 to 7 and 9 to 15 as receive connections Connection numbers 8 and 16 cannot be set 156 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 8 Broadcast Communications Broadcast communications mean that the same data is sent to all E71 mounted stations in the same Ethernet network and to the connected devices without specifying destinations Broadcast communications can be performed when the following conditions are met When UDP IP protocol is used When No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer or data communications using the predefined protocol are performed Point When connected devices in the same Ethernet network do not need to receive communication messages by broadcast communications a discarding process is required The user needs to determine the port numbers dedicated for data sending receiving for broadcast communications Sending receiving procedures to perform the broadcast communications in communications using the predefined protocol are same as that in communications using a fixed buffer except for setting Predefined protocol under Fixed Buffer Communication of the open setting 12 8 1 Sending receiving p
134. instruction 1 8 had received data Correct the channel number The OPEN instruction cannot be executed for the C1B94 M Correct the connection number specified connection C1BA The dedicated instruction was executed with the Execute the dedicated instruction after the initial process is i initialization not completed completed C1BB The target station CPU type is incorrect Correct the specified target station CPU type Correct the remote password and unlock lock the remote C2004 The remote password is incorrect password again The remote password status of the port used for t Td C2014 p After unlocking the remote password perform communications communications is in the lock status When accessing another station do not the remote password When another station was accessed the remote C202 on the relay station or access station or do not execute the remote password could not be unlocked password check on them Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C203y System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubish
135. is not confirmed When it is necessary to synchronize data sending receiving between the CPU module and the connected device use communications using a fixed buffer 3 Random access buffer address The address specified by the connected device and the address specified using the FROM TO instructions are different For details refer to the physical and logical addresses of a random access buffer 7 s Page 184 Section 13 6 13 6 Physical and Logical Addresses of a Random Access Buffer This section describes the start address of the E71 random access buffer without battery backup which is specified in commands Note that when designating the start address of a random access buffer the address specified by a connected device is different from that specified using the FROM TO instructions Physical address Address specified with the FROM TO instructions of a program Logical address Address specified by a connected device as the start address item in the command Physical address Buffer memory areas 680H 1664 Fixed buffer 267FH 9855 Logical address 2680 9856 0 Random access buffer 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 184 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 13 7 Example of Communications Using a Random Access Buffer The following figure shows an example of a write operation from a connected device Connected pesen CPU module E E71 4 device Random
136. lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot receive data with communications using a fixed buffer Check item Does the receive data length match with the amount of data actually received Action If the amount of the actually received data is smaller than the receive data length receive the remaining data If it is larger than the receive data length receive the excess data as the next request message or discard it Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of 5000 in the buffer memory Open the connection with the connected device Check if the open close processes for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program Read Open error code address 124 7C in the communication status storage area Then check the error details and correct the error Is the IP address setting of the connected device correct Check and correct the IP address of the connected device Does the communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP match with that of the connected device Use the same communication protocol TCP IP or UDP IP as that of the connected device Is the reception completion signal of the corresponding fixed buffer on Check the corresponding bit of 5005 in the buffer memory Data was not sent from the connected device Check the connected device on the sending side and
137. name D1 Start number of the device that stores receive data Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that System D2 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 1 For safety CPUs only connection numbers 1 to 8 can be specified If the specified value is out of range OPERATION ERROR error code 4101 occurs 2 Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by 52 0 System area Stores the status at completion 00005 Normal completion 52 1 Completion status System Values other than 00001 error code Abnormal end 253 dZ 69 3 Receive data Device D1 0 Item Receive data length Setting data Stores the data length of the data read from the fixed buffer data area Depending on the procedure of fixed buffer communications the data length is the number of words or the number of bytes Setting range code Number of words Procedure exists communications using a binary 1 to 1017 code Number of words Procedure exists communications using an ASCII 1 to 508 code Number of bytes No procedure communications using a binary 1 to 2046 Set by System D1 1 to D2 n Receive data Stores the data read from the fixed buffer data area starting from the smallest ad
138. network later is 00 26 92 DE 26 90 the value stored in each buffer memory area is as follows 234 1801 the third and fourth octets of the IP address 235 0A61 the first and second octets of the IP address 21121 52814 2E89 the fifth and sixth octets of the MAC address 21122 5282 9289 the third and fourth octets of the MAC address 21123 52834 0026 the first and second octets of the MAC address 21124 52844 2690 the fifth and sixth octets of the MAC address 21125 52854 92DE the third and fourth octets of the MAC address 21126 52864 0026 the first and second octets of the MAC address b Checking using the Ethernet diagnostics An error code COOF j is displayed in the Ethernet Diagnostics window and the IP address used in multiple stations is displayed in the Destination IP Address column The destination IP address can be checked only in the station with the same IP address station connected to the network later Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics Ethernet Diagnostics Target Module Setting Change IP Address Display le Module No ist Module YoAddess noon cpu 1 DEC HEX Parameter Status Error History Status of Each Connection Status of Each Protocol LED Status Received E mail Information Send E mail Information Number of Error Occurrences 1 Host Station Port Destination Destina
139. normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 323 157 JOA 9 94 JONG eui ui peJojs sepoo JON 9 9 Error description Action C1714 An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating C1724 C1734 An error was returned from the DNS server An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating C174 An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and P
140. of 4 bytes 4 bytes 1016 words A a Ea Communication Subheader Data length Text request source setting command HI I ILIHI I L NN N N Communication Subheader End code Ng request destination gt 2 H L s a S Y aa 2g 2 bytes 2 bytes Sg S Application data area a Response 149 150 6 Because an E71 automatically adds and deletes a header the user setting is not required Command Communications using 60H 00H a binary code Subheader b7 to bO 0 1 1 6 4 VE S Communications using 36H 30H 30H 30H an ASCII code Subheader c Data length setting The following are the data sizes of a text command Communications using a binary code Maximum of 1017 words Communications using an ASCII code Maximum of 508 words Response 67 to bO Subheader b7 to bO 1 1 1 0 0 E lt gt 45 30H CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER d Text command The following is the format of a command response Communications using a binary code Command format j Maximum of 1017 words OOH L H D H L L Subhead Data specifying MET t storing device for sending receiving instructions n 1 2
141. of the E71 00 to FE The first two digits Character string BIN Un Un 2 User of the three digit number 16 bit N S1 Start number of the device that stores control data User system Device name The start number of bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 267 2 Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by 51 0 System area Stores the status at completion 51 1 00005 Normal completion 2 System Values other than 0000 error code Abnormal end Specify 00004 to update the address information on the connected devices retained by the E71 Specify the target for setting change among the own station IP address Ethernet operation setting transmission speed and communication mode Do not specify the transmission speed and communication mode together with the own station IP address and Ethernet operation setting If doing so only the specification of the own station IP address and Ethernet operation setting is updated Specification of own station IP address change 60 Specify whether to change the own station IP address Set the address in 51 3 and 51 4 0 Do not change Specification 1 Change 00004 S1 2 of changed Specification of the Ethernet operation setting change 61 Specify to User item whether to
142. of the Ethernet ae C014 Perform the initial process or open process module is not completed The setting value of the IP address of the connected C0154 Correct the IP address class to A B C device for the open process is incorrect The open process of the connection or the next Check that none of the connections targeted for pairing open has C0164 connection specified for pairing open has been already been opened completed Correct the combination of modules set for pairing open Check the operation of the connected device Check the open process of the connected device Correct the open setting of the communication parameters C017 A connection could not be established in the open Correct the port number of the Ethernet module the IP address process of the connection and port number of the connected device and the open setting Check if the cable is disconnected Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor The setting value of the IP address of the connected C018 no Correct the IP address device is incorrect Correct the data length C0204 The data length exceeds the allowable range When the amount of data to be sent exceeds the limit divide the data into smaller chunks to send it C021 An abnormal end response was received for Read the response end code from the connection end code or H communications using a fixed buffer
143. of the number of and timers can be changed in the initial setting 7 7 344 Appendix 4 1 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions facilitate programming for using intelligent function modules This chapter describes dedicated instructions that can be used in the E71 1 5 1 List of Dedicated Instructions 1 Dedicated instructions for using basic functions The following table lists dedicated instructions for using the functions explained in this manual Instruction Description Reference Establishes opens a connection with the connected device to perform data 25 Page 232 Section 15 5 communications Disconnects closes a connection with the connected device performing CLOSE 2n Page 236 Section 15 6 data communications Executes the protocols registered in the flash ROM of the E71 using the ECPRTCL Page 239 Section 15 7 Predefined Protocol Support Function of GX Works2 Sends data to the connected device through communications using a fixed BUFSND Page 249 Section 15 8 buffer Reads data received from the connected device through communications BUFRCV Page 253 Section 15 9 using a fixed buffer used in the main program Reads data received from the connected device through communications BUFRCVS Page 257 Section 15 10 using a fixed buffer used in an interrupt program Turns
144. only when an end code is 5 Response format Subheader Abnormal code OOH If an abnormal code is stored 5 is stored here Error code Error Error description Action The PC number specified with a command is Change the PC number to FF of the own not FF of the own station or not the station station or not the station number set using the 104 PC number error number set with the MELSECNET link link parameter to perform communications parameters again After the E71 receives a request from the connected device normally communications Perform communications again If the error 11H Mode error cannot be normally performed between the E71 occurs again check for noise and other causes and the CPU module due to some causes such and or replace the E71 as noise The specified intelligent function module number has not been assigned to an intelligent Change the specified data contents in the Intelligent function function module that has the buffer memory and control procedure or change the mounting 124 module designation PNE M where communications be performed For position of the intelligent function module Then example the specified module is an I O module perform communications again or the specified slot is empty Check if the remote STOP PAUSE has been The remote RUN STOP cannot be executed already ex
145. problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The SMTP server is in process and an error response 1 was received Exceeded the allocation of the memory Check the status of the SMTP server area C13B The SMTP server is in process and an error response Check if the mail address of the Ethernet module has been was received Illegal mailbox name correctly set Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C13Cy System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 322 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Error description Action code Check that the port number of the POP3 server is 110 The port number of the Ethernet module is fixed to 110 C1404 The POP3 server could not be opened n Check if communications with the server can be performed using the PING command Communications cannot be performed with the POP3 C1414 Check if the server is busy server Error response Communications cannot be performed with the POP3 C1424
146. read request source 3 1 H 1 request Text Communication response request destination Subheader End code ood ee H L H L request A A 7 Y Y 2 bytes 2 bytes Maximum of 1016 words v 176 Application data area response CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 2 Subheader Because an E71 automatically adds and deletes a header the user setting is not required 67 66 65 b4 63 62 61 bO 14 315907918193 00H Only for command none at response Command response type When communications are performed using the random access buffer this format is used For data reading 61H For data writing 62H Command response flag For command 0 1 3 For response 1 a When reading Command from the connected device to the E71 Response from the E71 to the connected device 67 to bO b7 to bO 0 110 0 0 0 1 11 110 010101 Communications using 61H OOH 1 a binary code Subheader Subheader b7 to bO b7 to bO EN ON 15 Tr O Oy 0 0 5 1 1117 4 7 07 0 07105 1 Ng 74 gs oo 8 Communications using 31H 4 gg an ASCII code CL Subheader Subheader a 177 3 Start address Use a logical address to set the start address of a random access buffer that reads writes data 7 gt 184 Section 13 6 a Commun
147. reasons reopen the connection using the same port used before the error occurred The E71 does not close a connection if it receives an Active open request again from the connected device with a different IP address or a port number 12 If the communication data code setting is different between the E71 and the connected device error codes that are not found in the error code list may be returned to the connected device When receiving data with different data codes the E71 cannot decode commands normally The E71 returns an error response according to the communication data code setting Page 152 Section 12 6 2 1 e Remarks If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test gt 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test Page 364 Appendix 6 1 280 16 5 5 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Communications using SLMP cannot be performed If communications cannot be performed with a connected device using SLMP refer to the troubleshooting in the following and take corrective action SLMP Reference Manual 16 5 6 performed Communications using the predefined protocol cannot be The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the E71 cannot perform communications using the predefined protocol Check item Action Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of
148. rising edge OFF ON of the open command Point Do not perform an open process using I O signals and using the dedicated instruction together for the same connection Doing so will result in malfunction 4 Errors dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status S2 1 234 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that performs an Active open process on the connection number 1 for TCP IP communications when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F SM400 UO G20480 UO 020482 4 20 M1000 is M1001 M1001 X19 Mo M20 ME ME MOVP D100 NEL ee REESE MOVP H8000 D100 1 1 1 MOVP D102 1 1 1 MOVP H1000 D103 1 1 1 1 DMOVP H0A6155DF D104 1 1 1 H2000 0106 N 1 33 M ee eee 2 Uo K1 D100 M100 e M100 M101 ME SET M110 M101 M111 END 1 Necessary when the open setting of the programming tool is used In this case the program marked with 2 is unnecessary 2 Necessary when the open setting of the program is used In this case the program marked with 1 is unnecessary Point P For safety CPUs dat
149. serial number first five digits of 05049 or earlier has a different 5VDC internal current consumption value and weight Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 70A Weight 0 14kg 8 The specifications of the transceiver and the AUI cable need to be met Page 70 Section 5 2 2 4 If divided files are received only the first file is received and the remaining files are discarded 5 If an e mail is sent from connected device to the programmable controller side specify the encoding method Base64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable of the attachment 6 The following figure shows segment lengths and node intervals Segment length Terminating resistor Lol X o o c c t Maximum o gt node to node gt 0 distance 0 f For the maximum segment length the length between hubs consult the manufacturer of the hub used 3 3 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Function List This section lists the E71 functions 3 3 1 Function list The following table lists the functions of the E71 1 Basic functions The following table lists the basic E71 functions explained in this manual Function Description Reference Connecting with MELSOFT An E71 can be connected with MELSOFT products such as a programming tool and Page 96 products and a GOT MX Component and a GOT CHAPTER 8 o CPU module data can be read written from to connected devices Access to fil
150. station 1 in the figure above Access to other stations through two E71 modules 2 in the figure above 67 VS VS ulejs s 3 ue jo uonejs 90W31 H I3NO3ST3W esn 103 5 2 Network Components This section describes the devices used for Ethernet 5 2 1 Configuration devices used for 100BASE TX 10BASE T connection A 71 71 100 is used for 100BASE TX and 10BASE T connections An E71 determines whether to use 10BASE T or 100BASE TX and the full duplex or half duplex transmission mode according to the hub For connection to the hub without the automatic negotiation function set the half duplex mode on the hub side 1 100BASE TX connection To configure a system for 100BASE TX connection use devices that meet the IEEE 802 3 100 BASE TX standards Connected device Hub Configuration device Description Straight cable A Category 5 or higher straight cable is usable Shielded twisted pair System operation using connection with a cross cable is not guaranteed Note however that a Category 5 or 5e cross cable can be cable STP Cross cable used for data communications with an E71 between QJ71E71 100 modules or connection with a GOT Connector RJ45 connector Hub 100Mbps hub Up to two levels of cascade
151. stations with the same IP address can be checked The destination IP address can be checked only in the station with the same IP address station connected to the network later uonoun uon2ejeg esf U sseuppy dl 9 Buffer memory Buffer memory area Description E address 2 Destination IP address stored in the station with the same 234 The third and fourth octets of the IP address address connected to the network later 235 The first and second octets of the IP address The MAC address of the station that has 21121 52818 The fifth and sixth octets of the MAC address been already connected to the network 21122 52821 The third and fourth octets of the MAC address stored in the station with the same IP IP address status address connected to the network later 21123 52838 The first and second octets of the MAC address storage area The MAC address of the station with the 21124 52844 The fifth and sixth octets of the MAC address IP address connected to the network 21125 5285p The third and fourth octets of the MAC address later stored in the station that has been already connected to the network 21126 52864 The first and second octets of the MAC address 203 When the MAC address of station that has been already connected to the network is 00 26 92 89 2E 89 the IP address already in use is 10 97 24 01 and the MAC address of the station connected to the
152. stored S h 178 to 1FF The number of occurrences of the corresponding status of each protocol is stored When the DOGS H count value by the E71 exceeds two words the count stops at FFFFFFFF 4294967295 1 The error information is continued to be stored into the following areas even if the count of the errors is stopped Error log write pointer storage area Error log block 2 An error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order Point Values stored in the buffer memory are cleared when an E71 mounted station is powered on or reset They are not cleared during the initial process Although this area does not normally need to be read read it when necessary for maintenance or other purposes 292 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 Protocol setting data check area address 5320 to 533Fj The following table lists the details of the protocol setting data check area Buffer memory name Address Description Protocol No 53244 When an error is detected in the protocol setting data the protocol No where an error has been detected is stored The protocols are checked from the lowest protocol No and the first protocol No where an error has been detected is stored 0 No errors 1 to 128 Protocol No 65535 Unidentified Setting type Protocol 5325 When an error is detected in the Packet Setting or Element Setting 0
153. terminates the dedicated instruction forcibly at receiving 4 Receiving The E71 terminates the dedicated instruction when protocols are executed 5 Completed consecutively The followings describe the operations of protocol cancellation according to the timing When the cancel request is performed before sending when 1 Waiting for transmission is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0 ECPRTCL instruction Completion device f 477 device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 5403 when the value of n is 1 Cancellation request 2 Cancel completed Waiting time The E71 does not send a send to send packet to the connected device even when a receive data or a protocol exists Cancel Send packet Connected device Send packet 246 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS When the cancel request is performed before sending completion when 2 Sending is set in Protocol execution status address 5420 and the sending has not been completed ECPRTCL instruction Completion device i The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 5403 when the value of n is 1 1 Cancel request 2 Cancel completed Waiting t
154. the communication mode to half duplex when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F M100 M101 X19 ME ME Mov H5000 D252 ZP UINI 0250 M250 SET M100 M250 M251 ME Process upon completion SET M3000 M251 Process upon abnormal end M3000 1 UO MAL G105 HO f Process upon completion RST M3000 SET M3001 UO lt gt G105 HO Process upon abnormal end M3001 X19 Communications enabled Change the settings J to 10Mbps and half duplex CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes how to identify causes of problems that occur when an E71 is used and take corrective action 16 1 Before Troubleshooting Check that the POWER LED of the power supply module and the MODE LED of the CPU module are on If either or both are off troubleshoot the CPU module User s Manual hardware design maintenance and inspection for the CPU module used 16 2 Troubleshooting Procedure How to identify the cause of a problem and take corrective action is explained below Use a programming tool to identify the cause and take corrective action 1 Procedure Connect the CPU module to a programming tool and open the System Monitor window Diagnostics gt System Monitor eter NetworkNo Master Pont Addiess Statin No 0020 EJ 1 amp Pomt
155. the router relay function is incorrect m Correct the router IP address and perform the initial process again The network address network address after the 007 Change the IP address of the Ethernet module in the own station subnet mask of the router IP address is different from to the same address as the network address that of the IP address of the Ethernet module in the own station COOE The send receive process has been executed while the Do not execute the send receive process while executing the IP IP address in use detection function is being executed address in use detection function Set different IP addresses COOFy One IP address is used for two or more modules The MAC addresses of the Ethernet modules in the stations with the same IP address can be checked in IP address status storage area 5281 to 52861 The setting value of the Ethernet module port number C010 ms Correct the port number for the open process is incorrect The setting value of the port number of the connected C011 IM Correct the port number device for the open process is incorrect C012 The port number set is used in a connection already Correct the port numbers of the Ethernet module and the opened in TCP IP connected device The port number used in a connection already opened C0134 Correct the port number of the Ethernet module is set for the open process in UDP IP The initial process or open process
156. the CPU module Hardware Design or resetting the CPU module Maintenance and Inspection Initial process The process is automatically performed with default settings of the parameters CS Page 85 Section 7 2 Establish connections with connected devices Page 93 Section 7 3 Data communications using each function Close process cS Page 85 Section 7 2 Disconnect cancel connections with the connected devices Page 93 Section 7 3 where connections have been established by the open process 7 1 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE Setting Parameters Required for Communications This section describes how to set parameters to communicate between the E71 and connected devices 7 1 1 Parameter list The following table lists parameters set through a programming tool Description Reference Item Network Type Start I O No Basic setting Network No Station No Mode Configure settings to use the E71 as a network module Page 80 Section 7 1 2 Operation Setting Configure the settings such as an IP address to connect the E71 to Ethernet Page 81 Section 7 1 3 Initial Setting Set a data communication timer value Page 344 Appendix 4 1 Open Setting Configure connection settings Page 83 Section 7 1 4 Parameter setting of each function Router Relay Parameter Configure settings to communicate with connected devices on Ethernet via a router and a g
157. the following when not using the parameters of an E71 set on the programming tool Because a QE71 N operates with all of its communication condition setting switches off set the communication conditions using the reinitialization process When MELSOFT products such as a programming tool are directly connected to an E71 the MELSOFT products such as a programming tool cannot access a QCPU To set the parameters of an E71 using the programming tool delete the programs for the initial process and the termination process Programs for the QE71 N in the own station can be used for communications with an E71 except for the following programs Program to access the data link system Program related to the EEPROM Connection number 8 pairing open setting Parameter setting program using the EPRSET instruction However because the response speed of an E71 is different from that of a QE71 N the program may not be used as is Before using the same program check the operation Program using an I O signal Programs cannot be used together with parameter settings on the programming tool Point Foran E71 set the operation mode and communication conditions using the programming tool Settings cannot be configured using a switch unlike QnA A series modules There is no switch for settings For an E71 after the Passive open process is executed the open request cannot be canceled before open completion A
158. then the connection is disconnected Closed Point After the connected device sends a close request to the E71 wait for 500ms or more before performing an open process again 86 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 7 2 3 Active open procedure Active open is a connection method that performs an active open process on a connected device in Passive open wait status The procedure that the E71 performs an Active open process is as follows For the OPEN CLOSE instructions refer to DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS s 227 CHAPTER 15 Ex Open close processes for the connection number 1 Parameter communications Power on completed Open status Open enable status closed Closed status Initial normal completion signal X19 OPEN instruction j 1 scan OPEN instruction completion device OPEN instruction i Abnormally ended completion device 1 Open abnormal detection Abnormally ended signal X18 CLOSE instruction 1 scan CLOSE instruction completion device nos Abnormally CLOSE instruction ended completion device 1 Open completion signal address 5000 Open request signal address 5002 ejnpeooJd uedo eAnoy ZZ SUOHEDIUNWWOD dl dOL ZL jo ACK SYN ACK FIN ACK 87 88 After parameter communications check that initial process of the E71 is normally complet
159. to the flash ROM again The following data cannot be read out because they are not written to the E71 However when the protocols are selected from the Predefined Protocol Library the followings can be displayed Manufacturer Packet Name Protocol Detailed Setting Type Version Explanation Packet Setting Element Name Module Selection using the Predefined Protocol Support Function is available only when Not Specification is set in the Transfer Setup of GX Works2 When other station is specified the E71 specified in the Transfer Setup of GX Works2 becomes the target module 6 Execute the protocol by using a dedicated instruction Execute the protocol written to the flash ROM by using the dedicated instruction ECPRTCL instruction Point Protocols can be executed only when the target connection is in the following status When Open completion signal is on When Predefined protocol is set to Fixed Buffer Communication in the open setting If the protocol is executed to the connection where the above conditions are not satisfied the ECPRTCL instruction ends abnormally 112 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 11 2 Communication Type of Protocols Receive and send packets from to the connected device for the process execution are registered in a protocol Packet elements set using the predefined protocol support function correspond to the data part of the send receive pack
160. to the server 1 or more The cumulative number of writes to the error log block area The number of the error log block where the latest send error log is registered is stored 0 No error no registration of sending error log 1 or more The number of the error log block where the latest sending error log is registered If the pointer value is 8 it means that the latest error log is registered in the receiving error log block 8 area When the number of receiving errors reaches nine the error log is then registered in the error log block 1 area again Error code 5841 An error code indicating the error details is stored Command code 5B424 The system command code of the error message is stored Error log 19 block 5843 The first eight words of the receiver s e mail address of the error e mail in the communications with the mail server are stored in the ASCII code Example If the sender s e mail address is use from add sample co jp use from add sam is stored the ASCII code Date 5B4B The date and time when the e mail was sent are stored in the BCD code similar to 5883 of Subject The first 15 words of the e mail subject are stored A subject is stored successfully if it contains characters other than alphanumeric and ASCII code characters 1 A sending error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data
161. to write the protocol setting data Check result normal Writing the protocol Checking the protocol E71 setting data setting data X1D turns on when the protocol setting data has been X1D turns off X1D turns on when the set correctly before data write check result is normal i Predefined protocol ready 10 X1D turns off if no protocol setting data has been set or an error has occurred in the protocol setting data before data write Protocol setting data The number of registered protocols and check area information about whether protocols have address 5320 to 533FH been registered are stored 122 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL b If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data Start to write the protocol setting data Check result error E74 Writing the protocol Checking the protocol setting data setting data X1D turns on when the protocol setting data has X1D turns off been set correctly before data write X1D stays off Predefined protocol ready X1D X1D turns off if no protocol setting data has been set or an error has occurred in the protocol setting data before data write Protocol setting data check area The error details are stored address 5320 to 533FH 3 When the UINI instruction
162. upper limit For details refer to the following 11 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module From Connection No 1 to 16 are available The Communication Data Code becomes Binary Code regardless of the setting 109 11 1 Data Communication Procedure By using the predefined protocol support function data can be communicated with the connected device in the following procedure 1 Si MELSOFT Series lt Predefined Protocol Support Function Ethernet Module i File Edit Module Read Write Tool Debugging Support Function Window in I7 2 et Marule gt Protocol Setting Untitled Communication Type Packet Seting 3 Adds new protocol Selection of Protocol Type to Add PredenedProcolUbay Select homi Protocol to Add Relerence Predefined Protocol Library Please select manufacturer model and protocol name from Protocol to Protocol No Manufacturer Model Genera purpose protocol SLMP Device Read Protocol Name cedes 0401 Read word 0401 Read bit 0401 Read word link direct 0401 Read bit link direct 10401 Read word intelligent 0403 Read random standard 0403 Read random link direct 0403 Read random intelligent 0408 Read block stand x pts 0406 Read block link x pts 0406 Read block intel x pts Display the Predefined Protocol Support Fun
163. window is displayed LoopTest button The Loopback Test window is displayed COM ERROff button The COM ERR LED is turned off gt 330 Section 16 8 For each window and detailed explanations refer to the following 1 Operating manual for the programming tool used 329 16 8 How to Turn the COM ERR LED The COM ERR LED turns on when an error occurs during communications with the connected device The COM ERR LED does not turn off even after the error cause is removed Turn it off using the following methods 1 Using an I O signal Turn off the COM ERR LED by turning on COM ERR LED OFF request signal Y 17 An off request continues to be issued while COM ERR LED OFF request signal Y17 is on However this method does not clear the error information in the error log area in the buffer memory COM ERR LED OFF signal Y17 D LED ON LED OFF LED ON COM ERR LED ON Au signal X1C Error timing C gt gt 2 Using dedicated instruction Turn off the COM ERR LED using the ERRCLR instruction 7 s 260 Section 15 11 This method can also clear the error information initial error code open error code or the error log 3 In the Ethernet Diagnostics window Turn off the COM ERR LE
164. 1 1 265 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that reads the open error code of the connection number 1 when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F MO M1 I Mt H1 D2 Specify the open error code of 1 HO D3 Specify the latest error information SET M1 Execute the ERRRD instruction 1 HH l ZP ERRRD U0 DO M10 MS Process upon completion L k MOV D4 D100 Error information is read M11 MOV D1 D101 Process upon abnormal end RST 266 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 13 This instruction changes the setting such as the Ethernet operation setting and re initializes the E71 Command L e Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent 12 Index Constant Setting data system user File JEN function module d register Others register device Zn Bit Word Bit Word unco K H S1 D1 1 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later or Universal model QCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted 2 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Start I O number
165. 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative et A response could not be received from the DNS client Check the cables and hubs Check if communications with the DNS server can be performed using the PING command C1124 A response from the POP3 layer could not be received Check if the POP3 server name has been registered in the DNS Delete the POP3 server name and change the setting to the IP address setting Then check the operation Check if communications with the server can be performed using the PING command 319 1511 10143 9 94 eui ui peJojs sepoo
166. 1 and a hub and the number of times that the E71 detected disconnection can be checked using the following buffer memory areas For details on buffer memory areas refer to the list of buffer memory addresses 7 gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 This function is available only for the QJ71E71 100 Buffer memory area Description Hub connection status area address 201 C9 Disconnection detection count address 20995 52034 Stores the current connection status and transmission speed of an E71 and a hub Stores the number of times that the E71 detected disconnection after an initial process Disconnection is detected in any of the following cases Disconnection between the E71 and a hub Cable removal from the hub side connector Hub power off Cable removal from the E71 side connector Point P If an error has occurred 65536 times or more the count stops at 65535 FFFF Write to this area using a program to clear the stored value 202 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 5 IP Address in Use Detection Function If different stations in the same network use the same IP address the address in use can be detected This prevents a network from stopping due to incorrect IP address This function is available only in the QJ71E71 100 with the serial number first five digits of 12062 or later When the connected device with the same IP address does not support the IP address in use detection func
167. 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 2 Parameter Settings for Using Dedicated Instructions When using dedicated instructions set the parameters of each function 15 2 1 When using data link instructions When using data link instructions set the following parameters Station No IP information setting Routing parameters setting For details on the settings refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application 1 5 3 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions This section describes precautions for using dedicated instructions 1 When changing data specified by dedicated instructions Do not change any data e g control data until execution of the dedicated instruction is completed 2 When the dedicated instruction is not completed Check that Online has been set under Mode in the network parameter window Dedicated instructions cannot be executed during offline 3 Securing service process time When accessing a programmable controller on another station using a data link instruction during the Ethernet diagnostics execution of the instruction may be delayed Take the following measures to execute the data link instruction after the Ethernet diagnostics For safety CPUs the following measures cannot be applied Execute the COM instruction Reserve time for a communication process for 2 to 3 ms For a Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU and Redundant CPU set
168. 2 Number of access Processing time unit ms QnHCPU Instruction n model Instruction points Basic model QCPU Q02CPU Process CPU execution name Redundant CPU ae m T condition 1 For2 For For2 Fort For2 For For2 A UDP IP OPEN 5 2 4 3 3 3 3 0 transmission port is open 1 port A UDP IP CLOSE 6 0 4 5 4 5 2 9 transmission port is closed BUFSND 28 2 50 0 27 6 45 3 24 5 45 0 12 9 237 BUFRCV 2 3 5 8 19 24 12 16 07 1 14 communications binary code communications 1 d 1017 d and fixed buffer BUFRCVS 0 8 2 9 0 5 0 9 0 3 0 7 0 2 0 6 communications procedure exists ERRCLR error information is 34 27 22 18 cleared ERRRD An initial error code is 25 17 14 07 read 960 words 38 8 39 4 37 9 22 3 SEND 22 8 21 4 20 3 11 0 480 words 30 8 30 4 29 1 16 1 960 words 11 1 7 9 74 44 5 3 5 3 5 2 24 480 words 8 2 6 6 6 3 3 3 960 words 1 6 1 0 0 7 0 6 RECVS 0 8 0 6 0 3 0 2 icati 480 words 12 0 8 0 5 READ 960 words 50 1 52 1 52 31 25 9 E71 mounted SED 27 7 30 1 277 E 12 5 stations 480 words 38 9 41 1 40 0 18 3 960 words 47 6 53 6 524 25 4 WRITE gt 28 2 30 0 294 12 9 SWRITE 480 words 37 9 41 8 40 9 18 2 ZNRD 27 8 33 2 29 0 34 3
169. 2 Setthe connection target in the programming tool Transfer Setup Connection1 Connection destination window gt Connection1 CCIE Cont Ethernet CCIEField Q Series NET IO H Board Board Bus Board Board Network 1 Station No 2 Protocol UDP PLC side I F B BH B CC IE Cont CC Link Ethernet C24 CCIE Field CCIE Field NET 10 H Module Module Master Local Communication Module Module Computer Q371E71 Network No 1 Station No 1 IP Address Host Name 10 97 79 2 Station No lt gt IP Information Automatic Response System Connection Channel List No Specification Other Station Other Station 5 Single Network Co exister TN PLC Direct Coupled Setting Connection Test Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 PLC Type z Detail CCIECont CCIEFeld Ethernet CCLink C24 NET 10 H System Image Network No 1 Station No 1 opea m B CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet NET 10 H s Other Station eJnpeooJg uoneoiunuuo 2 8 Multiple CPU Setting j g g j Target PLC 3 4 Not Specified a m 3 Select Ethernet Board under PC side and FOGBENIPARERIAWISE USES double click the item The window shown to left Network No 1 appears Set the network number according to the ama steten Z Caneel network parameter of the E71 Assign a unique This setting is an assignment For
170. 27 13Fj to 147p 328 to 336 1484 to 150p 337 to 345 151 to 1591 346 to 354 15 to 1624 I 355 to 363 163 to 16B IL 364 to 372 16Cy to 174p Error log area Error log block area Error log block 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 5 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 6 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 7 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 8 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 9 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 10 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 11 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 12 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 13 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 14 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 15 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 16 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 42 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS
171. 29 0 34 7 12 6 15 3 230 words ZNWR 27 6 33 4 29 7 36 4 29 4 35 2 12 9 15 6 Time between the UINI instruction UINI 26 8 26 7 26 7 26 7 accepted and a reinitialization process completed 336 1 When data is sent through the tracking cable of a redundant system add the tracking transfer time For data transfer time of when the tracking cable is used refer to the following 11 QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System APPENDICES 5 System switching time of a redundant system The following shows the system switching time required when the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module in a redundant system issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module at communication error or disconnection detection The system switching time is the time from when a communication error or disconnection is detected until the control system CPU module is switched to the standby system CPU module a When a communication error is detected For alive check errors Tnc Tsi Ti x Tr St Tsw Tnc System switching time Tsi Destination existence confirmation starting interval timer value Ti Timer value of the alive check Tr Destination existence confirmation resending time eSt One scan time e Tsw CPU system switching time The following shows the timing for system switching operation if an alive check error occurs Connected device
172. 3 3 Sg Stations that can be accessed from the connected device after the remote password unlock process E o Stations that can be accessed the connected device without performing the remote password unlock process Connected Target programmable controller station request destination Es 5 device 2 Station 1 2 Station 2 1 Station 2 2 Station 3 1 Station 3 2 2 Station 1 1 QCPU a request source QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU QCPU Station e 8 Station B Station C O Station D 2 The station can access the stations marked with after the remote password unlock process is completed for 1 of the station 1 1 It can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open Stations B C and D can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open 195 Ex When a remote password and the remote password check have been set in multiple QCPU stations Station 1 2 1 Station A E71 Network No 1 Ethernet Station 1 1 Station 3 2 1 Remote Remote Remote Remote password password password password E W T i check Station E71 E71 QCPU E71 Programming tool Ethernet Network No 2 Network No 3 L1 Li g Station 2 1 1 Station 2 2 1 2 Station 3 1 1 Remote
173. 3001 DMOV K100 D5 8 D7 Mov K10 D8 132 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL M3001 Mov K1 D202 GP ECPRTCL uo K1 K1 D200 M200 M200 M201 ME 5 M250 M201 SET M251 0201 0300 suoneoiunuluo peuyepeJg 133 134 Close process program PLF M360 M150 PLS M6000 PLS M6001 ZP CLOSE uo K1 D400 M361 M410 A SET M400 M401 ME M401 SET RST M360 M361 M6001 M400 M410 M402 M403 M410 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER This chapter describes communications using a fixed buffer 12 1 Applications In communications using a fixed buffer a programmable controller can actively send data therefore data can be sent from the programmable controller to the host system when an error occurs in machine equipment or some other conditions are satisfied A maximum of 1K word of data can be sent or received between programmable controllers or between a programmable controller and the host system 12 1 1 Differences between the Procedure Exist and No Procedure control methods There are two control methods for communications using a fixed buffer P
174. 30y 23089 to 23132 BA31 to I 23133 to 23176 5A5D to 5A88 IL 23177 to 23220 5 89 to 23221 to 23264 BAB5 to BAEO 23265 to 23308 BAE1 to 5B0Cp 23309 to 23352 BBOD to 5B38 23353 58391 23354 23355 58381 23356 583 23357 5830 23358 5 23359 5 23360 58401 E mail status storage area Receive Send Error log block 2 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 3 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 5 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 6 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 7 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 8 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 9 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 10 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 11 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 12 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 13 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 1
175. 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 15 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 16 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Dedicated instruction normal completion count Dedicated instruction abnormal end count Number of mails normally completed Ou Attached file sending count Sending to the server count Number of mails abnormally completed Ou Error log write count Sending error log write pointer Ou 55 Kowen yng S E sesseJppe 10157 Z G Address Decimal Hexadecimal Application Name Initial value Hexadecimal Decimal Programming tool setting applicability 23361 BB41 23362 58421 23363 to 23370 5 43 to 23371 0 23374 5 4 to 5B4E 23375 to 23404 5B4Fy to 5B6C I 23405 to 23448 BB6D to 5B98 23449 to 23492 5B99 to 5841 23493 to 23536 5 5 to 5BFO I 23537 to 23580 BBF1 to 5C1C 23581 to 23624 5 10 to 52481 23625 to 23668 5C49 to 52744 23669 to 23712 BC75 to 5CAO 23713 to 24575 1 to E mail status storage area Error log block 1 Error code On Command code On To Date Subject Send Error log block 2 The
176. 511 10113 9 94 Error description Action code Check the operation of the connected device C431 Connection close during the ECPRTCL instruction Check the connection open status with the connected device execution Open the connection with the connected device again and execute the instruction D0004 to Errors detected by CC Link IE Field Network Refer to the manual for each module DFFFy E000 to Errors detected by CC Link IE Controller Network Refer to the manual for each module EFFFy F000 io Errors detected by the MELSECNET H and Refer to the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 network system FFFF MELSECNET 10 network system reference manual and take corrective action H 328 The error codes listed in the table include those returned to the connected device Each buffer memory may also store the error numbers of the response messages returned from the connected device If an error code other than those listed is stored check the manual for the connected device and the response message from the connected device CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 7 Ethernet Diagnostics Items such as the module status parameter settings communication status and error history of an E71 can be checked Perform the diagnostics in the Ethernet Diagnostics window of the programming tool x Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics Ethernet Diagnostics Target Module Setting Change IP
177. 5403 when the value of n is 1 2 Cancel completion t waiting time to receive or the time specified by the destination alive check timer 11 71 Cancel The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected device even when a receive data or a protocol exists Connected device When the cancel request is performed during receiving when 4 Receiving is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0 4 ECPRTCL instruction Completion device 477 The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 5 1 Cancellation request 5403 when the value of n is 1 2 Cancel completed t waiting time to receive or the time specified by the destination alive check timer The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected device even when a receive data or a protocol exists E71 Receiving The E71 interrupts the verification and Cancel general data processing and forcibly Connected device terminates the dedicated instruction Receive data _ 248 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 8 zPBUFSND This instruction sends data to the connected device through communications using a fixed buffer Command zesuesp f en
178. 6 SH NA 080009 K Section 2 1 3 8 5 6 3 5 7 2 5 9 3 7 1 7 3 1 7 5 2 8 1 8 3 1 8 6 2 10 2 10 6 10 7 10 8 Section 2 7 3 4 5 6 7 3 1 10 1 429 Jun 2004 SH NA 080009 I Addition of the description of function version D Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 7 1 3 Chapter 2 entire Section 3 6 3 8 4 5 4 6 5 3 5 5 5 6 2 POINT 5 8 POINT 6 1 4 10 9 Appendix 1 Appendix 4 Appendix 11 Appendix 12 Addition Section 1 1 9 5 10 5 11 11 3 3 11 4 7 Appendix 8 2 2007 SH NA 080009 L Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 9 1 3 2 1 2 7 3 6 4 1 1 4 5 2 12 4 6 4 9 1 5 6 1 2 Point 5 11 5 11 3 6 1 4 10 2 to 10 9 11 3 3 11 4 7 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 4 4 Appendix 9 1 4 Addition Section 2 5 1 2 5 2 Oct 2008 SH NA 080009 M Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives The Manual s Usage and Structure About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 to 1 4 Chapter 2 Section 3 1 to 3 6 3 8 4 1 1 4 3 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 5 2 4 6 to 4 8 5 1to 5 5 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 8 5 9 1 5 9 3 5 9 5 5 9 7 5 11 3 5 11 5 6 1 1 6 1 3 6 1 4 6 2 7 3 2 7 5 2 8 6 2 Chapter 10 Section 11 2 1 11 3 11 4 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 2 2 Appendix 4 Appendix 7 Appendix 9 1 Appendix 12 Apr 2009 SH NA 080009 N Correction Section 1 3 2 2 2 7 4 3
179. 68 10BASE2 71 10BASE5 coaxial cable 70 10BASE5 70 10BASE T 69 69 12VDC external power supply capacity 27 AE frame uideo ex gus ocd ca al s t 100 A Abnormal codes 303 A compatible frame 100 ato aye 15 Active OPEN 87 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time 82 AnAGPU iei Bed EN Eek nek PRU 15 ous P aha edule OW wed wi eds 15 ANU GPW anda te at Meee eve dies 15 Bass Peaks 15 ASCII 423 AULSCAbles zen Shh 70 Auto open UDP port 340 B Basic functions 0 0 ee 29 Basic model 16 Basic setting 80 Broadcast communications 157 Buffer memory 34 BURROW one Rp e gra 227 BUFRCVS bin stets abou a P pe AM VR 227 BUFSND qi ku baba raat enact 227 Built in Ethernet port 15 Cascade connection
180. 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 78 7 1 Setting Parameters Required for Communications 79 1 41 TParameter eene rH IU Oe ut tn do o ao dO ue e re ud qu ees 79 TAD esl E Ru eI b Ia EE Se HE ed eh eed 80 7 1 3 Ethernet Operation 2 81 CAA Msi ean ene eee e oe Vente teat rette a Me ee 83 7 2 TCP IP Communications e e 85 7 2 1 Establishing a connection 85 7 2 2 Communication hr 86 7 2 8 Active 87 7 24 Passive open procedure els 89 3 UDP IP Communicatioris uer eb ew eet ORE Ln OE ER Qo oS Cd En ED E 93 7 3 1 Communication process erce sss rl 93 7 312 Open procedure dU ERG RE eR en ate dA n 94 CHAPTER 8 CONNECTING MELSOFT PRODUCTS AND A GOT 96 84 Applications s a teer x e ee cg qd e tea e cts 96 8 2 Data Communication see 97 CHAPTER 9 MC PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS 99 9 1 Applications as ese ec hen me bee TU usages 99 9 2 Communication Str ct re esses ev ee RUE REL SAU 100 9 3 Data Communication 2 101 94 Parameter Setting esce mk dan PRAE D EGG RA IBIQ MP Eau equa 102 CHAPTER 10 SLMP
181. 804 en packet total coun H 446 to 471 1 to 1D7 System area 43 Kowen yng S E sesseJppe 10157 Z G Address Decimal Hexadecimal Application Name Initial value Hexadecimal Decimal Programming tool setting applicability 472 and 473 1D84 and 1D9 474 and 475 ADA and 1081 476 and 477 1DC and 1001 478 to 481 1 to 482 to 491 1E2 to 492 and 493 1 and 1ED 494 and 495 1EE and 496 and 497 1 0 and 498 511 1 2 to Error log area Received UDP packet count On Received UDP packet count discarded due to sum check UDP error Sent packet total count On System area Status for each System area protocol Framing error count Receiving error Overflow count crc error count System area 512 and 513 200 and 2013 514 515 202 203 516 2044 517 and 518 2054 and 2061 519 and 520 2075 and 2081 521 to 524 2094 to 20C 525 to 528 20D to 210p 529 to 532 2114 to 2149 533 to 536 215 to 218 537 to 540 219 to 21Cp 541 to 544 210 to 220 545 548 2214 10224 549 2254 Router relay parameter setting area Sub net mask On
182. 824 H 22565 Connection Fixed buffer sending error 0 2 5825 No 9 code 22566 C i d ssa 0 x 5826 onnection end code H 22567 Fixed buffer communication 0 58273 time Maximum value H 22568 M Fixed buffer communication 0 58289 Communication Connection time Minimum value H status storage information m 22569 hioa Fixed buffer communication 58294 time Current value 22570 to 22579 582A to 5833 22580 to 22589 5834 to 58305 22590 to 22599 58 to 5847 22600 to 22609 5848 to 58514 22610 to 22619 58524 to 58581 22620 to 22629 585Cy to 5865p 22630 to 22639 5866 to 586 Connection No 10 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 Connection No 11 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 Connection No 12 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 Connection No 13 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 Connection No 14 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 Connection No 15 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 Connection No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 9 53 Kowen yng sesseJppe 10157 Z G Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool s
183. 8H to L to L 179 An error code is stored in the end code added to a response For the error codes refer to the error code list gt Page 300 Section 16 6 1 End codes are stored in the communication status storage area of the buffer memory 13 4 3 Examples of command and response formats This section describes examples of command and response formats 1 Writing data to a random access buffer upon a write request from a connected device a Communications using a binary code Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader Start address Data length Text 10 words L H L H D H L L L so em om IEEE Random access buffer Physical address L Logical address 2680H 9856 12H 34H 0 2681 9857 56 78 1 1 2682H 9858 BCH 2H 2 2689H 9865 9AH BCH 9H 9 10 words 3E7FH 15999 17 6143 Response format from the E71 to the connected device Subheader End code E2H 00H 180 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER b Communications using an ASCII code Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader Start address Data length D H D 36H 32H 30H OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH 41H Text 20 word
184. A generic term for the QO2PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Basic model QCPU A generic term for the Q00 J CPU and Q01CPU Universal model QCPU A generic term for the QQOUJCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU QO3UDVCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDHCPU Q04UDVCPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDHCPU QO6UDVCPU Q0GUDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU Redundant CPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPUU Safety CPU Another name for the QS001CPU Dedicated Instruction An instruction that simplifies programming for using functions of intelligent function modules 16 PACKING LIST The following items are included in the package of this product Before use check that all the items are included QJ71E71 100 QU71E71 100 RUN ERR INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M sD RD QJTtE71 100 QJ71E71 100 Before Using the Product QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 85 RUN ERR INIT COM ERR OPEN sD RD Wi QJ71E71 B5 S c o Q U T o E O 5 17 QJ71E71 B2 82 RUN INIT COM ERR OPEN sD RD QJ71E71 B2 Before Using the Product 18 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES CHAPTER 1 FEATURES An Ethernet module herea
185. Address 1 Router Information Input Format DEC x End 186 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS Item Description Setting range Router Relay Function Select whether to use the router relay function Not Used Use Subnet Mask Pattern Refer to 1 in this section C0000000 to FFFFFFFC A value other than 00000000 and Default Router IP Address Refer to 2 in this section FFFFFFFF Input Format Select the input format of router information DEC HEX A value other than 00000000 and Router Sub net Address Refer to 3 a in this section FFFFFFFFY Information Router IP Address Refer to 3 b in this section 1 Subnet mask pattern Set the subnet mask Consult with the network administrator for the setting When not using the subnet mask set any of the following values according to the class Class Mask value Class A FFOO0000 Class B FFFFOOOO Class C FFFFFFOO a Setting example The following shows a Class B setting example lex Class B Network address IP address Subnet mask eerie menm ope eee o o o o o o Te o Subnet address Host address uonounj Aejoy LPL 81 05H 2FH 01H IP address ess EereToToToTo a ToToToToTo 1To 1 oTo 3 o Ta 1 1 D o To 1 Point P All devices on the same subnetwork must have the comm
186. Address Display Module 1st Module xy E ooo DEC C HEX Parameter Status Error History Status of Each Connection Status of Each Protocol LED Status Received E mail Information Send E mail Information Module Information Initial Error Code 0000 IP Address 10 97 85 223 Ethernet Address 0026 921F 774A Auto Open UDP 1388 Port Network No 1 Station No E Group No 1 PING Test Loop Test COM ERR OFF Stop Monitor Item Description Specify the E71 to be monitored The number of other network modules is not Target Module Setting Module No included Parameter Status Module information such as the IP address and basic settings is displayed The number of errors and their details such as the error code and information about Error Histo H the connection where the error has occurred is displayed Status of Each Connection The status of each connection such as error codes and the open setting is displayed sonsouDeiq 9 Information such as the total number of data sending receiving times each protocol Status of Each Protocol is displayed LED Status The operation mode and the LED status of the E71 are displayed Received E mail Information Received mail information and the error log are displayed Send E mail Information Sent mail information and the error log are displayed PING Test button The PING Test
187. BUF_SIZE 4096 define ERROR_NO_ERROR 0 define ERROR_INITIAL 1 define ERROR_SOCKET 2 define ERROR_BIND 3 define ERROR_CONNECT 4 define ERROR_SEND 5 define ERROR_SHUTDOWN 6 define ERROR_CLOSE 7 1 Definition for checking receive size define RECV ANS 1 22 typedef struct sck inf struct in_addr my unsigned short my port struct in_addr qj addr unsigned short qj port sck inf int nErrorStatus int Dmykeyin int ShutdownflagA int ShutdownflagB To the next page End flag OFF End flag ON Normal terminationP Unsuccessful termination 1 Receive buffer size No error Initial error 1 Socket creation error Bind error Connect error Send error Shutdown error Line close error 1 Response message receive size in reply to device write frame 1 Error information storage variable 1 Dummy key input Shutdown flag for System A connection 1 Shutdown flag for System B connection 401 0 EnSIA uSuM 2 01 xipueddy ejdures xipueddy OPIS y 5 pesn si 13N int CloseflagA 1 Connection end flag for System A connection int CloseflagB 1 Connection end flag for System B connection int socketnoA int socketnoB int ConnectLastErrorA 1 Connect processing error information for System A connection int ConnectLastErrorB 1 Connect processing error infor
188. By changing the transmission speed and communication mode communications with the connected device can be resumed 348 APPENDICES 2 Reinitialization processing program Perform the reinitialization process using a program The following shows the process timing and sample programs a Process timing Close process END END END END Program 2s en Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal address 5000 UINI instruction Completion device Completion device 1 ________ _____________ _ _ Abnormally ended E Reinitialization specification address 1FH b15 TE 0 int Hhe EH Processing reinitialization nternal process of the p Requesting LZ Initializing the module 1 Check the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 Terminate all data communications with the connected devices and perform a close process on all connections Execute the UINI instruction Specify the parameters such as the IP address of the own station and Ethernet sseooJg eniu p xipueddy operation setting using the control data of the dedicated instruction and initialize the E71 When the E71 reinitialization request is completed Initial normal completion signal X19 turns off When the reinitialization processes are all completed Reinitiali
189. C tion No 1 96 to IF onnection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 C tion No 5 The bit fi tion is th C tion No 1 to A9 onnection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 C tion No 6 The bit fi tion is th C tion No 1 to B3 onnection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 180 to 189 B4 to BD 190 to 199 BE to C71 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 39 Kowen yng sesseJppe 10157 Z G Address Decimal Hexadecimal Application Name Initial value Hexadecimal Decimal Programming tool setting applicability 200 C84 201 C94 Communication status storage area Area for module status LED on off status Stores the on off status of the LEDs on the front of the Ethernet module INIT LED b0 0 OFF 1 ON initial process completed OPEN LED b1 0 OFF 1 ON connection open processing completed ERR LED 63 0 1 ON setting error COM ERR LED b4 0 OFF 1 ON communication error Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use Hub connection status area Communication mode b9 0 Half duplex 1 Full duplex Hub connection status b10 0 Hub not connected
190. COMMUNICATIONS 103 10 1 Applications i ERE EE eV Pn E DPI Rp 103 10 2 Communication Structure sei epe d UE WC TRUE AC 104 10 3 Data Communication 2 teen ee 104 10 4 Parameter Setting orcs peen e e a a 105 10 5 Available command list 2 2 ze be ea AAA 106 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 108 11 1 Data Communication 2 110 11 2 Communication Type of Protocols 2 113 3 Packet Elements o eod f e te BURNER e AM ceed set aeaa 114 11 4 Execution Condition of Predefined Protocol 121 11 5 Example of Predefined Protocol Communications 124 11 5 1 System configuration 124 11 5 2 Parameter Setting ss ce Deed Os Aue ha SO edd dd dBA tds 125 11 5 3 Program example oat fawn ate VEM Bede oe eae 131 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 15 12 1 Applications 1 cene ager PIE Ave ___ _ _ 135 12 1 1 Differences between the Procedure Exist and No Procedure control methods 135 12 2 Communication Structure ttt eens 136 12 3 Data Sending Procedure n 138 124 Data Receiving
191. CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module An error was detected the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module 316 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action COEB An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module COEC An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset statu
192. Close processing 1 Connection completion flag off Wait for a key input Release Winsock DLL APPENDICES 397 0 EnSIA UBYM OL xipueddy ajdwes o xipueddy epis aeui 5 lt pesn s 3N 5 Appendix 10 2 When Visual C NET is used redundant system 398 This section describes the program execution environment data communication details and a sample program for when Visual C NET is used on the program of the connected device 1 Execution environment of the program example a CPU module side Item Description A model name of the QCPU in the E71 mounted station E71 I O signal Q25PRHCPU 00 to X Y1F System A E71 IP address System B C0 00 01 FC 192 00 01 252 C0 00 01 FDy 192 00 01 253 E71 port number 2000 Ethernet operation setting Refer to 3 a in this section Programming tool setting Open setting 1 Redundant setting Refer to 3 b in this section Refer to 3 c in this section b Connected device side Item Description Operation environment Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Ver 2002 Service Pack2 Ethernet interface board model name WINSOCK compatible board Library WSOCK32 LIB Software development environment Visual C NET 2003 manufactured by Microsoft Corporation MAC add
193. D by clicking the _ button in the Ethernet Diagnostics window However this method does not clear the error information in the error log area in the buffer memory For the window refer to Ethernet Diagnostics 7 Page 329 Section 16 7 4 Using the MC protocol Turn off the COM ERR LED using the dedicated command for the MC protocol LED off Error code initialization 1617 For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 330 APPENDICES APPENDICES Appendix 1 Processing Time Calculate the minimum processing time for each function using the expressions below Note that the processing time may become longer depending on the load factor on the network how congested the line is the window size of each connected device the number of connections and system configuration Use the values obtained from the expressions as a guideline for the processing time when communications are performed in only one connection 1 Minimum processing time of communications using a fixed buffer communications between the E71s a Procedure exists St Ke x Df Sr Tfs time from the start of sending to the completion of sending unit ms St Sending station scan time Ke Kdf Constant Refer to the table below Df Number of send data words Sr Receiving station scan time QJ71E71 100
194. ET H and communications or communications using data link ed MELSECNET 10 relay communication parameters instructions The termination process for the Ethernet module is in T n Finish all the communications to perform the termination process C081 process and whether communications using data link of the Ethernet module instructions have reached cannot be checked Check if the relay station connected station is operating normally If the communication is alive no action for this error is required Check if there is an error with the cable connection between the The communication process was abnormally ended in own station and the connected station the following communications If the line is heavily loaded reduce the load C082 Communications with a programming tool UDP IP Increase the number of resends for the data link instructions CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Increase the time reserved for the communication process Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay For a Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU communications Process CPU or Redundant CPU use Time reserved for communication process SD315 For a Universal model QCPU configure the service processing setting in PLC System under PLC Parameter Check if the relay station connected station is operating normally If the communication is alive no action for this error is required Check if there is
195. Ethernet board Please execute the Following settings station number Network No Network No of Ethernet module set in parameter Station No Station No that does not overlap on the same loop Metwork No and station No are not necessary For communication with Communication with Ethernet port of CPU built in Ethernet Communication via GOT Transparent Communication via IE Field Ethernet adapter Protocol UDP 97 98 PLC side I F Detailed Setting of Ethernet Module PLC Type Network No Station No IP Address 10 97 79 2 IP Input Format DEC C Host Name Station No lt gt IP Information QJ71E71 jum m automatic Response System xi Select Ethernet Module under PLC side I F and double click the item The window shown to left appears Set the station number and the IP address according to the network parameters Set Other Station Setting and Network Communication Route when required A Passive open process is performed on all the MELSOFT products connected to the network The E71 will wait for an Active open request to itself CHAPTER 9 MC PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER wc PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS Using MC protocol communications connected devices that can send and receive data in accordance with the MC protocol can access a CPU module Because an E71 processes and sends receives data based on commands from connected devices no programs for data co
196. For use in a redundant system When using an E71 in a redundant system refer to the following QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 1 Mounting an E71 on the main base unit of a redundant system This section provides information on mounting an E71 on the main base unit of a redundant system a Basic system configuration Access can be performed from a connected device to the control system and standby system of a redundant system b System configuration with a communication path backed up Access can be performed from a connected device to the control system and standby system of the redundant system in the communication path 1 or communication path 2 Ex If a communication error occurs during access to the control system through the communication path 1 1 in the figure below the control system can be accessed through the communication path 2 2 in the figure below If a communication error also occurs in the communication path 2 the system switches between the control system and the standby system enabling communications with the new system 3 in the figure below Connected device EERE ABN Ethernet Ethernet network No 1 network No 2 Lene Control system 1 2 Standby system 3 s S Ell IE H 0 d B BH B
197. I O signals Because the output signal Y turns off in the standby system CPU module an initial process cannot be performed using I O signals To perform an initial process set the network parameters using a programming tool 2 Open close processes a Communications in TCP IP Place the E71 in open wait status Passive open and perform an open close process from the connected device Active open process is performed from the E71 the close process is performed from the E71 after data communications but if the system is switched before execution of the close process the process cannot be performed b When using a user connection to communicate with the standby system for MC protocol communications or communications using a random access buffer Ethernet operation setting Set Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time under Initial timing Open setting In TCP IP communications set Unpassive or Fullpassive under Open system Point Setting connections for communications with the system A and communications with the system B is recommended This facilitates communications with the other system if a communication error has occurred in the own system or when the system is switched A maximum of 16 user connections can be registered in the E71 c Open close processes using I O signals Because the output signal Y turns off in the standby system CPU module open close processes cannot be p
198. ICES Private Sub Command3 Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles Command3 Click Close the TCP UDP connection socket disconnect the line Me Ajsock Shutdown Net Sockets SocketShutdown Both Me Ajsock Close MsgBox The disconnection was successful MsgBoxStyle Information State Me Ajsock Connected End Sub Private Sub Command4 Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles Command4 Click the prorgram End End Sub Private Sub Command5 Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles Command5 Click Check the connection state If State Then MsgBox Connected Else MsgBox Closed End If End Sub End Class EOL xipueddy 0 xipueddy pesn S LAN OPIS y uo 417 Appendix 11 Checking the Serial Number and Function Version The serial number and function version of the E71 can be checked with the following Rating plate Front of the module Programming tool system monitor 1 Checking on the rating plate The rating plate is located on the side of the module It also shows the MAC address and certification marks of applicable standards MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI ETHERNET UNIT MODEL _QJ71E71 100 MAC address MAC ADD 080070442FCF Function versio
199. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller series Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Ay QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 esa QJ71E71 B2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels WARNING AN CAUTION WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under A CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to manuals relevant to the network Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident To prevent the malfunction of the programmable controller system due to harmful e mails take preventive measures
200. Me Command4 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command4 Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Command4 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText Me Command4 Location New System Drawing Point 144 152 Me Command4 Name Command4 Me Command4 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me Command4 Size New System Drawing Size 73 32 Me Command4 TablIndex 3 Me Command4 Text Close Command3 Me Command3 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command3 Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Command3 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText Me Command3 Location New System Drawing Point 64 96 Me Command3 Name Command3 Me Command3 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me Command3 Size New System Drawing Size 152 33 Me Command3 Tablndex 2 Me Command3 Text disconnect 2 Me Command2 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command2 Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Command2 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText Me Command2 Location New System Drawing Point 64 56 Me Command2 Name Command2 Me Command2 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me Command2 Size New System Drawing Size 152 31 Me Command2 Tablndex 1 Me Command2 Text Sending a E71 command Command1 Me Command1 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command1 Cursor System Wi
201. NS 15 10 2 5 This instruction reads data received from the connected device through communications using a fixed buffer used in an interrupt program Command zpurrcvs 1 Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent 2 5 Index Constant Setting data system user File JEN function module 5 x register Others register Zn Bit Word Bit Word unco K H S1 D1 1 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later Universal model QCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted 2 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data m o Setting data Description Set by Data type Un lU Start I O number of the E71 00 to FE The first two digits Character string BIN N n Un of the three digit I O number User 16 bit 2 51 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit Q D1 Start number of the device that stores receive data System Device name ds 2 Receive data Setting Device Item Setting data Set by range Stores the data length of the data read from the fixed buffer data area Depending on the procedure of fixed buffer communications the data length is the number of words or the number of bytes Receive data Procedure exists communications u
202. OP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating C175 An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating C176 An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating C1774 An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating C178 An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is pro
203. OT This chapter describes the connection of the E71 with MELSOFT products such as a programming tool and MX Component and the GOT 8 1 Applications This section describes applications according to a connection type 1 Programming and monitoring over Ethernet In Ethernet a programming tool can create programming of a programmable controller and monitor a programmable controller MELSOFT connection and the GOT can monitor and test a programmable controller Remote operations making full use of the Ethernet capability long distance connectivity and high speed communications are achieved Programming tool 2 Connecting multiple products Multiple MELSOFT products and GOTs can be connected using MELSOFT application communication ports Point The connection used in the connection with MELSOFT products is only for data communications with the MELSOFT products and cannot be used for data communications with connected devices other than MELSOFT products a Connection using the TCP IP communications The E71 can connect to up to 17 MELSOFT products using one dedicated system connection and 16 user connections GOTs cannot be connected using the TCP IP communications Use the UDP IP communications b Connection using the UDP IP communications The E71 c
204. PU to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions NCAUTION Do not bundle the control wires and the communication cables with the main circuit and the power wires and do not install them close to each other They should be installed at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from each other Failure to do so may generate noise that may cause malfunctions When changing the operating status of the CPU module such as remote RUN STOP from the external device select Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time for the Initial timing setting in the network parameter The communication line will be closed when Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time is selected and the remote STOP is executed from the external device Consequently the CPU module cannot reopen the communication line and the external device cannot execute the remote RUN Installation Precautions NCAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Using the programmable controller in any other operating environments may cause electric shocks fires or malfunctions or may damage or degrade the module While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then secur
205. QJ71E71 100 with the serial number first five digits of 15042 or later 1 Setting protocols 2 Writing protocols gt Protocols can be set easily using the predefined Write the set protocols in the flash ROM of the E71 protocol support function of GX Works2 Mis J Sending Connected device 71 Connected device Receiving 3 Executing protocols Execute protocols by dedicated instructions Multiple protocols can be executed by one dedicated Data can be communicated with protocols appropriate to each connected device instruction For the protocol setting method refer to the following GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module 108 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL Point The followings are the maximum numbers of protocols and packets that can be registered Protocols Up to 128 Packets Up to 256 Packet data area size Up to 12288 bytes If once the number of packets reaches the upper limit protocols cannot be added even though the number of protocols has not reached the upper limit In addition if once the packet data area size reaches the upper limit protocols and packets cannot be added even though the numbers of protocols and packets have not reached the
206. R error code 4101 occurs 232 2 Control data CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by S2 0 Execution type completion type To open a connection specify whether to use the parameter settings of a programming tool or to use the settings stored in the following control data starting from S2 2 0000 Use the parameter settings of the programming tool 8000p Use the settings of control data starting from 52 2 0000p 80004 User 52 1 52 2 Completion status Usage setting area Stores the status at completion 00004 Normal completion Values other than 00004 error code Abnormal end Specify the application of a connection Usage of fixed buffer bO 0 For sending or fixed buffer communications are not performed 1 For receiving Destination existence confirmation b1 0 No confirm 1 Confirm Pairing open b7 0 Disable 1 Enable Communication method protocol b8 0 TCP IP 1 UDP IP Fixed buffer communication procedure b10 b9 00 Procedure exists 01 No procedure 10 Predefined protocol Open system b15 b14 00 Active open or UDP IP 10 Unpassive open 11 Fullpassive open As described in the left System User 52 3 Own station port No Specify the port number of the own station 401 to 13875 138By to User S2 4 S2 5 Destination IP address Specif
207. SMTP server is 25 C1204 The SMTP server could not be opened Check if communications with the SMTP server can be performed using the PING command Communications cannot be performed with the SMTP i C1214 Check if the SMTP server is busy server Error response Communications cannot be performed with the SMTP C1224 Check if the SMTP server is busy server Abort Communications cannot be performed with the SMTP C1234 Check if the SMTP server is busy server Reset response Check for an error in the SMTP server C1244 A response from the SMTP server timed out Check if the network is heavily loaded Check for an error in the SMTP server C1254 Forcefully disconnected from the SMTP server 3 Check if the network is heavily loaded Check for an error in the SMTP server C1264 The SMTP server could not be closed i Check if the network is heavily loaded Check for an error in the SMTP server C1274 Closing the SMTP server gave an error response Check if the network is heavily loaded The communication channel is closed because the C1304 t Check the status of the SMTP server Service is not available m Check that a user name not registered in the server has not been The SMTP server is in process and an error response i C1314 4 was received Send the e mail again after a certain period of time The SMTP server is in process and an
208. Set Set if it is needed Setting Already Set Start No Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 Interlink Transmission Parameters Lepore EX to start T O No in which module Routing Parameters Assignment Image Check End Cancel Print Window rink Window b Ethernet operation setting The following is an example of the Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting r Communication Data Code Initial Timing m Do not wait For OPEN Communications Binary Code C impossible at STOP time C ASCII Code Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Address Setting Send Frame Setting Input Format ec Ethernet V2 0 1P Address ___10 97 85 1 802 3 Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting Use the KeepAlive C Use the Ping 9 c CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER c Open setting The following is an example of the open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 fe fe fe KN e eje ce l El l io I E EM __ ___ gt ___ l p 4 EM ee ie Dues 76 ZL Jey
209. Setting Range 0 to 30000 Monitoring Time x100ms Setting Range D to 3000 0 Infinite Wat Communication Parameter Batch Setting OK Cancel FA IMELSOF Series Predefined Protocol Support Function tthernet Protocol Setting Untitled Eloi Dt casussen 2x Set the configuration of packets to be sent and received in H H a aa the Packet Setting window Protocol Detailed Setting window gt Variable Unset or Element Unset Protocol Piecefred Leroy PotocalLre T Sed Pace Line cket Line Peceive Packet Line pub 120 Fokes 2256 Daas Usage D07 Debugging WM sc ProtocolNo 1 Protocol Name Packet Type Send Packet Packet Name Element List Element No Element Type Element Setting Element Name eJnpeooJg uoneoiunuuo ejeg LL Element Type Header Terminator Conversion Variable C Length Check Code G Static Data C Non verified Reception C Non conversion Variable Element Setting Length Send Code Type ASCI Hexadecimal Data Length Data Flow Calculating Range Start Calculating Range End 111 5 Write the protocol setting data to the flash ROM Module Write Module Selection XX
210. System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative COC9 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative COCA System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi rep
211. T SOCK STREAM 0 TCP IP socket for System B connection creation if socketnoB INVALID SOCKET hostdataB sin family AF INET hostdataB sin port scB my port hostdataB sin addr s addr scB my addr s addr if bind socketnoB LPSOCKADDR amp hostdataB sizeof hostdataB SOCK Bind System A qj71e71B sin family AF_INET qj71e71B sin port scB qj port qj71e71B sin_addr s_addr scB qj addr s addr To the next page 403 0 EnSIA uSuM 2 01 xipueddy ajdwes 0 xipueddy OPIS y 5 pesn si 13N 404 if connect socketnoB LPSOCKADDR amp qj7 12718 5 2 71 718 _ 1 Connect open System B ShutdownflagB FLAG ON Shutdown flag ON CloseflagB FLAG ON 1 Connection end flag ON 1 Set to non blocking mode ulCmdArgB 1 ioctlsocket socketnoB FIONBIO amp ulCmdArgB 1 Set to non blocking mode for System B connection selse ConnectLastErrorB ERROR_CONNECT Connection establishment failure else ConnectLastErrorB ERROR_BIND Bind failure else ConnectLastErrorB ERROR SOCKET 1 Socket creation failure 1 Connect completion processing if CloseflagA FLAG OFF amp amp CloseflagB FLAG OFF When both systems are abnormal Sockerror ConnectLastErrorA ConnectLastErrorB 1 Error handling return SOCK strcp
212. Transmission target device IP address in the open setting Set the IP address of the communication target station in Transmission target device IP address Is the connection open Open the connection Has the group setting been configured Is the power supply module of the standby system on Check the connected CPU module Power on the power supply module of the standby system Is the RESET L CLR switch of the standby system CPU module set to the central position reset clear Set the RESET L CLR switch to the central position reset clear Is the tracking cable connected properly Connect the tracking cable properly Is the standby system CPU module operating normally Check and correct the error of the standby system CPU module Is the connected CPU module the control system Set the connected CPU module as the control system Is there any cause such as a standby system CPU module stop error which disables system switching even when the E71 issues a system switching request Remove the cause of the system switching failure 1 QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Is the CPU module in the backup mode Change it from the separate mode to the backup mode If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 gt 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test 7 Page 364 Appendix 6
213. Tu 7 This program is a sample program to conduct a j connection test between the E71 and target device Fs This program accesses the data register D of 71 pe the PLC CPU installed together with the E71 7 Copyright C 2005 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation e 5 Rights Reserved ECRIRE EROR ROER SEER ER EERIE include lt stdio h gt include lt winsock h gt define FLAG_OFF define FLAG_ON define SOCK_OK define SOCK_NG define BUF_SIZE define ERROR_INITIAL define ERROR_SOCKET define ERROR_BIND define ERROR_CONNECT define ERROR_SEND define ERROR_RECEIVE define ERROR_SHUTDOWN define ERROR_CLOSE Definitions for checking the receiving sizes 4096 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Completion flag OFF 1 Completion flag ON 1 Normal completion 1 Abnormal completion 1 Receive buffer size Initial error 1 Socket creation error Bind error Connection error Send error II Receive error Shutdown error Line close error RECV_ANS_1 4 Receiving size of response message in reply to device write 1E frame define RECV ANS 1 22 Receiving size of response message in reply to device write frame RECV_ANS_2 24 Receiving size of response message in reply to device read 1E frame define ANS 2 42 Receiving size of response message in reply to device read frame typed
214. USING RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 13 2 1 How data is read from a connected device The following figure shows how an E71 sends data in response to a read request sent from a connected device D Read request command ACK TCP only CPU module E 71 Random access Writing using buffer the TO instruction B Response reading data 13 ACK TCP only Connected device Write data in the random access buffer of the E71 using the TO instruction Asynchronously with the process above the connected device sends a read request to the E71 The E71 side command receiving Upon receiving the read request from the connected device the E71 sends the data written in the random access buffer to the connected device that sent the read request The E71 side response sending 1 3 2 2 How a connected device writes data The following figure shows how a connected device writes data to the E71 random access buffer eJnpnjjs ZEL Owriting data command ACK TCP only aI gt TCP only CPU module E71 0 Random access o Reading using buffer the FROM instruction Connected device Peds si 1 The connected device writes data to the random access buffer of the E71 The E71 side command receiving The E71 processes th
215. User s instructions later later later Manual Expansion ol data length for data me oe from 480 to 960 later of later of ister of 07082 07082 07082 Sendi Functi ending an unc ion Version 6 attachment as version B CSV file later Function Sending the version B or Version 7 main text later of or later 03102 Support for Function Function version B or version B or encoding O i E mail function decoding atero aero O 03102 03102 Sending character strings as the gt maindaxtin an Function Function Function EN version D or version D or version D or Version 8 27D e mail using the Fogramimable later of later of later of or later d 07082 07082 07082 controller CPU monitoring MELSEC Q function L Ethernet Functi Interf Support of a multiple CPU system Negra Function MA by the file t fer FTP ion B e transfer server inter or sar s 03102 Manual Function Function Function Application Support of 4E frame data in MC version D or version D or version D or protocol communications later of later of later of 07082 07082 07082 Universal Access to the link direct device of Function model QCPU LW10000 or later in MC protocol version D or al x x with function communications 4E frame and later of QnA compatible 3E frame only 09042 versioni B or T later of 09042 Access to the
216. WRITE The abbreviation for JP WRITE and GP WRITE ZNRD The abbreviation for J ZNRD and JP ZNRD ZNWR The abbreviation for J ZNWR and JP ZNWR Intelligent function module A module that has functions other than an input or output such as an A D converter module and D A converter module Subnet mask Predefined protocol support function A number used to logically divide one network into multiple subnetworks and manage them easily The following Ethernet network systems can be configured A small scale Ethernet network system in which multiple network devices are connected A medium or large scale network system in which multiple small scale network systems are connected via routers or other network communication devices A function of GX Works2 This function sets protocols appropriate to each external device and reads writes protocol setting data from to the flash ROM of the E71 Device A device X Y M D or others in a CPU module High Performance model QCPU A generic term for the Q02 H CPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU Buffer memory A memory in an intelligent function module where data such as setting values and monitoring values exchanged with a CPU module are stored Buffer memory address An address that indicates the storage location of data assigned to the buffer memory in an intelligent function module Programming tool A generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer Process CPU
217. a C025 open process by the OPEN instruction or When starting the open by input output signals correct the input output signals connection usage setting area of the buffer memory Check that connection cable with the engineering tool is not disconnected and read write verify the predefined protocol setting An error has occurred when reading writing verifying the C026 6 data again predefined protocol setting data n Do not write data simultaneously when writing protocol setting data from multiple engineering tools Check the operation of the transceiver and connected device Use a transceiver which can perform the SQE test Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time C0304 sending error has occurred Check if the cable is disconnected Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor Perform the self diagnostics test to check for an error in the Ethernet module Check the operation of the transceiver and connected device Use a transceiver which can perform the SQE test Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time C0314 A sending error has occurred Check if the cable is disconnected Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor Perform the self diagnostics test to check
218. a digit specified bit device can be used Ex Kame When using digit specification the following conditions must be satisfied Device number should be a multiple of 16 10 2 Number of digits points should be 4 K4 1 Setting dat Setting data Description Setby ta type Own station s network No 1 to 239 254 Jn 254 Network specified in Valid Module During Other Station Access BIN16 bit Start number of the master local module of the own station Un 00 to FE Upper 2 digits of the number expressed in 3 digits User E Start device of the own station where control data is stored eo 7 Page 157 Section 10 4 1 a Start device of the target station where data to be read is stored gt 159 Section 10 4 156 Device name Start device of othe wn station where read data is stored 01 continuous area for the read data length is required Page 159 Section 10 4 1 b 159 Section 10 4 1 b Syon Device of the own station which is turned ON for 1 scan upon 02 completion of the instruction Bit 156 02 1 is turned ON as well when the instruction fails 1 Instruction execution conditions Instructions can be executed under the following conditions Execution condition of the instruction Structure of the instruction in the ladder mode Setting side User A device value is set by the user System A device val
219. a in the router relay parameter with the class network address different from those of Correct the IP address of the connected device and perform the COC5y the own station when the router relay function is not open process used Check if the network address is correct The setting of the router relay parameter is incorrect After changing the network address perform the initial process again Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 312 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action COC7 An Ethernet module system error has occurred Take action such as separating networks or decreasing the number of data sending to reduce the load on the Ethernet line Consult the network administrator and reduce the load on the Ethernet line Perform the self diagnostics test to check for an error in the Ethernet module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C0C8
220. a stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module cannot be used The program must be modified using the I O signals of the intelligent function module corresponding to the buffer memory For use with safety CPUs refer to the following QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 235 15 6 zPcLosE This instruction disconnects closes a connection with the connected device performing data communications Command 5 1 Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent 5 12 E Index Constant Setting data system user File JEN function module n register Others register device Zn Bit Word Bit Word uo co K H S1 p s 52 01 1 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later Universal model QCPU or safety CPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted 2 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Start I O number of the E71 00 to FE The first two digits Character string BIN n Un of the three digit I O number User 16 bit 51 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit 52 Start number of the device that stores control data Device name The start number of the bit device in the own st
221. ability 40 284 41 and 42 294 and 2A 43 2By 44 to 46 2Cy to 47 to 53 2 to 351 54 to 60 36 to 61 to 67 3D to 431 68 to 74 444 to 4 75 to 81 4B to 516 82 to 88 524 to 584 89 to 95 594 to 5 96 to 102 to 664 Communication parameter setting area Communi c ation address setting area System area Own station port No On Destination IP address Connection 1 Destination Port On Destination MAC address FFFFFFFFFFFF Connection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 103 and 104 67 and 68 105 69 106 and 107 6Ay and 6 108 to 110 6 to 111 to 115 to 734 116 744 117 754 118 764 119 774 Communication status storage area System area Area for the initial process
222. action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test gt Page 364 Appendix 6 1 The COM ERR LED does not turn off even after the error cause is removed To turn it off refer to How to Turn Off the COM ERR LED 330 Section 16 8 276 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 6 4 3 If the SD LED does not flash when data is sent The following table lists the items to be checked and the actions to be taken if the SD LED does not flash when data is sent Check item Action Is the ERR LED or COM ERR LED on Remove the cause that turned on the ERR LED or COM ERR LED Check the cable connection In addition perform a line test to check if there Are the cables properly connected is a problem with the cable connection and the Ethernet line Page 354 Appendix 5 Is the program correct Correct the send program of the E71 If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test 7 s Page 364 Appendix 6 1 7 6 4 4 If data cannot be received with the RD LED off The following table lists the items to be checked and the actions to be taken when an E71 cannot receive data with the RD LED off Check item Action Is the ERR LED or COM ERR LED on Rem
223. ail or malfunction Setup and Maintenance Precautions NCAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Precautions When Disposing of This Product NCAUTION Dispose of this product as an industrial waste Q CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON
224. al information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a function is added 5 uomnoun 4 pue JequinN enes y BuryseyD xipueddy 419 Appendix 11 1 Compatible software versions The following table lists the compatible software versions CPU module Software version GX Developer GX Works2 Basic model QCPU Q00 J Q01CPU Version 7 or High Performance model QCPU Q02 H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU Version 4 or later Q02PH Q06PHCPU Version 8 68W or later Process CPU Q12PH Q25PHCPU Version 7 10L or later Redundant CPU Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Version 8 18U or later Q00U J Q01UCPU Version 8 76E or later Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH QOGUDHCPU Version 8 484 or later Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Version 8 76E or later Universal model Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Version 8 620 or later QCPU Q03UDE Q04UDEH Q06UDEH Version 8 68W or later Q13UDEH Q26UDEHCPU Q10UDEH Q20UDEHCPU Version 8 76E or later Q50UDEH Q100UDEHCPU Incompatible Safety CPU QS001CPU Version 8 65T or later CPU module other than the above MELSECNET H remote I O station Incompatible Version 6 or later Refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 1 To use a module in a multiple CPU system Version 8 or later is required 2 To use a module in a multiple CPU system Version 6 or later is required 23 To mount a module on an extension base unit Versi
225. an connect a MELSOFT product and a GOT using one dedicated system connection 96 CHAPTER 8 CONNECTING MELSOFT PRODUCTS AND A GOT 8 2 Data Communication Procedure This section describes the data communication procedure in the MELSOFT connection Ex Connecting the E71 and a personal computer GX Works2 over Ethernet 1 Write the parameter settings _ Page 83 Section mmm ey 7 1 4 in the CPU module fetsat 5 In the following cases the open setting is not required Only one product is connected in the TCP IP communications One product can be connected without the open H e e e e e e e e 4 setting using the dedicated system connection le MELSOFT Connection ELSOFT Connection 4 The network is running in the UDP IP communications Multiple products can be connected without the IP Address and Port No will be displayed by the selected Format 7 Please enter the value according to the selected number open setting using the dedicated System connection To connect multiple products in the TCP IP communications set the connection for the second product or more in the open setting
226. an where the ECPRTCL instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the ECPRTCL instruction is being executed Program Scan END Scan END Scan END Scan END Scan END Scan process process process Process process ECPRTCL instruction Instruction executed i Completion device i i 1 Protocol executed 2 Protocol execution status address 54COu X Execution status 5 Completed 1 Address of the connection 1 2 Protocols are consecutively executed by the number of protocols specified in n2 of the setting data in the order specified with the control data up to eight protocols with one ECPRTCL instruction Protocol Protocol Protocol Protocol Protocol JOlHdOdd9 19 Point When multiple protocols are executed and an error has occurred in one protocol the following protocols are not executed and the dedicated instruction ends abnormally For the connection where the ECPRTCL instruction can be executed Predefined protocol is set in Fixed Buffer Communication Thus the following communications are not available MC protocol communications Communications using a fixed buffer procedure exists Communications using a fixed buffer no procedure Communications using a random access buffer File transfer FTP server functio
227. and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Receive data from the destination Fixed buffer reception status signal address 5005 b0 ON Execute the BUFRCV instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer number 1 Fixed buffer reception status signal address 5005 b0 OFF When the receive data length and the receive data are completely read out a response is sent to the destination End the receive process If the data receive process is abnormally ended execute the BUFRCV instruction again to repeat the receive process 140 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER Point The items configured in the open setting become enabled when Open completion signal of an E71 is started up When the buffer memory area that stores Fixed buffer reception status signal is turned off and on execute the BUFRCV instruction When abnormal data is received Fixed buffer reception status signal does not turn on In addition data is not stored in the fixed buffer number 1 area 2 No procedure The following is the receive process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial process Open process Receiving data Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal o address 5000 bO BUFROV instruction instruction completion device inst
228. and items The chapter of the current page is shown 1 shows operating procedures XC shows mouse operations is used for items in the menu bar and the project window Select the type of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 12 Model Name Select model name of the connected module Page 74 Section 7 13 Set the number of points assigned to each siot Page 74 Section 7 14 Specify a start VO number for each slot Page 74 Section 7 1 5 Confgure the switch setting of the builtin intelligent function modules Page 74 Section 7 1 8 The section of the current page is shown Set the folowing Error Time Output Mode PLC Operation Mode at HW Error VO Response Time Page 75 Section 7 17 Papu bumas 112 power 1 2 Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start numbers assigned to connected modules 10007 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment Tange of an input module is changed to X1000 to X100F details refer to the following CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Point Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SP UNIT LAY ERR intelligent function module the I O points must also
229. applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers This manual describes the operating procedure system configuration parameter settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the Ethernet interface modules QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 and QJ71E71 B2 hereafter referred to as E71 Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 For programmable controller system To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Safety Gui
230. ar Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History Error History List Error Details Displayed Errors Errors 22 141 Error Code Notation DEC HEX Madel Name QJ71E71 100 E n Model Name mE A Start I O 0000 Mount Position Main Base Slot No 0 co30 9771 71 100 0000 00101 C030 2013 03 19 17 31 54 QJ371E71 100 0000 Error and Solution Intelligent Module Information 00103 2013 03 19 17 33 55 9771 71 100 0000 00105 C030 2013 03 19 17 35 41 QJ71E71 100 0000 00107 2013 03 19 17 37 03 9771 71 100 0000 00108 030 2013 03 19 17 37 27 QJ71E71 100 0000 sending error occurred 00095 cosa 2013 03 19 17 13 30 QJ71E71 100 0000 00100 2013 03 19 17 29 10 9771 71 100 0000 00102 cosa 2013 03 19 17 32 04 QU71E71 100 0000 00104 co33 2013 03 19 17 34 04 QJ71E71 100 0000 00106 2013 03 19 17 35 50 QU71E71 100 0000 00109 C033 2013 03 19 17 37 36 QJ71E71 100 0000 Check the operation of the transceiver and 00112 coso 2013 03 27 13 20 00 QJ71E71 100 0000 Pe Ree ie coe oe 00114 coso 2013 03 27 13 56 06 QJ71E71 100 0000 EA Fine Pas cance 00119 coso 2013 03 27 14 09 47 QJ71E71 100 0000 because packets may be congested on the ins 00090 7 2013 03 19 17 02 57 QU71E71 100 0000 Check that the connection cable is not dislocated 00091 007 2013 03 19 17 05 43 9771 71 100 0000 00092 0 7 2013 03 19 17 09 49 QJ71E71 100 0000 Clear History Refresh Create CSV File
231. ardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C119 There is no received mail Read Mail information storage area address 2682 of the buffer memory and read received e mails remaining on the server 320 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error PE 4 Error description Action code Check that the e mail is not compressed or encrypted Check if the e mail specifications such as the encoding decoding C11Ay The received mail failed to be converted style and file format on the sending side are the same as those for the Ethernet module Check if the sending side has not divided the file Receive an e mail with an unknown destination and unknown destination server from the SMTP server j The received mail is stored in the mail buffer An e mail was sent and an error mail was received from C11By M S Check if the portion before is correct in the mail address the mail server of the destination NS setting in the parameter settings Check if the portion before has been registered on the destination mail server Check if the attachment size is 6K words less 110 The attachment size exceeded the allowable size M Check that the sending side has not divided the attachment Check that the port number of the
232. area When the number of errors reaches 17 the error log is then registered in the error log block 1 area again 2 An error code indicating error details is stored The subheader code of the error message is code end 5 stored in bits 0 to 7 of the corresponding area Bits 8 to 15 store 0 For errors below the code or UDP IP level 0 is stored The command code of the error message or the values of the lower bytes of the request type and subrequest type of the data link instructions are stored b15 to 60 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Command E74 Command code or Subrequest type Request type code 0 is stored in the following cases Error log For messages not containing a command code block For errors below the TCP IP or UDP IP level because their commands are unknown Connection E8 The number of the error connection is stored in bits 0 to 7 of the corresponding area Bits 8 No to 15 store 0 For errors below the TCP IP or UDP IP level 0 is stored Own station E9 The port number of the error own station is stored For errors below the TCP IP or UDP IP port No B level 0 is stored MM The IP address of the error connected device is stored 0 is stored in the following cases Destination and EB For errors below the IP level IP address When an error response was sent through the CPU module Destination EC The IP address of the error connected device is stored For errors below the TCP IP or Port No UDP IP level 0 is
233. ata reception 4 Receiving 5 Completed Received data verification Verification result of receive packet No 1 is stored 295 Section 16 6 7 a result receive packet 54C2u 0 to b7 Element No where the verification result did not match No 1 b8 to b15 The cause of mismatch verification result code Received data verification 54C3 to result receive packet No 2 54D1 The bit configuration is the same as receive packet No 1 to 16 The number of protocol executions in Connection No 1 is stored Number of protocol 54D2 0 No protocol execution executions 1 to 65535 Number of executions When the number exceeds 65535 the value remains 65535 Cancels the protocol executed in Connection No 1 Protocol cancellation 54D3 0 No cancellation specification specification 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancel completed set by the system a Received data verification result The following information is stored in Received data verification result Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 Stored value Description Verification matched 1 to 32 Element No where the verification result did not match FF Verification not performed 295 1517 JOA 9 94 b The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stored Mew Description Cause value Normal 7 E The total
234. ateway Station No lt gt IP Information Configure settings e g network number and station number to communicate with other network modules MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application Network ETP Parameters Configure the settings of the file transfer FTP Parameter function 7 Configure the settings of the e mail function and the E mail Setting eas lin automatic notification function Set control number SI the E71 side to Interrupt Settings Page 146 Section 12 5 1 request an interrupt to the CPU module Redundant settings Configure settings to use the E71 on the main base unit in a redundant system Page 212 Section 14 6 3 Routing Parameters Set the communication path to communicate with a station having a different network number MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application Group Settings Valid Module During Other Station Access When two communication paths are configured between the connected device and the E71 on the main base unit in a redundant system configure settings to disable system switching even if an error occurs in either communication path Select a relay module when an access request with no network number specified is issued from another station QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Predefined Protocol Support Function Remote Password The connected device side protocol
235. ation process using both direct writing to the buffer memory and the UINI instruction Also do not request another reinitialization process while reinitialization is being performed When the IP address of the E71 has been changed reset that of the connected device as well If the connected device retains the MAC address of the destination device the communications may not be continued after the IP address of the E71 has been changed n a redundant system do not change parameters such as IP address and Ethernet operation setting using the UINI instruction If changed normal communications cannot be performed Change the parameters using a programming tool 269 4 5 If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status 51 1 5 Program example The following pages show sample programs that change the following setting items using the UINI instruction Ethernet operation setting Transmission speed and communication mode The following are sample programs for communications using connection numbers 1 and 2 When using other connections specify the corresponding signals and bits for each connection The UINI instruction is also used in the program for a reinitialization process When performing a reinitialization process using the UINI instruction refer to the program for a reinitialization process gt Page 348 Appendix 4 2
236. ation that System D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 1 For safety CPUs only connection numbers 1 to 8 can be specified If the specified value is out of range OPERATION ERROR error code 4101 occurs 2 Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by 52 0 System area Stores the status at completion 00004 Normal completion 52 1 Completion status System Values other than 0000 error code Abnormal end 236 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 Functions This instruction performs the close process for a connection specified by S1 for the module specified by Un connection closed Completion of the CLOSE instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Completion device Turns on at the END process of the scan where the CLOSE instruction is D1 0 completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the CLOSE instruction D1 1 Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the CLOSE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the CLOSE instruction is being executed END END END Program process process process CLOSE instruction Executed Completion device
237. be the same in addition to the I O assignment setting C7 20 Section 422 shows setting or operating examples shows reference manuals Point Pshows notes that requires attention lt shows reference pages When an inteligent module is connected assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function Module in the Project window DCN Remark information 1 The mouse operation example is provided below MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Unset Project PRG MAIN i Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diaeno Menu bar XZ Online gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC 3 Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Program Setting 8 POU E O Program a 5 Local Device Comment Device Memory Device hitial Value A window selected in the view selection area is displayed XW Project window 5 gt Parameter PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter View selection area Unlabeled 14 Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms
238. between a CPU module and the connected device is not connected due to cable disconnection or other causes It is recommended to set an original communication procedure to send receive data 139 eJynpeooJg Buipues geq 12 4 Receiving Procedure This section describes how an E71 receives data from the connected device The following methods for receiving data are offered Data receiving using the main program BUFRCV instruction Data receiving using an interrupt program BUFRCVS instruction 12 4 1 Data receiving using the main program BUFRCV instruction A receive process in the main program is performed using the BUFRCV instruction 1 Procedure exists The following is the data receive process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial process Open process Receiving data Sending a response signal X19 Initial normal completion jo Open completion signal address 5000 b0 BUFROV instruction instruction completion device instruction completion device 1 Fixed buffer reception status signal Address 5005 b0 ACK TCP only Receiving data tM a gt ao Y o Response Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device
239. bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 3 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 5 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 6 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 7 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 8 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 System area 24576 6000 24577 to 25599 6001 to 6 25600 to 26623 6400 to 67 26624 to 27647 6800 to 6 27648 to 28671 6C00 to GFFF j 28672 to 29695 7000 to 7 29696 to 30719 7400 to 77FFy 30720 to 31743 78004 to 31744 to 32767 7C00 to 7FFF yy Fixed buffer data area Data length Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer data Fixed buffer No 10 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 11 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 12 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 13 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 14 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 9 Fixed buffer No 15 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer
240. blish a connection between the E71 and the connected device Page 85 Section 7 2 Page 93 Section 7 3 3 Once the connection is established the connected device sends an MC protocol message 4 The connection is closed after the communications are completed Point In the cases described below an E71 performs a remote password check when the connected device accesses the programmable controller If communications cannot be performed unlock the remote password Page 193 Section 14 3 2 When a remote password has been set in the CPU module When the connection for data communications with the connected device is to be subjected to the remote password check eJnpeooJg uoneoiunuuo eq 6 101 9 4 Parameter Setting Set the following parameters for MC protocol communications Basic setting _ Page 80 Section 7 1 2 Ethernet operation setting 7 Page 81 Section 7 1 3 Open setting 7 7 Page 83 Section 7 1 4 Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 a oe ri l x El I x xi ____ ___ e eie 4 lee e e KEENER Select communication method for communications using a fixed buffer For Procedu
241. can be easily selected or created edited from the Predefined Protocol Library of GX Works2 Select the connection protected by a remote password Page 108 CHAPTER 11 Page 192 Section 14 3 79 151 LL 5 pZ 7 1 2 Basic setting Set items such as a network number and station number Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC gt Select Ethernet under Network Type Network Type Select Ethernet Within the number of points of th Start No Set the start I O number of the E71 in units of 16 points CPU module Network No Set the network number of the E71 1 to 239 Group No Set the group number of the E71 0 to 32 Station No Set the station number of the E71 1 to 64 Online Offline Mode Select the operation mode of the E71 P Self Loopback Test H W Test For settings to use the E71 in a redundant system refer to the parameter settings for the redundant system function s Page 212 Section 14 6 3 80 7 1 3 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE Ethernet Operation Setting Configure the settings such as an IP address to connect the E71 to Ethernet Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter
242. ccumulated count of unlock process abnormal end address 20595 50734 and Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end address 20597 5075 If this action is not taken the process a above will be performed each time a process failure occurs exceeding the notification accumulated count If the number of unlock lock process failures for the connection to the connected device is greater than the above accumulated notification count the possible cause is unauthorized access from the connected device Disable the connection using the buffer memory area System port use prohibited designation area address 20488 5008 After this the unlock process cannot be performed for the connection until Use allowed is set Inform the system manager that the number of unlock lock process failures is greater than the accumulated notification count and take corrective actions Point P For the method to turn off the COM ERR LED refer to the method using the Ethernet diagnostics 5 330 Section 16 8 The accumulated counts stored in the following buffer memory areas can be cleared e Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion address 20594 50724 e Accumulated count of lock process normal completion address 20596 5074 200 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 3 6 Parameter settings The remote password setting of the E71 is described XX Project window gt Parameter gt Remote Pa
243. ce Check the operation of the connected device Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of An IP assembly timeout error has occurred The pn Ex A Check if the cable is disconnected 4 remaining part of the divided data could not be received Check if there is problem with the connection to the transceiver and a timeout has occurred nee or terminating resistor Correct the IP assembly timer value and perform the initial process again Because there is no space in the internal buffer such as 04 Send the same data again and check the receipt of a response the IP header buffer data cannot be sent In communications using an auto open UDP port or communications using a fixed buffer in the No Correct the data length Procedure control method there is an error in the SOON C04Dy MAU neck Correct the text size so that the text data size is within the receive data length specified in the application data of the buffer memory size message received by the Ethernet module Not all the receive data can be stored When ASCII Code has been selected in the MAS ae Select Binary Code in the Ethernet operation setting Then communication data code setting in the Ethernet restart the Ethernet module to perform communications again C0504 operation setting ASCII code data which cannot be C
244. ce 0000 numbers Reads values in 1 word units from word devices consecutive device numbers 0001 Writes values to bit devices consecutive device numbers in 1 point units Writes values to bit devices consecutive device numbers in 16 point Write 1401 units 0000 i Writes values to word devices consecutive device numbers in 1 word units Specifies a device number to read the device value Discrete device numbers can be used Read Random QUEM Reads bit devices in 16 or 32 point units Device Reads word devices in 1 or 2 word units 0001 Specifies a device number in 1 point units to write a value to a bit device Discrete device numbers can be used Write Random 1402 Specifies a device number in 16 point units to write a value to a bit 0000 device Discrete device numbers used Specifies a device number in 1 or 2 word units to write a value to a word device Discrete device numbers can be used Entry Monitor Device 0801 0000 Registers a device to be read by Execute Monitor command 0802 Execute Monitor 0802 0000 Reads the value of the device registered by Entry Monitor Device command 0801 Read Block 0406 0000 Specifies n points 1 point 16 bits of word a bit devices as one block and reads multiple blocks of data Discrete device numbers can be used Write Block 1406 0000 Specifies 1 point 16 bits of word ar bit devices as one block and writes multiple blocks of data D
245. ce of the connection that has been opened where the alive check target exists is lost 1 to 32767 Dest Confirmation Interval For the connection that is opened where the alive check target exists set the interval to perform the alive check again when a response from the connected device as the alive check target is not received 1 to 32767 Dest Confirmation Resend For the connection that has been opened where the alive check target exists set the number of times that the alive check is performed again when a response from the connected device as the alive check target is not received 1 to 32767 DNS Setting Input Format Select an input format DEC HEX IP Address of DNS Server1 IP Address of DNS Server2 IP Address of DNS Server3 IP Address of DNS Server4 Set the IP address of each server 1 The DNS setting is configured for using the e mail function For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application 345 A sseooJg eniu p xipueddy sseooJd jeniu y Bunjes p xipueddy 1 Precautions for settings Specify the setting value of each timer on the E71 side so that the following formula is met Response TCP ULP TCP end TOR E monitoring gt resend gt timer value timer value timer value timer value timer value TCP TCP zero window resend
246. ce the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module COE4 An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module 315 1511 JOA 9 94 JONG eui ui peJojs sepoo JON 9 9 Error description Action COE5 An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Chec
247. ceeding the receive message size was C086 Correct the send message size of the request source received 310 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error 4 Error description Action code There is an error in the IP address set in the Station No In the Station No lt gt IP information setting set the IP addresses C087 lt gt IP information setting for CC Link IE Controller for the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network H Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 relay communication target MELSECNET 10 relay communications devices Increase the request interval There is no insufficient space in the receive buffer of the ues Decrease the number of request nodes relay station PC number for MELSOFT connection or 2 MS na Wait for a response to the previous request before sending the data link instructions or the communication request ios di next request destination station Receive buffer full error Correct the timeout value COB3 A request that cannot be processed was issued from Correct the request details H the programmable controller CPU Correct the network number PC number 5 Data that cannot processed by the programmable Correct the request details controller CPU or Ethernet module was specified Cancel the current request The channel number is out
248. ceiving using the Web function 19 20 1 2 3 Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT In Ethernet a programming tool can create programming of a programmable controller and monitor a programmable controller MELSOFT connection and the GOT can monitor and test a programmable controller Remote operations making full use of the Ethernet capability long distance connectivity and high speed communications are achieved Programming tool Collection and modification of CPU module data from connected devices MC protocol communications The MC protocol enables connected devices to access MC protocol supporting modules over Ethernet The E71 can communicate with a personal computer and HMI Human Machine Interface as long as the connected devices can receive send messages in the MC protocol control procedure By using a separately sold communication support tool MX Component a communication program for the host system can be created without considering detailed protocols communication procedures gt 99 CHAPTER 9 Connected device Communications using SLMP SLMP is a protocol that enables conne
249. cols which are executed is less than 4 0 is stored 0 1 to 16 System S 14 Matched receive packet No 5 When the communication type of the fifth protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the fifth protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 5 0 is stored 0 1 to 16 System 5 15 Matched receive packet No 6 When the communication type of the sixth protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the sixth protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 6 0 is stored 0 1 to 16 System 5 16 Matched receive packet No 7 When the communication type of the seventh protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the seventh protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 7 0 is stored 0 1 to 16 System 5 17 Matched receive packet No 8 When the communication type of the eighth protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored Wh
250. control method the following data code is expressed in a binary code Communications are performed using a binary code regardless of the communication data code setting Text command V m 2 Maximum of 2046 bytes Point In communications in the No Procedure control method a subheader or data length setting is not added unlike the Procedure Exist control method therefore all data are handled as a valid text In addition the E71 turns on Fixed buffer reception status signal after storing the size of the received message packet in the data length storage area It is recommended to set a checking method For example include data length and a data type code in the application data of a message so that the number of bytes and data type of the application data can be identified on the receiving side CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 7 Pairing Open Pairing open is an opening method that connects the own station with the connected device using only one port by pairing the receive and send connections for communications using a fixed buffer 12 7 1 Applications Enabling the pairing open allows data communications to be performed with two connections by performing the open process for one port MC protocol communications and communications using a random access buffer can be also performed using paring opened connections TCP IP or UDP IP communications E71 Send data ee Conn
251. correct the error Was the BUFRCV instruction executed Correct the execution conditions of the BUFRCV instruction Check if the send receive processes for I O signals and the BUFSND BUFRCY instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program Was the BUFRCV instruction completed normally Check the error code in the BUFSND instruction completion status area and correct the error Was the BUFRCVS instruction executed Correct the interrupt setting of the programming tool Check if the send receive processes for I O signals and the BUFSND BUFRCYV instructions are not used for the same connection If SO Correct the program Is the control data of the BUFRCVS instruction correct Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Correct the control data Check and correct the error If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 gt Page 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test gt Page 364 Appendix 6 1 284 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 5 10 communications using a random access buffer cannot be performed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot perform communications using a random access buffer Check item Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of 5000
252. crosoft Software development environment This setting is not required because the ARP function can be MAC address used IP address An arbitrary number is assigned Port number An arbitrary number is assigned ejdures xipueddy c Communication protocol TCP IP is used ensiy EOL xipueddy 2 Outline of the program example pesn S LAN OPIS y uo a Program on the CPU module side Because parameters are set on the programming tool no program is required b Program on the connected device side Data DO to D4 in the CPU module are read out 409 3 Programming tool setting Set the parameters using the programming tool as shown below a Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting b Open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 unpassve Send ___ Procedure Exist_ Disable Confirm zoo n _ p n n Ie p pn n 4 4 Ie n n 4 4 l F F l l E EP 7 7 410 APPENDICES 4 Sample program on the connected device side
253. cted devices to access SLMP supporting devices over Ethernet SLMP communications are available among devices that can receive send messages in the SLMP control procedure Page 103 CHAPTER 10 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 4 Data communications using the predefined protocol predefined protocol support function Registering protocol data in advance using GX Works2 allows communications by executing only an ECPRTCL instruction program In addition the protocol setting required to communicate with the connected device such as a measuring instrument or a bar code reader can be configured easily using the Predefined Protocol Support Function of GX Works2 Page 108 CHAPTER 11 1 Setting protocols 2 Writing protocols Protocols can be set easily using the Write the set protocols in the flash ROM of predefined protocol support function of GX the E71 Works2 V GX Works2 Sending Connected device E71 Connected device Receiving 3 Executing protocols Execute protocols by dedicated instructions Multiple protocols can be executed by one dedicated instruction Data can be communicated with protocols appropriate to each connected device 21 5 Exchange of data with connected devices communications using a fixed buffer and random access buffer
254. ction window D Tool gt Predefined Protocol Support Function gt Ethernet Module Create a new file File gt New gt Select Predefined Protocol Library Add New in the Add Protocol window When Predefined Protocol Library is selected select the protocol from Predefined Protocol Library registered in GX Works2 Point If User Protocol Library is selected in the Add Protocol window protocols saved by user can be read For details on the User Protocol Library refer to the following GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module 110 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 4 Setthe items required for the data communications Protocol Detailed Setting Set communication parameters in the Protocol Detailed Manufacturer Setting window Type Model Version Protocol Detailed Setting window gt Select a D protocol gt Edit gt Protocol Detailed Setting Protocol Setting Information Protocol No 1 Protocol Name Communication Type SendtReceive z Receive Setting Clear 05 area receive data area before protocol execution 47 Enable Disable Receive Wait Time 0 x100ms Setting Range 0 to 30000 0 Infinite Wait r Send Setting Number of Retries Times Setting Range 0 to 10 Retry Interval 10ms Setting Range 0 to 30000 Standby Time 0 10ms
255. ction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the clear command 4 Errors dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status 51 1 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that clears the open error code of the connection number 1 when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F 262 MO M1 H1 D2 3 Specify the open error code of 1 L 4 the connection No 1 MOVP HO D3 1 Specify the error code clear SET M1 Hl ZP ERRCLR U0 DO MIO Execute the ERRCLR instruction id n Process upon completion MOV D100 Cd PA Error information is cleared M11 MOV D1 D100 Process upon abnormal end ff CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 12 ZPERRRD This instruction reads error information stored in the buffer memory of the E71 Command zperrro e Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent 12 Index Constant Setting data system user File JEN function module d register Others register device Zn Bit Word Bit Word unco K H S1 E o 01 1 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later or Universal model QCPU double quotation of
256. ction x x x x o IP address in use detection function x x x x o Communications using SLMP x x x x o Data communications using the predefined protocol x x x x o Module error collection function x x x x o 367 seues v vuo z 7 xipueddy SOLOS JOUIC Jo 19uJeu 3 Z xipueddy 368 1 2 3 4 5 6 Wf 8 9 Point The response performance of the E71 to connected devices is faster than that of the A QnA series modules When the E71 is used the compatibility with the A QnA series modules cannot be precisely maintained If there is a problem due to the performance of the connected device create a timing similar to that of the existing system using the CPU module constant scan setting For the E71 the number of connections for the open process from the CPU module has increased to 16 connections Compatible with the I O signal and QE71 N buffer memory Data of up to 960 words can be read from written to an E71 and up to 480 words in a QE71 N Usage depends on the CPU module and programming tool version This applies to a module with the software version of Q or earlier No EEPROM is installed Items registered in the EEPROM of a QE71 N are set using the parameter settings of the programming tool This applies to a module with the software version of E or later This function can be used in an E71 with a serial nu
257. cuted by using the ECPRTCL instruction S 0 Execution count result Protocols with errors are included in the count 0 1108 System When settings of the setting data or control data contain an error O is stored Stores the status at completion When multiple protocols are executed the status of the protocol executed last is stored 5 1 Completion status 0000 Normal completion System Values other than 0000 error code Abnormal end Execution protocol 5 2 Set the first protocol number to be executed 1 to 128 User number specification 1 Execution protocol Set the second protocol number to be 5 3 nM 0 1 to 128 User number specification 2 executed Execution protocol S 4 ate Set the third protocol number to be executed 0 1 to 128 User number specification 3 Execution protocol S 5 Set fourth protocol number to be executed 0 1 to 128 User number specification 4 Execution protocol S 6 AE Set the fifth protocol number to be executed 0 1 to 128 User number specification 5 Execution protocol 5 7 DEP Set the sixth protocol number to be executed 0 1 to 128 User number specification 6 Execution protocol Set the seventh protocol number to be S 8 Hop 0 1 to 128 User number specification 7 executed Execution protocol S 9 DO Set the eighth protocol number to be executed 0 1 to 128 User number specification 8 When the communication type of the first protocol executed includes receiv
258. d 354 APPENDICES b Operating procedure Use the following procedure 1 Click button in the Ethernet Diagnostics window D Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics gt Target Module Setting under Module No 2 Configure the settings and click the Beute button 199 S9NId 6 xipueddy 9eu2 snes eur 9 xipueddy MELSOFT Application 3 Click the ES button 355 356 PING Test m Input Item m Address Specification IP Address Input Form IP Address 10 97 79 02 pec HEX IP Address Host Name Y Setting Options Display the host name Default Specify the data size 32 Bytes Specify the time of the communication time check 1 Seconds Specify the number of transmissions specify the number of times 4 Times Cancel m Result Pinging 10 97 79 2 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 10 97 79 2 bytes 32 time ims TTL 250 Reply from 10 97 79 2 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 250 Reply from 10 97 79 2 bytes 32 time ims TTL 250 Reply from 10 97 79 2 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 250 Packets transmitted 4 Received 4 Lost 0 Round trip ms Min 0 Max D Avg 0 Success Transmissions c Action for abnormal end 4 The test results displayed If the test fails check the following and perform the test again Whether the E71 is properly mounted on the base unit Connection to the E
259. d command of the MC protocol remote password unlock 1630 When the file transfer FTP server function is in use Dedicated FTP command password unlock Programming tool Input of the remote password in the window When the Web function is in use Input of a remote password in the window displayed on the Web browser When the unlock process is not performed the remote password set E71 that has accepted a communication request checks an entered remote password and disables access to the specified station All data received prior to the unlock process is treated as an error 2 Access process Access to the specified station is enabled when the remote password unlock process is completed normally Specify the station to be accessed and access the station 3 Access prohibition process lock process To terminate the access to the specified station the connected device performs the remote password lock process to disable subsequent access The following are lock process methods Dedicated command of the MC protocol remote password lock 1631 When the file transfer FTP server function is in use Dedicated FTP command password lock Programming tool Automatically executes the lock process When the Web function is in use Automatically performs a lock process when the Web browser is closed 193 sesseooJd yoo pue xoojun sesseooud Bunjes psomssed z vr PJOMSSE 9jouloH pr 14
260. d connection of the external power supply terminal Retainer AUI cable External power supply terminal DC power supply for a transceiver 1 Connecting the cable 1 Siide the retainer in the orientation A and insert the AUI cable connector all the way in 2 Slide the retainer in the orientation B and make sure that the AUI cable is securely locked into place 3 Connect the external power supply terminal DC power supply for a transceiver Strip the cable jacket by 13mm The applicable cable size is 0 13mm to 2 5mm 26AWG to 14AWG 0000600000999 REER A Loosen the terminal screw and insert the cable into the terminal 5 Tighten the terminal screw within the torque range listed in Section 6 1 2 1 If the wire strip length is too long the conductive part is exposed and it may increase the risk of electric shock or short circuit between the adjacent terminals If the wire strip length is too short it may result in poor contact 74 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Point To prevent the influence of high frequency noise using ferrite cores install them on the E71 side connected device side and transceiver side on the AUI cable Ferrite core used for the tests conducted by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation ZCAT 2032 0930 from TDK Corporation QJ71E71 B5 cable 10BASE5 coaxial cable Ferrite core Transceiver 2 Disco
261. delines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 For the product To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to one of the manuals listed under 1 RELEVANT MANUALS This manual describes the basic specifications functions and usage of the E71 1 E71 relevant manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application lt SH 080010 13JL89 gt E mail function communication function communications via CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 and communications by using the data link instructions and file transfer FTP server function of the E71 MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function lt SH 080180 13JR40 gt MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual lt SH 080008 13JF89 gt Web function of the E71 Details of MELSEC communication protocol MC protocol that is used for data communication between a target device and a CPU module 2 Operating manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common lt SH 080779 13JU63 gt System configuration parameter settings and online operations commo
262. disconnected 1 Hub connected Data transmission speed b14 0 Operating at 1OBASE T 1 Operating at 100BASE TX Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use Switch status Operational mode setting b1 0 Online 1 Offline 2 Self loopback test 3 Hardware test 40 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability Status of settings with a programming tool Communication data code setting b1 0 Communications in a binary code 1 Communications in an ASCII code Initial open method setting b2 0 No parameter setting start up according to the sequence program 1 Parameter setting start up according to the parameters TCP Existence confirmation setting b4 0 Use the Ping 1 Use the KeepAlive Send frame setting b5 203 Module 0 Ethernet status area 1 IEEE 802 3 Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 0 Disable 1 Enable Initial timing setting b8 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communication Communications impossible at status storage STOP time arca 1 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use 204 CCy System area 205 instruction execution request CDy System area
263. dress System 4 Functions This instruction reads the receive data for fixed buffer communications of the connection specified by 51 for the module specified by Un 254 CPU module Receive data length Receive data Receive data E71 Fixed buffer data area BUFRCV No 1 No n No 16 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Completion of the BUFRCV instruction can be checked with Completion device D2 0 and D2 1 Completion device Turns on at the END process of the scan where the BUFRCV instruction is D2 0 completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the BUFRCV 02 1 instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the BUFROV instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the BUFRCV instruction is being executed END END END Program Scan process Scan process Scan process Executed BUFROV instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Abnormally ended d 2 4 FL E R T T Receiving data Na Storing the receive data The ZP BUFRCYV instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the read command bit for a connection with the connected device set in Fixed buffer
264. e 2 If the class network address of the E71 on the own station is the same as that of the connected device set the subnet address of the connected device j Own station E71 Class B IP address 81052F01H 129 5 47 1 Subnet mask FFFFFCOOH 255 255 252 0 Ethernet 4 Setting example 1 Setting example 2 example Setting example 2 Setting example 3 example Setting example 3 Connected device 1 Connected device 2 Connected device 3 Class B Class A Class B IP address 81044001H IP address 71044001H IP address 81052902H 129 4 64 1 113 4 64 1 129 5 41 2 188 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS Ex When the network addresses differ between the E71 on the own station and the connected device Network address IP address Class B Connected device 1 04H 40H 01H IP address Class 1 o o ololol o lololololol lololol lololololololololololo lolol1 Set the network address of the connected device 1 Network address Subnet address setting value Network address Own station E71 IP address Class B Connected device 2 71H 04H 40H 01H IP address Class A 0 1 Set the network address of the connected device 2 Network address Subnet address setting value ZL yl
265. e Check and correct the text or requested data length of the Qn 5 number of data in the character a part of text header Then send the data to the Ethernet module again The request data length after the ASCII binary Check and correct the text or requested data length of the C0584 conversion does not match with the number of data in header Then send the data to the Ethernet module again the character a part of text Incorrect designation of the command and C059 Correct the request details subcommand The Ethernet module cannot read write data from to the A Check the device for read write specified device The Ethernet module cannot read write data from to the CO5By p Check the device for read write specified device CO5C Incorrect request For example a request for data Correct the request details and send it to the Ethernet module read write in bit units has been issued to word device again For example change the subcommand C05D The monitor registration is not performed Register the monitoring data and perform monitoring Increase the CPU monitoring timer value Check that the programmable controller CPU is operating SENS normally The communication time between the Ethernet module Correct the network number or PC number 5 and the programmable controller CPU exceeded the LO MSS If the destination is a station with a different network numb
266. e as Fixed buffer No 1 Fixed buffer No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Fixed buffer No 1 45 Kowen yng S E 10157 Z G Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 98591016984 Shared area for Shared area for random access buffers and e mail buffers 26804 to 3FFFH random access 16384 to 18431 buffers and 4000p to 47FF e mail buffers System area Send receive 18432 to 20479 7792 for 4800 to predefined Send receive area for predefined protocol support function Ou protocol support function Open completion signal 0 Open incomplete 20480 1 Open completed 5000 Connection No 1 60 e Connection No 2 b1 to Connection No 16 b15 20481 Connection System area 50014 status information Open request signal area 0 No open request 20482 1 Open being requested 5002 Connection 1 60 Connection No 2 61 to Connection Connection No 16 b15 20483 and 20484 status storage 50034 and 50044 area System arga Fixed buffer reception status signal 0 Data not received 20485 Fixed buffer 1 Data being received 5005p information e Connection No 1 b0 e Connection No 2 b1 to Connection No 16 b15 Remote password status 0 Unl
267. e corrective action Then restart the E71 mounted station Restarting the E71 executes the initial process To check whether the initial process has been completed in the E71 perform the PING test The PING test can be also performed on the Loopback Test window 362 APPENDICES 2 Method using the MC protocol The loopback test can be also executed using MC protocol communications Note however that only the E71 in the own station can be used The test cannot be executed on E71 modules in other stations over the network For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual Loopback test command sending station Y QCPU E71 QCPU E71 Loopback test target station a Execution method Execute the test using the MC protocol dedicated command Loopback test 0619 Point When the user port on the E71 side is used to perform MC protocol communications the line connection process is necessary Execute the open process for the connection used for the E71 side 1591 3oeqdoo Z S xipueddy x99u2 snjejs eur G xipueddy 363 Appendix 6 Self Diagnostic Tests This section describes the self diagnostic tests to check data communications and hardware of an E71 Appendix 6 1 sSeif loopback test Hardware including the E71 communication circuit is checked Send the test message destined to the own station of the E71 to the line Then check whether the same
268. e device number which is specified in the Element Setting window 1 is considered as the data storage area The data storage area to be occupied varies depending on the setting of Unit of Stored Data When Lower Byte Upper Byte is selected the same size as the data length one word length for the data length storage area are occupied However when the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the last device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of 00 When Lower Bytes Only is selected twice size of the data length one word length for the data length storage area are occupied Word Specified device 0 Data length storage area 1 Send Data storage area packet R Send packet The user stores the send data Receive packet The E71 stores the receive data Data storage area Data storage area ds f The unit of the data length is fixed to byte Point Multiple Non conversion Variable elements can be placed in a packet When Fixed Length Variable Length is Variable Length and the configuration is set as follows an error occurs An element other than Static Data is placed behind a Non conversion Variable element when Non conversion Variable is out of the Length calculating range or w
269. e main base unit of the system B CPU module Perform the remote STOP to the system A CPU module continuation error occurs in Perform the remote STOP to the system B CPU module the standby system CPU module Write the file to the system A CPU module Write the file to the system B CPU module Perform the remote RUN to the system A CPU module Perform the remote RUN to the system B CPU module Log out from the E71 mounted on the main base unit of the system A CPU module Log out from the E71 mounted on the main base unit of the system B CPU module Clear the error in the standby system CPU module 2 1 After writing the parameter reset both CPU modules 2 When the operating status of the control system CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN check the error status of the standby system CPU module If an error has occurred set the error code 60104 to 5050 then turn on SM50 to clear the error 10 Using dedicated instructions If system switching occurs during execution of the dedicated instruction the dedicated instruction may not be completed Execute the dedicated instruction again from the new control system CPU module after system switching 224 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 7 Alive Check Function When the E71 has not communicated with the connected device for a certain period of time while the connection is open this function checks whether the connected device is alive by sending an ali
270. e number of abnormal ends of the dedicated instruction MSEND is stored 0 The MSEND instruction has not been executed or no executions have resulted in abnormal end 1 or more The cumulative number of abnormal ends of the MSEND instruction Number of mails normally completed 5B3By The cumulative number of sent e mails forwarded by the E71 to the send mail server is stored 0 No mail has been sent 1 or more The number of normal completions of mail sending Attached file sending count 5B3Cy The cumulative number of e mails with an attachment sent by the E71 is stored 0 No e mail with an attachment has been sent 1 or more The number of normal sending of e mails with an attachment Sending to the server count Number of mails abnormally completed 5B3Dy 5B3Ey The cumulative number of e mails sent by the E71 to the send mail server is stored 0 No e mail has been sent to the server 1 or more The cumulative number of sending e mails to the server The cumulative number of communication errors returned in response to send requests to the send mail server is stored 0 No communication error between servers or no e mail sent 1 or more The cumulative number of communication errors Error log write count Sending error log write pointer 5B3Fy 5840 The cumulative number of registrations in the send error log block area is stored 0 No error or no inquiry
271. e number of resends is incorrect Correct the number of resends COD2 The arrival monitoring time is incorrect Correct the arrival monitoring time Check the specified value for the communication destination The number of relay stations in CC Link IE Controller Correct the settings in the Station lt gt IP information for the Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H e stations between the own station and the communication and MELSECNET 10 exceeded the allowable range EUM destination f Check the specified value for the communication destination The number of relay stations in CC Link IE Controller Correct the settings in the Station No IP information for the 4 Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H stations between the own station and the communication and MELSECNET 10 exceeded the allowable range Dude destination COD5 The number of retries is incorrect Correct the number of retries M Correct the settings for the communication destination The network number or station number is incorrect gt TEM Correct the specified value for the communication destination Set the parameters with the programming tool and write them to the CPU module Then perform communications with the COD7 Data were sent without the initial process completed connected device Wait for normal completion of the ini
272. e password check has not been set the communication request is accepted and the E71 can communicate with the connected devices 2 Selecting a connection for which the remote password check is performed A connection for which an entered remote password is checked can be selected using a parameter 7 Page 201 Section 14 3 6 194 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Stations that can be accessed when the remote password check is performed When the CPU module is protected with a remote password the stations accessible by the connected device and the QCPU stations that can perform the remote password unlock lock processes are limited to those in the same network The following shows an example of accessible stations Ex When remote password has been set in the QCPU on the station 1 1 and the remote password check has been set in 1 on the station 1 1 Station 1 2 1 Station A Network No 1 Ethernet Station 3 2 1 Remote Remote password password 7777 check QCPU E71 71 E71 Programming tool Ethernet Network No 2 Network No 3 Ethernet Q MEN Station 2 1 1 Station 2 2 1 2 Station 3 1 1 QCPU E71 QCPU E71 E71 QCPU E71 CEU TEE ES Station C Station D w 2 1 The station is the only connected device that can perform an unlock lock process for 1 of the station 1 1
273. e request could not be received Check and correct the response waiting time 4 A request or subrequest is incorrect Correct the request and subrequest 5 The specified target station or clear target is incorrect Correct the specified target station or clear target Specify the connection number within the range of 1 to 16 C1A6 The specified connection number is incorrect Do not select the connection number 8 or 16 when using the pairing open method C1A7 The specified network number is incorrect Correct the specified network number 8 The specified station number is incorrect Correct the specified station number C1A9 The specified device number is incorrect Correct the specified device number The specified device name is incorrect Correct the specified device name C1ACy The specified number of resends is incorrect Correct the number of resends The specified data length is incorrect Correct the specified data length Correct the specified send receive data length and header length 1 The send receive data length and header length are to values within the allowable ranges incorrect The send receive data length needs to be equal to or longer than the header length The specified port number is incorrect Correct the specified port number The open process of the specified connection has been 1 Perform the close process
274. e size of the message sent by the E71 is 536 bytes or less e n 2 when the size of the message sent by the E71 is greater than 536 bytes and no more than 1072 bytes n 3 when the size of the message sent by the E71 is greater than 1072 bytes and no more than 1608 bytes 346 APPENDICES When a communication failure occurs due to a problem such as noise change the value so that the number of retries may increase The number of retries is obtained using the following formula When using the default values 2 60 20 1 Number of TCP ULP timer value 4 resend timer value Ex When the number of retries is two and data sending fails a data sending error occurs at the timing shown in the figure below in communications using the fixed buffer BUFSND instruction BUFSND instruction Completion device 1 1 Data 1st retry command 2nd retry i A 1 1 lt RR ERRARE TCP ULP timeout value A TCP resend timer value The time at which data are sent when ACK is not returned after data transmission When not performing the above retry process set 0 times configure the setting so that the following formula is met sseooJg eniu p xipueddy TCP ULP _ TCP end _ TCP resend timer value timer value timer value Set the same value for the timer values sseooJd jenu y Bunjes
275. e the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module COE1 An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module COE2 An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Repla
276. e the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design
277. e write request from the connected device and returns the writing result to the connected device that sent the write request The E71 side response sending Asynchronously with the processes and above the data written in the random access buffer is read using the FROM instruction 173 13 3 Parameter Setting Set the following parameters to perform communications using a random access buffer Basic setting gt 80 Section 7 1 2 Ethernet operation setting 7 Page 81 Section 7 1 3 Open setting 7 7 Page 83 Section 7 1 4 Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 a oe ri l x El I x xi ____ ___ e eie 4 lee e e KEENER Fixed Buffer Communication Select communication method for communications using a fixed buffer e Procedure Exist Procedure Select Procedure Exist for communications using a random access buffer 174 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER 1 3 4 Data Format Communication data consists of a header and application data 13 4 1 Header The header for TCP IP or UDP IP is used Because an E71 automatically adds and deletes a header the user setting
278. eceive process is not performed Fixed buffer reception status signal does not turn on b Receive process in an interrupt program When the control system is switched to the standby system by system switching before execution of an interrupt program the interrupt factor is held When the system is switched again and the standby system is switched to the control system the interrupt program is executed by the held interrupt factor The interrupt factor is not transferred to the other system 218 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS c When data is sent from the connected device When using the Procedure exist method If a response timeout to the E71 occurs change the connection destination to the other system and send the data When using the No procedure method Send the same data to both the control system and standby system The following shows an example of the sending procedure for sending data to a redundant system using the Procedure exist method Fixed buffer communication procedure Procedure exist Data is sent to the system A Did a timeout occur A response is received from the system A Data is sent to the system B Did a timeout occur A response from the system B is received An error has occurred uonouny uiejsAs Point Take care of the following when performing a resend process at system switching Wh
279. eceiving using the Web function The system administrator can monitor a CPU module in a remote location via the Internet using a commercially available Web browser For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function HTTP MC mn B header mn message ae HTTP MC protocol HTTP response message header lead E71 AEA Web server Connected device Web browser Display of Communication library requests results 2 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES This chapter describes the E71 parts QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 RUN ERR RUN ERR RUN ERR 1 INIT COM ERR 1 INIT COM ERR 1 INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M OPEN OPEN SD RD SD RD SD RD 10BASE T 100BASE TX 10 5 2 gt 2 S OOOOOOOO 4 o noA 5 1 12 20 EXT POWER QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 100 QU71E71 B5 6 gt 6 gt 6 gt Application 1 LED indicator Refer to 1 in this chapter 2 10BASE T 100BASE TX connector A connector to connect the E71 to the 10BASE T or 100BASE TX networ
280. ection No 1 Fixed buffer to receive data ub Port Connected device Receive data Connection No 2 Fixed buffer to send data Point Connected devices where communications can be performed using the pairing open method are those in Ethernet where an E71 is connected and those connected using the router relay function The open close processes in the receive connection where the pairing open has been enabled automatically perform the open close processes in the next connection send connection 155 7 Z uedo 2 12 7 2 Parameter setting The following is the pairing open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 BEE _ 4 re E E gt a E E B El gt le Lele fe fe e fe ele Lele fe fe fe fe Lede dele dele fe Lele le fe Le oe Set Pairing Open of the receive connection to Enable The next connection is Pairing Open automatically set as send connection 1 When Enable has been set in Pairing Open for a send connection the following window appears MELSOFT Series GX Works2 When Yes is selected the applicable connection becomes a receive connection and the next connection is automatically set as a send connection When Enable
281. ecute the BUFRCVS instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer number 2 SADYANG ue ezed When the receive data length and the receive data are completely read out a response is sent to the destination End the interrupt program to restart the main program 1 If the data receive process is abnormally ended the E71 does not return a response 143 2 The following is the receive process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial Open process process Receiving data Initial normal completion 1 signal X19 Open completion signal o address 5000 b1 BUFRCVS instruction In interrupt process ACK TCP only Cycle Cycle gt Scan j QD Scan Interrupt process Scan Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Receive data from the destination Request the CPU module to start up the interrupt program The interrupt program starts up Execute the BUFRCVS instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer number 1 End the interrupt p
282. ecuted from another module Then 184 Remote error The remote STOP PAUSE has been already cancel the operation to perform executed from another module au communications again MES Correct the specified device 1Fy Device error Invalid device specification Do not access a device which does not exist Check if the CPU module of the station number 20 The CPU module of the request destination has PC number has been disconnected i been disconnected from the data link Then remove the cause of the disconnection to perform communications again Memory access to the intelligent function module cannot be performed due to the There is a hardware problem with the CPU 21 Intelligent function following causes module base unit intelligent function module H module bus error The control bus to the intelligent function module is faulty The intelligent function module is in failure or the E71 Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 303 1511 10143 9 94 awed 3L ue suoneoiunuiuioo Buunp sepoo jewuouqy 2 99 16 6 3 Error codes stored in the buffer memory The following table lists the error codes stored in each buffer memory area when an error occurs For the buffer memory areas where these error codes are stored refer to the descriptions of the corresponding buffer memory area gt Page 290 Secti
283. ed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Start the open process using the OPEN instruction Open request signal address 50024 b0 ON The E71 performs the open process The E71 sends an open request SYN to the connected device When the open process is normally completed data communications are enabled Start a close process using the CLOSE instruction Open request signal OFF The E71 performs the close process The E71 sends a close request FIN to the connected device When the close process is normally completed data communications terminate 2 1 If the E71 sends an SYN and the connected device returns a RST Open abnormal completion X18 turns on immediately and the open process terminates Open abnormal end 2 If an ACK and a FIN are not returned within the time specified by the TCP end timer value the E71 forcibly closes the connection sends a RST Close abnormal end CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 7 2 4 Passive open procedure The E71 has the following two connection methods for Passive open Unpassive Performs a passive open process on connections for all devices connected to the network regardless of the IP address and port number of the destination device Fullpassive Performs a passive open process on connections for the connected device specified by the IP address and port number Under the Passive open method the open close processes are performed using the procedures described bel
284. ed device to the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module to access the control system CPU module When the system is switched the connected device automatically continues access to the control system through the tracking cable However if the communication line with the connection destination is faulty or the standby system is powered off for example the destination must be changed on the connected device Ex For access to the system that is not the connection destination example of connection to the control system and access to the standby system CPU module Connected device QnA compatible 3E frame Request destination module I O number 03D1H Network number 00H Access to the standby system Personal computer number FFH Even if an error occurs in the communication line it is possible to access the standby system Calls Cese 216 3 To access the standby system CPU module the connected device connects to the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module through the tracking cable This enables access even if the communication line between the connected device and standby system becomes faulty CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS b Communication procedure example for access to the control system
285. edure communications using a fixed buffer are performed The remote password check is not performed for such connections Access to the programmable controller on another station When the connected device accesses the programmable controller on another station through the E71 it may fail to access the remote password protected CPU modules on the relay station or the station to be accessed For UDP IP communications a Connected device for data communications Do not perform data communications with unspecified connected device Set the destination device b Alive check function Use the alive check function of the 71 1 Also when terminating data communications perform the remote password lock process If the process is not performed data communications from other devices are enabled until a timeout occurs by the alive check function of the E71 For this reason when setting a connection with the connected device using a programming tool set the parameters as follows When configuring the initial setting set the start interval timer value and the interval timer value for the alive check function as small as possible When configuring the open setting select Confirm under Existence Confirmation 1 The alive check is automatically performed when the connection for data communications through the auto open UDP port is set as the target for the remote password check 6 Communications from the programming tool in the Ethern
286. ef struct sck inf struct in_addr my unsigned short my port struct in addr aj addr unsigned short aj port sck_inf To the next page 392 int nErrorStatus int Dmykeyin int Closeflag int socketno int main WORD wVersionRequested MAKEWORD 1 1 WSADATA wsaData int length unsigned char s_buf BUF_SIZE unsigned char buf BUF SIZE int rouf_idx int recv size struct sck inf sc struct in hostdata struct sockaddr aj71e71 void Sockerror int unsigned long ulCmdArg sc my addr s addr htonl INADDR ANY sc my_port htons 0 sc aj_addr s_addr inet_addr 192 0 1 253 sc aj_port htons 0x2000 Closeflag FLAG_OFF APPENDICES 1 Error information storage variable 1 Dummy key input 1 Connection completion flag Winsock Ver 1 1 request 1 Communication data length Send buffer 1 Receive buffer 1 Receive data storage head index Number of receive data External device side data E71 side data Error handling function 1 Non blocking mode setting flag 1 External device side IP address 1 External device side port number 1 E71 side IP address C00001FDH 1 E71 side port number 1 Connection completion flag off nErrorStatus WSAStartup wVersionRequested amp wsaData Winsock Initial processing if nErrorStatus SOCK_OK Sockerror ERROR_INITIAL return SOCK_NG Error handling printf Winsock Version is ld ld n HIBYTE w
287. efore executing the ECPRTCL instruction Execute the ECPRTCL instruction after rewriting the protocol setting data to the Ethernet module If an error still occurs even after rewriting replace the module C401 C402 Protocol unregistered error Protocol setting data error Correct the specified protocol number and execute the protocol again Register the corresponding protocol to the specified protocol number Correct the protocol setting data and register it again C403 Simultaneous dedicated instructions execution error Do not execute dedicated instructions which do not support simultaneous execution Correct the specified connection number and execute the dedicated instruction again C404 Protocol cancel request error Check the canceled protocol in the control data of the ECPRTCL instruction execution count result and eliminate the cause of the cancellation C405 Protocol number setting error Correct the specified protocol number and execute the protocol again C406 Continuous protocol execution count setting error Correct the number of protocols to be executed continuously and execute the protocol again C407 Connection number setting error Correct the specified connection number and execute the protocol again Correct the connection setting of the specified connection number and execute the protocol again C410 C411 Recei
288. ely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point If the module is not installed properly it may cause the module to malfunction fail or fall off Secure the module with screws especially when it is used in an environment where constant vibrations may occur Be sure to tighten the screws using the specified torque If the screws loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause product damage Do not directly touch any conductive part or electronic component of the module This may cause the module to malfunction or fail Connectors for external devices and coaxial cables must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer or must be correctly soldered Incomplete connections may cause short circuit fire or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before connecting the AUI cable Securely connect the connector to the module Poor contact may cause malfunction Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Tighten the terminal screws using the specified tor
289. en an E71 stores the received data in the corresponding fixed buffer in the receive process it updates the IP address and destination port number of the connected device in Connection information area addresses 78 to C74 and 5820 to 586F corresponding to the fixed buffer number n If data is received from a connected device not set in the connection information area of the buffer memory an E71 ignores the received data 1 In case of the TCP IP Unpassive open data is sent to or received from a connected device stored in the connection information area of the buffer memory Point When received data is stored in the corresponding fixed buffer in the receive process of broadcast communications an E71 updates the destination IP address and port number in Connection information area address 784 to C7 and 58201 to 586 corresponding to the fixed buffer number n 137 eJnonjjs uoneoiunuulo2 ZZ 12 3 Sending Procedure This section describes how an E71 sends data to the connected device 1 Procedure exists The following is the data send process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial process Open process Sending data Receiving a response signal X19 Open completion signal 666550 address 5000 60 Initial normal completion o BUFSND instruction BUFSND instruction completion device BUFSND instruction com
290. en performing communications while synchronizing sending and receiving system switching may occur during the communications and the system may be switched with the sending and receiving not synchronized To perform system switching restart communications after initializing the synchronization for safety After executing the WRITE instruction execute it again because it is difficult to determine that the instruction has been completed However note that the same instruction may be executed twice 5 juepunpai e suoneoiunuiuioo eed 5 Communicating using a random access buffer The buffer memory of the E71 is not tracked Therefore when writing data to the random access buffer write the same data to the control system and standby system 219 6 Using the e mail function a Receiving e mails After the E71 receives an e mail send a response mail to the mail sending source so that the mail sending source may recognize the arrival of the e mail If the receiving cannot be recognized send the e mail again After the MRECV instruction is executed the read e mail is deleted from the mail server Therefore when system switching occurs during execution of the MRECV instruction the mail may not be received by the new control system CPU module after system switching even if the MRECV instruction is re executed The e mail has been deleted from the mail server b E mail receiving program In the following pr
291. en the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the eighth protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 8 0 is stored 0 1 to 16 System 241 J9lHdOdd9 19 242 3 Functions The module specified by Un executes the protocol setting data written to the flash ROM The protocol is executed according to the control data of the device specified by S and the following devices The connection specified by n1 is used instruction Protocols are executed consecutively for the number of times specified by n2 up to eight protocols by one When two or more ECPRTCL instructions are executed simultaneously for the same connection the following instruction will be ignored until the first instruction is completed The number of protocols is stored in S 0 Protocol execution status can be checked in the predefined protocol support function execution status check area address 54 to 55FF The communication type of the protocol executed and fixed buffer setting of the connection No specified by n1 must be matched The following table lists the combination of the communication type and the connection No that can be specified by n1 Communication type Connection No that can be specified by n1 When the communication type of all protocols executed up to eight protocols is Send Only A con
292. ent function module cannot be used The program must be modified using the I O signals of the intelligent function module corresponding to the buffer memory For use with safety CPUs refer to the following 1 QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 252 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 9 ZP BUFRCV This instruction reads data received from the connected device through communications using a fixed buffer used in the main program Command zppurRCV 1 Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent 12 Index Constant Setting data system user File JEN function module register Others register device Zn RE Bit Word Bit Word uc co 51 82 D1 D2 3 1 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later Universal model QCPU or safety CPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted 2 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Un U Start I O number of the E71 00 to FE The first two digits Character string BIN n Un of the three digit I O number User 16 bit 51 Connection number 1 to 16 BIN 16 bit S2 Start number of the device that stores control data Device
293. er CPU monitoring timer value correct the routing parameter setting If the destination is a station with a different network number check if the network number is not in use This request cannot be executed to the target Correct the network number or PC number H programmable controller Correct the read write request details C060 Incorrect request For example incorrect data was Correct the request details and send it to the Ethernet module B specified for bit devices again For example correct the data C064 The request data length does not match with the Check and correct the text or requested data length of the Qn M number of data in the character a part of text header Then send the data to the Ethernet module again When writing was prohibited while the CPU was To write data to the remote I O station using the MC protocol with running data has been written to the remote I O station C0624 A a QnA compatible 3E frame or 4E frame select Enable Write at using the MC protocol with a QnA compatible 3E frame RUN time in the Ethernet operation setting or 4E frame Read write data without the device memory set for extension C070 The device memory cannot be extended for the target Device memory can be extended only in an Ethernet station module connected station and Q QnACPU CC Link IE Controller Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 C074 The number o
294. er memory configuration 1 Buffer memory address configuration A buffer memory area consists of 16 bits per address peo s e os s ee ovo o 2 Buffer memory area configuration Buffer memory consists of user areas and system areas a User areas A user area is an area where a user writes or reads data A user area consists of a parameter area for the initial process and data communications an area for data communications and an area to store communication status and communication error data Data communications may take long if user areas are used continually therefore use them only when needed b System areas A system area is an area used by a system Point Do not write any data to the system area Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system 34 3 5 2 List of buffer memory addresses The following table lists the buffer memory addresses of an E71 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability oe tation E71 IP add C00001FE and 1p wn station address H 2 3 24 and 3 ystem area Special function settings Router relay function b5 b4 00 Do not use default 01 Use Conversion system setting for CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field
295. er protocol setting data has been registered is shown by on off status of the corresponding bit When the check results include any error 0 is stored in all bits Registration status of Registration status of protocol No 16 protocol No 1 b15 b14 b13 to b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 5330 to 5331 to 0 OFF Not registered 1 ON Registered 5330 to Protocol registration 533Fy 5337H to L Registration status of Registration status of J protocol No 128 protocol No 113 gt 5338 to Unused reserved 533FH to 1 When the setting value gets Unidentified 65535 the following causes are possible When settings undetectable with the E71 used are written When the protocol setting data is broken hardware failure 294 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 7 Predefined protocol support function execution status check area address 54C0 to 55 The following table lists the details of the predefined protocol support function execution status check area The buffer memory addresses are those of Connection No 1 For the addresses of the Connection No 2 and later refer to the list of buffer memory addresses gt 35 Section 3 5 2 Buffer memory name Address Description The status of protocols being executed in Connection No 1 is stored 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission Protocol execution status 54 0 2 Sending 3 Waiting for d
296. er specified in the application data CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER Depending on the restrictions of the buffers of the own station and destination station data may be divided for communications Data received separately is restored reassembled by the E71 for communications The received data is restored reassembled based on the data length in the communication data The E71 performs the following processes if data in the communication data is incorrect Communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method or communications using a random access buffer If the data length specified immediately after the subheader is smaller than the amount of text data received 1 The data immediately after the text data equivalent to the data length specified immediately after the subheader is regarded as the next message 2 Because the header of each message is a subheader an E71 processes data according to the code in the subheader 3 If the subheader contains a code that is not recognized by an E71 the E71 sends a response notifying about an abnormal end to the connected device Data sent from the connected device Data processed by the E71 1st data 2nd data m a a 78 _____ This section is processed as a subheader In the figure above the E71 returns a response containing a code obtained by changing the most significant bit of the code processed as a subhead
297. er to 1 For example if the subheader of a command is 654 the subheader of the response is 5 If the data length specified immediately after the subheader is larger than the amount of text data received 1 The E71 waits for the remaining data 2 When the remaining data is received within the response monitoring timer value the E71 processes data according to the code in the subheader 3 If the remaining data could not be received within the response monitoring timer value the E71 performs the following processes Sends the ABORT RST instruction to the connected device and closes the line Notifies the CPU module that an open error has occurred by turning on Open abnormal detection signal X18 Stores the error code in the open error code storage area The error code is not stored in the error log storage area Communications using a fixed buffer in the No Procedure control method Because no message data length is specified in No Procedure communications the data received is stored in the receive buffer area as is It is recommended to set a checking method For example include data length and a data type code in the application data of a message so that the number of bytes and data type of the application data can be identified on the receiving side 153 z 9 z jeuuoJ ejeq 9 ZL 2 154 In the application data for communications in the Procedure
298. erformed using I O signals To perform the processes set Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time under Initial timing in the Ethernet operation setting or use dedicated instructions OPEN CLOSE instructions 215 5 juepunpei e suoneoiunuiuioo uonouny uiejsAs 9 3 Using protocol communications The QnA compatible 3E frame or 4E frame can be used to access the control system standby system or system A system a Operation performed for access to the control system standby system or the system Alsystem B Ex When the system is switched example of access to the control system CPU module Connected device F QnA compatible 3E frame Request destination module I O number 03D0H Network number 00H Personal computer number FFH Control system system A Access to the control system is continued QnA compatible 3E frame Request destination module I O number 03D0H via a tracking cable Network number 00H Personal computer number FFH S Control system system B 1 Connect the connect
299. ernet v2 0 Binary Code Bumes Z G LL ejduex3 IP Address 192 1 __101 C 2 3 Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting Use the KeepAlive C Use the Ping e c 129 Open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 DEDDDEDEDDEDEDUU DDEDDDEDEDDEEDDUDU 5 DBOBDDDDEEDDOEEDDUU DEDDDDEEDDEEDDUU 130 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 11 5 3 Program example The following is a program example that specifies Connection No 1 and executes a protocol by using the ECPRTCL instruction 1 Sample program a Sending side QCPU 1 side Open process program SM400 UO G20480 020482 4 20 M1000 PLS M1001 7 M1001 X19 MO M20 J ME ME Move D100 ZP OPEN 00 K1 D100 M100 M100 M101 1 ME SET M150 M101 SET M151 ejduexe suoneoiunuluo 131 Program for predefined protocol communications M3000 x19 MO X1D PLS M3001 M3001 INC Mov HO D1 D2 Mov H3FF D3 Mov H10 D4 M
300. error response C1324 Check the status of the SMTP server was received Local error The SMTP server is in process and an error response C1334 m Check the status of the SMTP server was received Insufficient memory area Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C1344 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 321 157 JOA 9 94 JONG eui ui peJojs sepoo JON 9 9 Error description Action code Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 135 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit
301. errupt program BUFRCVS instruction A receive process in an interrupt program is performed using the BUFRCVS instruction An interrupt program is started up when data is received from a connected device and receive data for a CPU module can be read The following settings are required to use an interrupt program gt 146 Section 12 5 1 Interrupt pointer setting Interrupt settings 1 Procedure exists The following is the receive process performed in the fixed buffer number 2 area for the connection number 2 Initial Open process process Receiving data Sending a response Initial normal completion jo signal X19 Open completion signal address 5000 b1 BUFROVS instruction In interrupt process S 2 only 8 z 8 lt 5 5 Q Cycle Cycle 3 e E 2 Program Scan prosess Scan 3 Interrupt process Scan provess 5 Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 2 Receive data from the destination Fixed buffer reception status signal address 50055 b1 Request the CPU module to start up the interrupt program The interrupt program starts up Ex
302. ersal or later model QCPU version D or 275 Module error collection function x x with function x later of Version Bior Section 16 3 15042 later of 11043 1 The operations of the E71 has been changed for the case where an Active open request from the connected device is received again during open completion status in TCP IP 343 peAoudui pue xipueddy Appendix 4 Initial Process The initial process is for enabling data communications with connected devices by setting the minimum number of parameters for the E71 For the Q Series a program for the initial process is not required because the initial process is automatically performed 1 Checking the initial process result The results of the initial process can be checked using the LEDs and signals initial process INIT LED Initial normal completion Initial abnormal signal X19 completion signal X1A At normal completion ON ON OFF At abnormal end OFF OFF ON If the initial process is not normally completed correct the set values of parameters listed in Chapter 7 and those in the initial process setting parameter described in this chapter After correcting the parameters write them to the CPU module again power off and on the CPU module or reset the CPU module Appendix 4 1 Setting the initial process Configure the setting in the initial setting window Each setting ti
303. erty End Region To the next page 415 EOL xipueddy pesn S LAN OPIS y uo ejdures xipueddy 416 Private Sub Command1 Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles 1 Connect to the Ethernet interfece module Dim sock As New Sockets Socket Sockets AddressFamily InterNetwork _ Sockets SocketType Stream Sockets ProtocolType Tcp Ajsock sock Dim ip As IPAddress Dns Resolve 192 0 1 253 AddressList 0 Dim ipend As IPEndPoint New IPEndPoint ip 8192 Me Ajsock Connect ipend MsgBox Connection Completed State Me Ajsock Connected End Sub Private Sub Command2 Click ByVal eventSender As System Object ByVal eventArgs As System EventArgs Handles Command2 Click Dim SData As Byte Dim RData 256 As Byte Rend DO to 04 5 points with the A compatible 1E frame command SData Encoding ASCII GetBytes 01FF000A4420000000000500 Read DO to 04 5 points with the QnA compatible 3E frame command SData Encoding ASCII GetBytes 500000FFOS3FF000018000A04010000D 0000000005 Send the data Me Ajsock Send SData MsgBox Send completion MsgBoxStyle Information Read the response from the PLC CPU Me Ajsock Receive RData MsgBox Encoding ASCII GetString RData MsgBoxStyle Information End Sub To the next page APPEND
304. es can Page 99 MC protocol communications be also performed CHAPTER 9 The connected device can read write data from to the buffer memory or device of an Communications using SLMP SLMP supporting device connected to the shared network with the E71 In addition Page 103 only QJ71E71 100 the connected device can read write data from to the device of the CPU module CHAPTER 10 where an E71 is mounted Data communications using the Data can be sent received with protocols appropriate to each connected device Bade predefined protocol The connected device side protocol can be easily selected or created edited from 11 only QJ71E71 100 the Predefined Protocol Library of GX Works2 Procedure exists Any data is sent received between a CPU module and connected devices using the Page 135 fixed buffer of an E71 CHAPTER 12 No procedure Communications Paring receiving sending connections enables data communications with two Page 155 using a fixed Pairing open i buffer connections by performing the open process for one port Section 12 7 Broadcast communications are enabled with all E71 mounted stations in the same Broadcast 157 Ethernet network that is connected to the E71 when No Procedure communications ware Section 12 8 communications using a fixed buffer are performed using UDP IP Communications using a random Data is read written from multiple connected devices to the random access buffer
305. ess is incorrect Correct the IP address Set the class to A B C The setting value of the subnet mask field for the Correct the subnet mask router relay function is incorrect Some of the various timer setting values for the initial C0024 Check and correct each timer setting value for the initial process process are outside the allowable range The setting value of the auto open UDP port number for C003 Check and correct auto open UDP port number the initial process is outside the allowable range C0044 The setting value of the subnet mask field is incorrect Correct the subnet mask and perform the initial process again 304 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Error description Action code The setting value of the default router IP address for the router relay function is incorrect Correct the default router IP address and perform the initial C005 The network address network address after the process again subnet mask of default router IP address is Set the same network address as that of the IP address of the different from that of the IP address of the Ethernet Ethernet module in the own station module in the own station The setting value of the subnet address for the router FEM 1 C0064 Correct the subnet address and perform the initial process again relay function is incorrect The setting value of the router IP address for
306. ested module VO No D27 D27l Fixed Length 2Byte LowerlUpper Byte No Swap 13 Static Data Forfutureexpansion o 14 Static Data Commana O0tM4QBde o 15 StaicData Subcommand 0000QBve __________________ 128 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 2 Receiving side QCPU 2 side The following is an example of the parameter settings of the receiving side QCPU 2 side a Basic setting The following is an example of the basic setting a Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Set network configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window Ethernet Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set iFitisneeded No Setting Already Set Start No Valid Module During Other Station Access 1 j Interink Transmission Parameters pease input 16 pont unk HEX to start T O No in which module i Routing Parameters Assignment Image Group Setting Check End um Print Window Print Window P b Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting r Communication Data Code r Initial Timing Do not wait OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time ASCII Code Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Address Setting Send Frame Setting Input Format pec Eth
307. estination during communications using a fixed buffer in the connection with the connected device are stored A sending error code is cleared when the next data sending is completed normally Connection end code address 7E to C3 58261 to 58681 The codes returned in the responses from the destination during communications using a fixed buffer in the connection with the connected device are stored in binary Process the end codes in the responses according to the destination 291 157 JOA 9 94 5 Error log area address E04 to The following table lists the details of the error log area The buffer memory addresses of the error log block are those of the error log block 1 For the addresses of the error log block 2 and later refer to the list of buffer memory addresses Page 35 Section 3 5 2 Buffer memory name Address Description The number of errors registered in the error log block area is stored When the number of Number of errors errors reaches 65536 the count stops at 65535 The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered is stored 0 No error no registration of error log 1 or more The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered Error log write pointer E44 If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error log is registered in the error log block 16
308. et connection For communications from a programming tool in the Ethernet connection using TCP IP communications is recommended 199 suonneoSJd G vi PJOMSSE 9jouloH pr 7 When the unlock process or lock process fails If the remote password unlock lock process fails check the remote password of the CPU module then perform the unlock lock process again a E71 operation in case of a process failure If the number of process failures exceeds the notification accumulated count set in the buffer memory area the E71 performs the following operations The E71 turns on the COM ERR LED The E71 stores C200 in the error code and end code storage area in the buffer memory area Error log area address 227 to 372 1744 1 This is the number of times stored in Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation address 20592 5070 and 20593 5071 by the CPU module using an instruction such as the TO instruction when the E71 starts up In the above case identify the connection where the unlock lock process has failed using the buffer memory areas Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal end address 20595 50734 and Accumulated count of lock process abnormal end address 20597 5075 b Corrective action against a process failure Take the following actions if required Close the connection with the connected device Write 0 in the buffer memory areas A
309. ets The following shows an example of packet configuration For details on the packet elements refer to Page 377 Appendix 8 3 a TCP IP Maximum data length 1514 bytes gt Destination Sender s MAC MAC address address Li Data 2 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes 6 bytes 6 bytes Ethernet header TCP IP header T 40 to 1500 bytes b UDP IP Maximum data length 1514 bytes Destination Sender s MAC address MAC address dd m ioc Data 6 bytes 6 bytes Ethernet header UDP IP header 28 to 1500 bytes Communications with the connected device using the predefined protocol function are performed with the following procedure communication types For the operations of each communication type refer to Page 370 Appendix 8 1 Communication type name Description Send Only Sends a send packet once Receive Only Receives a packet if it matches any of up to 16 defined receive packets Sends a send packet then receives a packet if it matches any of up to 16 Send amp Receive defined receive packets 113 ed LL 11 3 Packet Elements A packet consists of packet elements Up to 32 elements can be placed in a packet and the maximum data length is 2046 bytes per packet The following shows the details of the packet elements For
310. etting c Reinitialization process request Do not request another reinitialization process while a reinitialization process is in progress 353 sseooJg eniu p xipueddy sseooJd uogezijeniuies Zp xipueddy Appendix D Line Status Check The E71 line status parameter settings and progress of the initial process can be checked The following two methods can be used to check the line status PING test Loopback test Appendix 5 1 PING test This section describes the PING test 1 Method using direct connection to the E71 This test is to check the existence of an E71 that has completed the initial process on the same Ethernet network using the programming tool or to check the existence of a connected device such as a personal computer having a specified IP address Programming tool Executing the PING test Specifying the IP address Ethernet E71 1 This also applies to QnA A series modules However for an AJ71E71 AJ71E71 B2 and AJ71E71 B5 software versions S and later are required a Applications The line status between the programming tool personal computer and the E71 can be checked Point When the connected device subjected to the PING test is an E71 do not specify the MELSOFT application transmission port UDP IP as a valid port for the remote password check The PING test cannot be execute
311. etting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 22640 wmm n i 58706 umber of mails remaining on the server H 22641 Dedicated instruction normal completion T E 58714 count H nin Dedicated instructi b end t 0 x 58724 edicated instruction abnormal end coun H 22643 s 58734 ormal receiving count T ia Attached fil ivi t 0 x 58744 ached file receiving coun 22645 T x 58754 erver inquiry coun 22646 21 erver communication error coun H 58761 E mail status 22647 storage area 58774 Error log write count x 22648 Me gt 58784 eceiving error log write pointer H 22649 58796 H 22650 ar 587A4 ommand code E 22651 to 22658 Error log From x 587By to 58828 block 1 22659 to 22662 ET 5883 to 58868 ate H 22663 to 22692 Subject 5887 to 54 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Hexadecimal Application Initial value Programming Name Hexadecimal tool setting Decimal applicability 22693 to 22736 58 to 58001 22737 to 22780 B8D1 to 58FCp 22781 to 22824 58FD to 59281 22825 to 22868 5929 to 5954 22869 to 22912 59551 to 59804 22913 to 22956 59814 to 59ACp 22957 to 23000 to 5908 23001 to 23044 59095 to 4 I 23045 to 23088 BA05 to 5A
312. etting lt gt Page 80 Section 7 1 2 Ethernet operation setting 7 Page 81 Section 7 1 3 Open setting 7 gt Page 83 Section 7 1 4 Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 lue l ___ ___ mz El ___ El El ___ __ ___ Fixed Buffer Communication Ex EN 4 4 Select the communication method for communications using a fixed buffer For SLMP communications select Procedure Exist send Procedure Exist Disable gt No Confirm _ 2000 ____2000 m Procedure Exist 105 Bumes 10 5 Available command list The following table lists the commands that can be executed from a connected device to the E71 The LI part in the Subcommand column varies depending on the specified device For details on each command refer to the following I SLMP Reference Manual Item Command Subcommand Description Type Operation oon Reads values in 1 point units from bit devices consecutive device numbers Read 0401 Reads values in 16 point units from bit devices consecutive devi
313. eturned from the connected device within the TCP ULP timer ULP timeout time Disconnection detection The cable connected to the E71 has been disconnected the QJ71E71 100 only Point In the following cases system switching is not performed even if the E71 issues a system switching request When the standby system has already been in error status due to such as power off reset operation and stop error The network module redundant group settings have been configured for the E71 and either one is operating normally 205 uonouny uiejsAs uieis s eui 5 ueijs S 206 2 Issuing a system switching request upon communication error The E71 mounted with the control system CPU module monitors communications with the connected device on each connection If the E71 detects a communication error it issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module The following table lists a communication error that triggers a system switching request Communication error Description Alive check ULP timeout After a connection is opened the existence of the connected device cannot be confirmed An ACK response is not returned from the connected device within the TCP ULP timer time a Target connection The E71 detects communication errors in the connections selected in the redundant
314. extended data f Universal register of D65536 or later and the Function model QCPU extended link register of W10000 version D or x x with function or later in MC protocol later of version B or communications 4E frame and 09042 later of 09042 QnA compatible 3E frame only Function version B or Web functi eb function later of 05051 Function Function Version 6 192 Remote password check O O version B or Version A or erson O d or later Section 14 3 later later of 02092 Function Hub connection status monitor v rin D or 202 function lator Section 14 4 342 APPENDICES Version of E71 Version of Version of GX Version of GX Function Reference QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 CPU module Developer Works2 Function IP address in use detection version D or Page 203 function later of Section 14 5 12062 MELSEC Q Setting the arrival monitoring time L Ethernet i Function of the dedicated instruction in Interface version D or 100ms increments the READ iateroi x x Module SREAD WRITE and SWRITE 42062 User s instructions only Manual Application Functi veio Du Page 103 Communications using SLMP x x O x O CHAPTER later of 10 15042 Data communications using the Page 108 9 x x CHAPTER predefined protocol later of 11 15042 Version 1 492N c Univ
315. f if send socketno char s buf length 0 SOCKET ERROR 1 Data sending Sockerror ERROR SEND 1 Error handling return SOCK printf n send data n s n s_buf To the next page 395 0 EnSIA UBYM OL xipueddy ajdwes o xipueddy epis aeui 5 lt pesn s 3N 5 Perform receiving size check and receiving processing simultaneously rbuf idx 0 recv size 0 while 1 1 Receive data storage head index initialization Initialize the number of receive data length recv socketno char amp r buf rbuf idx BUF SIZE rbuf idx 0 if length 0 Sockerror ERROR RECEIVE return SOCK NG if length SOCKET ERROR nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError if nErrorStatus WSAEWOULDBLOCK Sockerror ERROR RECEIVE return SOCK NG else continue else rbuf idx length recv size length if recv size RECV ANS 2 break buf rbuf idx O printf receive data n s n buf if shutdown socketno 2 SOCK_OK Sockerror ERROR_SHUTDOWN return SOCK_NG if closesocket socketno SOCK_OK Sockerror ERROR_CLOSE return SOCK_NG Closeflag FLAG_OFF WSACleanup To the next page 396 1 Response data receiving 1 15 connection cut off II Error handling Error handling 1 Repeat until messages are received
316. f device points for data read write set for Correct the number of device points for data read write and send modules other than a Q QnACPU is too large the data to the Ethernet module again Check whether the data can be requested to the target C072 Incorrect request For example a request for data programmable controller CPU H read write in bit units has been issued to a word device Correct the request details and send it to the Ethernet module again For example change the subcommand 309 1511 JOA 9 94 JONG eui ui peJojs sepoo 009 9 9 Error description Action code The Ethernet module cannot issue this request to the target programmable controller CPU For example the C0734 JT prog P Correct the request details number of double word access points cannot be specified for modules other than a Q QnACPU C074 This request cannot be executed to the target Correct the network number or PC number programmable controller CPU Correct the read write request details The destination IP address could not be obtained during Set the Station No IP information in the Ethernet module CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Change the conversion method for the CC Link IE Controller C080 Network MELSECNET H 10 relay 6 MS AE Network CC Link IE Network MELSECN
317. f the receive data request source YES NO Simultaneous Broadcast P NO Is Destination Port No FFFFH Is Destination Port No the same as that of the receive data request source NO YES Simultaneous Broadcast YES The application data of the received data is stored in the fixed buffer Fixed buffer reception status signal address The received data is ignored discarded 5005H turns on because it has not been sent to the own station 1 When all the bits of the area expressing the host address of the IP address of the receive data request destination are 1 proceed to YES 158 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 8 2 Parameter setting The following is the parameter setting for broadcast communications 1 When sending data The following is the parameter setting for data sending Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 IP Address Port No Input Format IP Address and Port No will be displayed by the selected format Please enter the value according to the selected number Item Description Setting range Protocol Select UDP IP NN Fixed Buffer Select Send i Fixed Buffer Communication Select No Procedure y 8 Existence Confirmation Select No Confirm S Qa Destination IP Address Set FFFFFFFF 9 3 E as m 2
318. faulty Replace the E71 and restart all the connected devices that were performing communications with the own station 1 Replace the device with one conforming to the Ethernet standard gt Page 59 CHAPTER 5 15 the cable securely connected Securely lock the cable Check the wiring Page 73 Section 6 2 15 the network parameter mode set to Online Set the network parameter mode to Online LF Page 80 Section 7 1 2 Does the communication data code ASCII or binary setting match with that of the connected device Has the initial process been completed normally 15 Initial normal completion signal X19 on If the data code settings do not match data cannot be sent or received because the connected device cannot normally decode commands 2 Set the same data code as that of the connected device in Communication Data Code of the Ethernet operation setting Page 81 Section 7 1 3 If Initial normal completion signal X19 is off perform the initial process Page 354 Appendix 5 If the initial setting of the programming tool is same as that of the initial process program delete the initial process program Was a device on the line such as an E71 connected device hub and router replaced by the one with the same IP address Restart all the devices on the When the E71 is connected to 10BASE2 are the LG and FG terminals of the power supply module grounded
319. for an error in the Ethernet module Check the operation of the connected device Correct the TCP ULP timeout value and perform the initial process again A TCP ULP timeout error has occurred in the TCP IP 9 HM Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send C0324 communication The connected device does not send an ACK response data after a certain period of time Check if the cable is disconnected Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor 306 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Error description Action code Correct the IP address of the connected device and the Ethernet address Use the default value FFFFFFFFFFFF j if the connected device has the ARP function If it does not have the function set the MAC There is no connected device with the IP address that address C0334 Check the operation of the connected device has been set Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the cable is disconnected Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor On the ARP table there is no connected device with the E ma C0344 Decrease the number of communication destinations IP address that has been set Check the operation of the connected device Correct the sett
320. fter abbreviated as E71 is an interface module on the programmable controller side for connecting a programmable controller system to the host system such as a personal computer and a workstation over Ethernet The module can collect and modify programmable controller data monitor and control CPU operating status and exchange data in TCP IP or UDP IP Internet o Provider Provider o LAT rx Another station Connected device Web server Programming tool The E71 has the following basic functions Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT Collection and modification of CPU module data from connected devices MC protocol communications Communications using SLMP Data communications using the predefined protocol predefined protocol support function Exchange of data with connected devices communications using a fixed buffer and random access buffer Prevention of unauthorized access through a remote password E mail sending receiving e mail function Data sending re
321. fter the open completion execute the close process 369 seues v vuo z 7 xipueddy SOLOS JOUIC Jo 19uJ9u 3 Z xipueddy Appendix 8 Operation Image and Data Structure of Predefined Protocol Appendix 8 1 Operation image of each communication type of 370 protocol In the predefined protocol function communications with connected devices is performed through the communication type Send Only Receive Only or Send amp Receive This section describes the operation images of each communication type 1 When the communication type is Send Only The specified packet is sent once Send data Connected E71 n Data Header E device The operation image of Send Only is as follows a When the instruction ends normally ECPRTCL instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Waiting time to send Send packet Connected device Send packet APPENDICES b When the instruction ends abnormally at TCP timeout error An error has x occurred ECPRTCL instruction The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Completion device Waiting time t TCP ULP timer gt E71 Send packet The packet cannot be sent or
322. function of GX Works2 Command sese f Available device Internal device Link direct Intelligent 12 A Index Constant Setting data system user File deviceJO O function module a gt register Others register device Zn Bit Word Bit Word unco K H n1 s n2 Bu S D 3 1 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later or Universal model QCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted 2 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used a 1 Setting data B Q 0 m Setting data Description Set by Data type Q Es Start I O number of the E71 00 to The first two digits a Un Un BIN 16 bit r of the three digit I O number BIN 16 bit n1 Connection number 1 to 16 User Device name BIN 16 bit n2 Number of consecutive protocol executions 1 to 8 Device 5 Start number of the device that stores control data User system Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that D turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 239 2 Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Stores the number of protocols which are exe
323. g 52808 Unique IP addresses 1 Same IP address for multiple stations The MAC address of the station that has been alread 21121 to 21123 IP address status D connected to the network The address is stored in the FFFFFFFFFFFF x 52814 to 5283 storage area station with the same IP address 21124 to 21126 The MAC adaress of the station with the address used for another station The address is stored in the station that FFFFFFFFFFFF x 5284 to 52864 has been already connected to the network 21127 to 21279 5287 to 531 50 Use prohibited System area CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 21280 to 21283 5320 to 5323 System arsa E 21284 0 5324 Protocol No H x 21285 Setting type 53256 Protocol setting data error 21286 information Packet No H x 53264 Protocol setting 21287 data check area 0 5327 Element No H x 21288 5328 Number of registered protocols 21289 10 21295 5329 to 532 Stem arsa 7 21296 to 21311 i i 0 5330 to 533F Protocol registration H x 21312 to 21695 5340 to 54 21696 54 Use prohibited System area Protocol execution status 21697 B4C1 System area
324. g the E71 are described below Do not drop or apply strong shock to the E71 case since it is made from resin Tighten screws such as module fixing screws within the following range Screw Tightening torque range External power supply terminal screw 2 5 1 0 40N m Module fixing screw M3 0 36 to 0 48 1 This terminal is an external power input terminal for supplying power to a transceiver when the E71 is connected to the 10BASES network 12 A module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration 72 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING 6 2 Wiring This section describes Ethernet cable wiring and wiring precautions For a network configuration and cables and hubs used refer to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION s 59 CHAPTER 5 6 2 1 Wiring with the QJ71E71 100 The following describes connection and disconnection of the Ethernet cable 2 9 1 Connecting the cable 1 Check the orientation of the connector and insert the Ethernet cable connector into the E71 until it clicks into place 2 Disconnecting the cable 1 while holding down the Ethernet cable tab pull out the cable 00L LZ3LZ2PO 94 BuutM 129 73 6 2 2 Wiring with the 71 71 85 The following describes connection and disconnection of the AUI cable an
325. ge Enter a password set for the CPU Password Setting module AAR w to Select the module model that checks o 27 an entered remote password against 73 Model Name i QU71E71 a3 Remote the remote password set for the CPU 30 Password module Password Active a Setting Set the start address of the module Module Setting 409 Start XY that checks an entered remote 0000 to OFEO 5 password d Opens the Remote Password Detail Condition Setting window User Connection No Connection 1 to Connection 16 Auto Open UDP Port FTP Transmission Port TCP IP Remote MELSOFT Application Transmission Port Specify a connection where an entered remote password is Detail System Connection Vna Setting MELSOFT Application Transmission Port c ec UDP IP Dedicated Instruction CC Link IE NET 10 H Relay Transmission Port HTTP Port HTTP Protocol Point When determining a remote password take care of the following Avoid a simple character string e g Character string consisting of characters only Combine alphanumeric characters and special characters e g I amp and Avoid using a character string that represents the user s name or the date of birth 201 14 4 Hub Connection Status Monitor Function The current connection status and transmission speed of an E7
326. grounding of each device Correct the checksum value sent from the connected device and send the correct value There is an error in the checksum of the receive data lt C0424 Check the situation of the line such as noise the distance when UDP is used between the line and power cable and the grounding of each device Correct the checksum value sent from the connected device and send the correct value The checksum in the header of the IP packet received is C043 Check the situation of the line such as noise the distance i between the line and power cable and the grounding of each device Check the operation of the connected device Check if the cable is disconnected C0444 An error packet of ICMP was received i Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor Check the operation of the connected device Check if the cable is disconnected C0454 An error packet of ICMP was received Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor 307 JONG eui ui peJojs sepoo JON 9 9L 1511 JOA 9 94 Error description Action code Check the operation of the connected device Check if the cable is disconnected C0464 An error packet of ICMP was received Check if there is a pr
327. guarantee prevention of all unauthorized access To have the programmable controller system fully secured against unauthorized access from the connected devices take additional measures Mitsubishi Electric Corporation does not hold any responsibility for any system problems caused by unauthorized access The following are examples of measures against unauthorized access Install a firewall Install a personal computer as a relay station and control the relay of communication data using an application program Install the connected device that can control access rights Please consult with your network service provider networking equipment manufacturer as a relay station 14 3 1 Application This function allows or prohibits access from connected devices to the CPU module through the following modules This prevents remote unauthorized access to the CPU module E71 Built in Ethernet port QCPU C24 192 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 3 2 Remote password setting processes unlock and lock processes This section describes the processes that enable disable access from the connected devices to the programmable controller 1 Access permission process unlock process To access the specified CPU module the connected device performs a remote password unlock process for the remote password protected E71 on the station in direct connection own station The following are unlock process methods Dedicate
328. guration is the same as Error log block 1 516 to 51708 area 9 The bit configuration i g Error log block 16 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 51714 to 5177p rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20856 to 20991 T 5178 to 51 se prohibite ystem area 20992 Switch in cable disconnection timeout 5200 Not se H Issue system 1 Set 20993 switching Disconnection detection monitoring time request at 4 52014 Set time set value x 500ms setting range 0 to 60 disconnection 20994 detection status System area 7 7 52024 storage area ae Di tion detecti t 0 x 52033 isconnection detection coun H 20996 to 21007 T hibited Svei 82044 to 520F 4 se prohibite ystem area System switching settings when communication error occurs user connection 0 Not set 21008 1 Set 52104 Connection No 1 bO System Connection No 2 b1 switching to settings when Connection No 16 b15 communication System switching settings when communication error error occurs occurs system connection status storage 0 Not set area 21009 TEMPE 52114 Auto open UDP port 60 Ou MELSOFT application transmission port UDP b1 MELSOFT application transmission port TCP b2 FTP transmission port b3 HTTP port b4 21010 to 21119 T T 52124 to 527Fy se prohibite ystem area 21120 detection fla
329. he BUFSND D1 1 instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the BUFSND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the BUFSND instruction is being executed END END END Program process process process LL Executed BUFSND instruction Completion device Completion device 1 The ZP BUFSND instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the sending command Point Do not perform a send process using I O signals and using the dedicated instruction together for the same connection Doing so will result in malfunction 5 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored 5 32 in Completion status 51 1 251 6 Program example The following shows a sample program that sends data stored on the fixed buffer of the connection number 1 when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F M3000 X19 MO PLS M3001 1 M3001 D300 1 K1000 D301 1 K2000 D302 K9999 D303 1 ZPBUFSND UO K 03000 0300 M300 1 M300 M301 Process upon completion M301 Process upon abnormal end Point For safety CPUs data stored in the buffer memory of the intellig
330. he CPU module cannot process and correct the error request from a connected device The communication time between the Increase the CPU 604 CPU module and the E71 exceeded the CPU monitoring timer value monitoring timer value 301 suoneoiunuiuioo Buunp pejoeuuoo e sepoo pug p99 1517 10143 9 94 Data communication type Error Communications Communications Error description Action MC protocol code RR using a fixed using a random communications buffer access buffer After unlocking the remote password using the MC protocol perform icati In communications using a fixed buffer 634 the remote password of the port for the I 2 Exclude ports used for destination E71 is in the lock status s communications using fixed buffer from the targets of the remote password check Ady to The error details and how to troubleshoot the problem are the same as those the error code stored in the buffer memory Page 304 FFFFy Section 16 6 3 302 16 6 2 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Abnormal codes returned during communications using an A compatible 1E frame The following table lists the error codes stored in the abnormal code appended to a response in the A compatible 1E frame in MC protocol communications An abnormal code is appended
331. he same as Connection No 1 FTP transmission port The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 48 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal sidered 20694 to 20736 eur 50D6 to 5100p ega 20737 Error ii 0 x 51014 rror log pointer H 20738 Log counter 0 x 51024 HTTP response code 100 to 199 n 20739 Log counter 0 x 51034 HTTP response code 200 to 299 20740 Log counter 0 51044 HTTP response code 300 to 399 5 20741 Log counter 0 51054 HTTP response code 400 to 499 20742 Log counter 0 51064 HTTP response code 500 to 599 20743 ae 5107 ystem area 20744 HTTP d 0 x 51083 H 20745 and 20746 Error log Destination IP add 0 51094 and 510 block 1 20747 to 20750 0 510B to 510E uera H 20751 to 20757 Status storage B10F to 5115p a Error log block 2 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20758 to 20764 51164 to 511C Error log block 3 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20765 to 20771 5140 to 51234 Error log block 4 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Kowen yng S E 20772 to 20778 5124p to 5121 20779 to 20785 51286 to 51314 Err
332. he station D can access the stations marked with after the remote password unlock process is completed for 1 of the station 3 2 and can access the stations marked with O when the communication lines are open Point To disable access from the connected devices to other stations through CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 relay communication functions select MELSOFT Application Transmission port UDP IP Dedicated Instruction CC Link IE NET10 H Relay Transmission Port in the remote password setting of the relay station or a station to be accessed 196 14 3 4 check status enabled disabled CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS Comparison of functions according to the remote password The following table lists the behavior of the functions according to the remote password check status enabled disabled Function Remote password check setting Disabled Enabled Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT After an initial process is completed communications are enabled by establishing a connection in the programming tool After the remote password is entered communications are enabled The remote password lock process is automatically performed when the project is closed User open port MC protocol After an open process is completed communications are enabled After an open process is completed communications are enabled from the time tha
333. header undefined command type error may occur In communications using a random 51 access buffer the start address specified Check and correct the by a connected device has been set specified start address outside the range from 0 to 6143 In communications using a random access buffer the start address and the number of data words depending on the setting when reading data specified by a Check and correct the start connected device exceeds the range from address and the number of 52u 0 to 6143 data words Data by the number of words specified Correct the number of text cannot be sent in one frame The read write points data length value or the amount of the text sent received are not in the allowable range When ASCII Code has been selected in the communication dala code setting in dala 54 the Ethernet operation setting ASCII sentiron the connected H code data which cannot be converted into device binary code data has been sent from the connected device Enable select Enable When Enable Online Change was Online Change in the disabled or not selected in the Ethernet Ethernet operation setting operation setting the connected device and write data However a requested a data write while the CPU parameter program or 55H module was running microcomputer program O While the CPU module was running the connected device requested for writing a parameter prog
334. heck and correct data sent from the connected device and converted into binary code data has been sent from the send it again connected device C051 The number of read write points is outside the allowable Correct the number of read write points and send the data to the H range Ethernet module again C052 The number of read write points is outside the allowable Correct the number of read write points and send the data to the H range Ethernet module again 308 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error TA Error description Action code C053 The number of read write points is outside the allowable Correct the number of read write points and send the data to the M range Ethernet module again C054 The number of read write points is outside the allowable Correct the number of read write points and send the data to the d range Ethernet module again C055 The number of file data read write points is outside the Correct the number of read write points or the number of bytes 3 allowable range and send the data to the Ethernet module again 3 Correct the start address the number of read write points and The read write request exceeds the largest address C056 send the data to the Ethernet module again Make sure that The address is 0 request does not exceed the largest address C057 The request data length does not match with th
335. hen receiving Data flow Forward direction Length calculation result 30H Conversion from ASCII hexadecimal to binary 31H 32H 33H Connected device Sending Reverse direction 33H 0123 gt 32H 33H 32H 31H 30H m gt 3210 3210 30 Byte swap 31H 30H 7 0 1032 gt 1032H 33H 32H 377 Sjueuigje jexyoed ejeq g g xipueddy Joo0104gd peuijepeug eunjonujs ejeq pue uonejedo 8 xipueddy 378 b Data flow Data Flow is used to specify the order of send data and receive data Forward Direction Upper Byte Lower Byte Reverse Direction Lower Byte Upper Byte and Byte Swap by Word can be used as the Data Flow Forward Direction and Reverse Direction Available when the Data Length is 2 bytes or more Byte Swap Available only when the Data Length is 4 bytes c Calculating range for the length The following shows the specification examples of calculating range for the length Packet Packet Packet Packet Packet Packet element 1 element 2 element 3 element 30 element 31 element 32 2E gt Packet format Static data Length conversion ont t t n Static data Static data Static data variable Calculating range for the length Example 1 Example 2 Calculating range for the length Examples l4 Calculating range for the length R Example 1 Calculating range when its start is 3 and end is 3 Exam
336. hen there is no Length element except for when Non conversion Variable is placed at the end of the packet elements Multiple Non conversion Variable elements are placed in the Length calculating range while a Length element is not placed A Non conversion Variable element is placed before a Length element in the Length calculating range Sjueuio 3 PAd ELL 119 4 Non verified Reception Element Setting Non verified Reception Receive x Element Name Data Length 0 5 etting Range 0 to 2046 0 Variable Cancel This element is used when receive data include unnecessary data The E71 skips characters as many as the specified number if a receive packet includes a Non verified Reception The following table lists the items Item Element Name Set name of the element Description Remark Data Length 0 Variable number of characters Set this item when the number of characters not to be verified varies in each communication 1 to 2046 Specified number of characters Set the number of characters not to be verified Point Multiple Non verified Reception elements can be placed in a packet When Data Length is set to O and the configuration is set as follows an error occurs An element other than Static Data is placed behind a Non verified Reception element when Non verified Reception is out of the Length calculating range or when there is no Length ele
337. ht 0 11kg 0 12kg 0 13kg 2 Attachment 6k words 1 Data size Main text 960k words 1 Transmission specification sending receiving data 5 When sending Send either file as attachment or main text select one When receiving Receive a file as attachment Data transfer method Subject Us ASCII format or ISO 2022 JP Base64 Attachment format MIME format MIME Version 1 0 Can be selected from binary ASCII and CSV Data of attachment format File name XXXX bin binary XXXX asc ASCII XXXX csv CSV CSV Comma Separated Value Division of attachment Cannot be divided Only one file can be sent received Subject Base64 7 bits When sending encode Main text 7 bits Attachment Base64 Subject Does not decode When receiving decode Main text Cannot be received Attached file Base64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable Encryption None Compression None Communications with a mail SMTP sending server Port number 25 server receiving server Port number 110 7 Microsoft Corporation Internet Explorer 5 0 Outlook Express 5 5 Outlook Express 5 Operation check mailer Netscape Communications Corporation Netscape 4 05 28 1 This applies when a repeater hub is used For the number of levels that can be constructed when a switching hub is used consult with the manufacturer of the switching hub used 2 As described below a module with a
338. i representative Request the lock process of the remote password from the The device is different from the one requesting the 9 PE C204 connected device that requested the unlock process of the remote remote password unlock password When accessing another station do not the remote password When another station was accessed the remote j C2054 on the relay station or access station or do not execute the remote password could not be unlocked password check on them Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C206 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 326 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action C207 The file name has too many characters Name the file with 255 characters or less C300 A response could not be received within the response monitoring timer value Check the operation of the connected device Correct the response monitoring timer value C400 Protocol not ready error Check that Predefined protocol ready X1D has turned on b
339. ication purer menor 51 2 51 3 ny Initial error code address 694 Initial error 0000 0000 COM ERR LED off 8 0004 to 0010 0000 Open error code for a connection with the connected device address 7 86 Error log 0100 FFFF Error log address E3 to 174 Clears communication status Status for each 0101 FFFF unicati protocol address 1784 to icati mai ivi E mail receivin Communication E mail receiving 0102 FFFF iving status status address 5871 to 58381 mai i E mail sendin E mail sending 0103 FFFF ing status address 5B39 to 5 0 All FFFF FFFF Clears all of the above Completion of the ERRCLR instruction be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Completion device Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ERRCLR instruction is D1 0 completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ERRCLR D1 1 instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ERRCLR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the ERRCLR instruction is being executed END END END Program process process process O_O ERRCLR instruction Executed Completion device Completion device 1 The ZP ERRCLR instru
340. ications using a binary code Specify the start address using a binary value 2 bytes b Communications using an ASCII code Specify the start address using an ASCII code value expressed in hexadecimal 4 Data length setting Set the number of words of the read written data in the random access buffer range a Communications using a binary code Specify the number of words using a binary value Maximum of 1017 words 2 bytes b Communications using an ASCII code Specify the number of words using an ASCII code value expressed in hexadecimal Maximum of 508 words 178 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER c Text Text is a data written to and read from a random access buffer Communications using a binary code Data length maximum of 1017 words Y L H L H D L Random access buffer Specified address n 13 n set number of words to be read 1 word 2 bytes Communications using an ASCII code Data length x2 maximum of 1016 words to 0 to 0 e H to 0 Ro oo AL Ng ASCIl binary conversion gt 3 e 5 Random access buffer E I Specified 5 address n set number of words to be read Maximum of 508 words H L 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 3
341. ils are held even if the CPU module is reset or the system is Section 16 3 powered off 29 js uopounj pee 1511 uopoun4 g g 2 Special functions The following special functions are also available For the functions refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application Function Description E mail function Data are sent received using an e mail Data sent received by a CPU module Data sent using the programmable controller CPU monitoring function automatic notification function CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications Data are communicated over multiple network systems where Ethernet and other networks exist together or network systems that relay multiple Ethernet networks Communications using data link instructions Data of a CPU module in other stations can be read written over Ethernet using data link instructions File transfer FTP server function 3 Web function Data can be read written in files from connected devices using an exclusive FTP command This function allows data to be read written from to a remote CPU module over the Internet using a commercially available Web browser For the function refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function 30 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 2 Use with other functions The followi
342. ime to send t TCP ULP timer i E71 Send packet The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected device even when a receive data or a protocol exists Packet sending in progress is completed without interruption Connected device Cancel Send When the cancel request is performed at sending completion when 2 Sending is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0 and the sending has been completed ECPRTCL instruction Completion device The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 5403 when the value of n is 1 2 Cancel completed 1 Cancellation request Waiting time to send t TCP ULP timer Send packet e The E71 does not send a send packet to the connected Cancel device even when a receive data or a protocol exists 4 Connected device Send packet 247 JOlHdOdd9 19 When the cancel request is performed before receiving when 3 Waiting data reception is set in Protocol execution status address 54C0 ECPRTCL instruction Completion device The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Connection No n Protocol cancellation specification 1 Cancellation request
343. indows Forms Button Public WithEvents Command3 As System Windows Forms Button Public WithEvents Command2 As System Windows Forms Button Public WithEvents Command1 As System Windows Forms Button Dim Ajsock As Sockets Socket Private State As Boolean False NOTE The following procedure is required by the Windows Form Designer It can be modified using the Windows Form Designer not modify it using the code editor System Diagnostics DebuggerStepThrough Private Sub InitializeComponent 5 New System Windows Forms Button 4 New System Windows Forms Button New System Windows Forms Button 2 New System Windows Forms Button Me Command1 New System Windows Forms Button Me SuspendLayout Command5 0 xipueddy Me Command5 BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me Command5 Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Command5 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText ensiy EOL xipueddy Me Command5 Location New System Drawing Point 64 152 Me Command5 Name Command5 Me Command5 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me Command5 Size New System Drawing Size 72 32 Me Command5 Tablndex 4 Me Command5 Text Connection status pesn S LAN OPIS y uo Command4 To the next page 413 414
344. ing the matched receive packet number is stored Matched receive packet P ac S 10 No 1 When the communication type is Send Only 0 1 to 16 System 0 is stored If an error occurs to the first protocol executed 0 is stored When the communication type of the second protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only Matched receive packet 5 11 No 2 0 is stored 0 1to 16 System If an error occurs to the second protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 2 0 is stored CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by 5 12 Matched receive packet No 3 When the communication type of the third protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the third protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of protocols which are executed is less than 3 0 is stored 0 1 to 16 System 5 13 Matched receive packet No 4 When the communication type of the fourth protocol executed includes receiving the matched receive packet number is stored When the communication type is Send Only 0 is stored If an error occurs to the fourth protocol executed 0 is stored When the number of proto
345. ings of the alive check The existence of the connected device could not be TN C035 NE BMW Check if the cable is disconnected checked within the response monitoring timer value Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor Check if the cable is disconnected Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver C036 Because a cable is not connected or disconnected the or terminating resistor E send process cannot be executed Perform the loopback test to check for an error in the line Perform the self diagnostics test to check for an error in the Ethernet module Not all the data could be received within the response monitoring timer value M 2 Correct the data length of the communication data Sufficient data for the data length could not be Because there may be congestion of packets on the line correct C040 received _ TN m the settings of the initial process The remaining part of the message divided at the To Send the same data from the connected device again TCP IP level could not be received within the response monitoring timer value Correct the checksum value sent from the connected device and send the correct value There is an error in the checksum of the receive data 4 C0414 Check the situation of the line such as noise the distance when TCP is used between the line and power cable and the
346. ion Consult a network specialist for required devices 70 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 2 3 Configuration devices used for 10BASE2 connection A QJ71E71 B2 is used for 10BASE2 connection Use devices that meet the IEEE 802 3 10BASE2 standards Terminating Terminating resistor resistor Coaxial cable T type 4 connector 0000 prec 69 515 Connected device E71 Configuration device Description RG58A U or RG58C U coaxial cable 500 Product equivalent to 221629 4 manufactured by Tyco Electronics AMP K K Product equivalent to UG 274 U 15 manufactured by Hirose Electric Co Ltd Consult a network specialist for required devices BNC type terminating resistor T type connector sjueuoduio2 Z S uonoeuuoo Z3SVv80L 20 pesn uoneunBuuo2 6 71 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING This chapter describes installation and wiring of the E71 6 1 Installation This section describes installation of the E71 1 Installation method For details on installation of the E71 refer to the following LL QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 2 Handling precautions The precautions for handlin
347. ion 00004 Normal completion 52 1 Completion status System Values other than 00001 error code Abnormal end 249 5 32 250 3 Send data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by Specify send data length Depending on the procedure of fixed buffer communications the data length is the number of words or the number of bytes Procedure exists communications using a binary Send data 110 1017 53 0 mea code Number of words User en 8 Procedure exists communications using ASCII 1 to 508 code Number of words No procedure communications using a binary code 1 to 2046 Number of bytes 53 1 to Send data Specify the send data User S3 n 4 Functions This instruction sends the data specified by 53 to the connected device of the connection specified by 51 for the module specified by Un CPU module S3 Send data length Send data Send data BUFSND E71 Fixed buffer data area No 1 No n No 16 Connected device CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Completion of the BUFSND instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Completion device Turns on at the END process of the scan where the BUFSND instruction is D1 0 completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device Turns on and off depending on the completion status of t
348. ion address 5330 to 5335 a If the protocol setting data is set correctly Power on reset Check result normal E71 Checking the protocol setting data X1D turns on when the check result is normal Predefined protocol ready X1D Protocol setting data check area address 5320 to 533FH The number of registered protocols and information about whether protocols have been registered are stored peuljepeJug JO uonipuoo uonnoex3 121 b If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data Power on reset Check result error Checking the protocol setting data X1D stays off Predefined protocol ready X1D p Protocol setting data check area The error details are stored address 5320 to 533FH 2 When the protocol setting data is written When the protocol setting data writing from GX Works2 is completed Predefined protocol ready X1D turns off E71 After the completion the E71 checks the protocol setting data If the protocol setting data is set correctly the E71 turns on Predefined protocol ready X1D If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data Predefined protocol ready X1D stays off and the error details are stored to the protocol setting data check area address 5320 to 533F p a If the protocol setting data is set correctly Start
349. ion signal OFF OFF X5 For fixed buffer communication of connection No 3 ON y5 Connection No 6 ON At sending request or reception Detection of sending error or reception error OFF complete confirmation signal OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 4 ON s Connection No 7 ON At sending request or reception X6 Sending normal completion or reception completion Y6 complete confirmation signal OFF OFF x7 For fixed buffer communication of connection No 4 ON Connection 8 ON At sending request or reception Detection of sending error or reception error OFF complete confirmation signal OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 5 ON Connection No 1 X8 Sending normal completion or reception completion Y8 ON Open request OFF OFF x9 For fixed buffer communication of connection No 5 ON Y9 Connection No 2 Detection of sending error or reception error OFF ON Open request OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 6 ON Connection No 3 XA Sending normal completion or reception completion YA ON Open request OFF OFF XB For fixed buffer communication of connection No 6 ON YB Connection No 4 Detection of sending error or reception error OFF ON Open request OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 7 ON 7 Connection No 5 Sending normal completion receptio
350. ions are enabled from the time that the unlock command is received until the lock command is received 51 A dedicated connection is used for No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer or communications using the predefined protocol Do not set the remote password for the connection with the connected device 2 Remote password check is not performed against e mail function If a remote password has been set to the CPU module on the relay station or station to be accessed where the E71 is 3 mounted access to another station may not be performed 198 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 3 5 Precautions The precautions for using the remote password function of the E71 are provided below 1 2 3 4 5 Timing of activating a remote password To enable the remote password setting power off or reset the CPU module After a remote password has been set restart the CPU module CPU number 1 in a multiple CPU system Target connections Set a remote password check only for the connections used for data communications with the connected devices that can perform unlock and lock processes In communications using a fixed buffer do not set the remote password check for the connections through which the connected device receives data sent from the CPU module Connections where No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer are performed Do not set a remote password check for connections where No Proc
351. is being executed The E71 does not check the protocol setting data when the UINI instruction is being executed Predefined protocol ready X1D keeps its status even when the instruction is executed 4 The operations of X1D and COM ERR LED If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data when the power supply is on or reset or at the data check after the data writing Protocol setting data error error code C4024 occurs Predefined protocol ready X1D turns off and the COM ERR LED turns on at this time JO uonipuoo uonnoex3 123 11 5 Example of Predefined Protocol Communications This section describes an example of communications using the predefined protocol under the following system configuration 11 5 1 System configuration example 1 System configuration QCPU 2 QCPU 1 192 0 1 101 192 0 1 100 8 gt FA an Ethernet 124 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 11 5 2 Parameter Setting 1 Sending side QCPU 1 side The following is an example of the parameter settings of the sending side QCPU 1 side a Basic setting The following is an example of the basic setting Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Set netwo
352. is stored When an error is detected in the Protocol Detailed Setting 1 is stored Valid when the Protocol No value is 1 to 128 0 Packet setting or element setting 1 Protocol detailed setting 65535 Unidentified setting data error information Packet No 53265 When an error is detected in the protocol setting data the packet No where an error has been detected is stored The send packet is checked first then receive packet expected packet is checked from the lowest packet No and the first packet No where an error has been detected is stored Valid when the Setting type value is 0 0 Send packet 1 to 16 Receive packet 65535 Unidentified Element No 53274 When an error is detected in the protocol setting data the element No where an error has been detected is stored The elements are checked from the lowest element No and the first element No where an error has been detected is stored Valid when the Setting type value is 0 1 to 32 Element 65535 Unidentified Number of registered protocols 53284 Number of registered protocols in the protocol setting data is stored When the check results include any error 0 is stored 0 No registration 110 128 Number of registrations 293 157 10143 9 94 Buffer memory name Address Description The information about wheth
353. iscrete device numbers can be used Read 0613 0000 Reads buffer memory data of the E71 Memory Write 1613 0000 Writes data to the buffer memory of the E71 Read 0601 0000 Reads buffer memory data of the intelligent function module Extend Unit Write 1601 0000 Writes data to the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Remote Run 1001 0000 Executes remote RUN to the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Remote Stop 1002 0000 Executes remote STOP to the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Remote Pause 1003 0000 Executes remote PAUSE to the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Remote Control Remote Latch Clear 1005 0000 Executes remote latch clear to the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Remote Reset 1006 0000 Executes remote RESET to the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Read Type Name 0101 0000 Reads the model name and code of the CPU module where an E71 is mounted 106 CHAPTER 10 SLMP COMMUNICATIONS Item Command Subcommand Description Type Operation Read Directory File 1810 0000 Reads file list information from the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Search Directory File 1811 0000 Reads the file number of the specified file from the CPU module where an E71 is mounted New File 1820 0000 Reserves storage area for the specified file of the CPU module where an E71 is mounted Delete File 1822 0000 Deletes a file in the CPU module where an E71 is mounted
354. ists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module An Ethernet module RAM error was detected the hardware test H W test Perform the hardware test again If an error occurs again the Ethernet module may have a hardware error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative COF1y An Ethernet module ROM error was detected in the hardware test H W test Perform the hardware test again If an error occurs again the Ethernet module may have a hardware error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative A system error major error was detected the CPU module Remove the error cause of the CPU module in the own station 317 JANG eui ui peJojs sepoo 009 9 9L 1511 JOA 9 94 Error description Action COF4 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please co
355. ites 508 word data of a binary code to a random access buffer unit ms 16 61 ACK processing time of the connected device ms 9 5 0 014 x 508 ACK processing time of the connected device APPENDICES 3 Minimum processing time of MC protocol communications batch reading and batch writing Tfs Ke Kdt x Df Scr x number of scans required for the process ACK processing time of the connected device Tfs The time between the E71 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing the process unit Constant Refer to the table below Df Number of request data words number of response data words Application data part Scr CPU module processing time When the target station is the QCPU Own station access E71 mounted station scan time Another station access over MELSECNET 10 Transmission delay time E71 mounted station scan time b When the target station is in a redundant system and data is sent through a tracking 2 Own station access Control system CPU module scan time tracking transfer time Another station access over MELSECNET 10 Transmission delay time control system CPU module scan time tracking transfer time QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 item TCP IP UDP IP TCP IP UDP IP communications communications communications communications Ke Kdt Ke Kdt Ke Kdt Ke Kdt Bite Communication
356. ive Set IEEE 802 3 Set Enable for Setting of write enable disable at RUN time Set Always wait for OPEN Reinitialization process request APPENDICES This is a sample program for communications using connection numbers 1 and 2 When using another connection number specify the corresponding signals and bits 3 Precautions a MELSOFT products supporting TCP Maximum Segment transmission To set Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission in the reinitialization process use the following MELSOFT products together MELSOFT product Supported version GX Works2 Version 1 15R or later GX Developer Version 8 07H or later MX Component Version 3 03D or later MX Links Version 3 08J or later To perform communications over Ethernet using a MELSOFT product other than those listed above select Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission or use UDP IP communications When Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission is selected the program may not be normally read written b Buffer memory area settings The following parameters operate according to the settings of the corresponding buffer memory areas configured when a reinitialization process is performed Therefore do not change the settings of the buffer memory areas Timer setting of the initial setting Open setting Router relay parameter setting Station number IP information setting FTP parameters s
357. ive data 374 APPENDICES b When the instruction ends abnormally timeout error at sending x An error has occurred ECPRTCL instruction Completion device i The device turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 um d t TCP ULP timer 4 gt 4 4 71 Send packet The packet cannot be sent or no response is Discarded received from the Connected device connected device Receive data c When the instruction ends abnormally timeout error of waiting time to receive An error has ECPRTCL instruction m occurred Completion device x The device rL 4 turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 Waiting time to send specified by the destination alive check timer t waiting time to receive or the time 71 Send packet 4 4 Send packet _ Receive data 4 Receive data Connected device The receive data did not match the receive packet expected packet sg When the receive packet expected packet is not matched to the data by the waiting time to receive or when the existence of a connected device cannot be checked within the time specified by the destination alive check timer the time calculated based on the destination existence confirmation starting interval timer value destination existence confirmation interval timer value and
358. ixed buffer b0 0 For sending or communications using a fixed buffer are not performed 1 For receiving Destination existence confirmation b1 0 No confirm 1 Confirm Pairing open b7 0 Disable 1 Enable 32 Communication method protocol b8 0 TCP IP 204 1 UDP IP Fixed buffer communication procedure b10 b9 00 Procedure exists 01 No procedure 10 Predefined protocol Communication Connection Open system b15 b14 parameter usage 00 Active open or UDP IP setting area setting area 10 Unpassive open 11 Fullpassive open Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use 33 Qu Connection No 2 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 34 228 Connection No 3 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 35 233 Connection No 4 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 36 244 Connection No 5 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 37 25 Connection No 6 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 38 26 Connection No 7 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 39 27 Connection No 8 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H 37 Kowen yng S E SsesseJppe 10157 Z G Address Decimal Hexadecimal Application Name Initial value Hexadecimal Decimal Programming tool setting applic
359. ject Types and Empty Project in Templates and set the project name e g QJSAMP and location Create a source file Open Solution Explorer Then right click Source Files and select Add Add New Item Set the file name e g and location and create a program according to the program example From the project setting window get WSOCK32 LIB linked Open Solution Explorer Then right click the project name QJSAMP and select Properties 5 Configuration Properties Linker Command Line Type WSOCK32 LIB in Additional Options and press the OK button On the Build menu click Build Solution to create an execution file Exit Visual Execute APPENDICES BAERS AER LEAL AREER Sample program program name This program is a sample program for testing the connection of the E71 and external device This program accesses the data registers D of ay 5 the redundant CPU control system mounted with the E71 Copyright C 2005 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation All Rights Reserved op kk ERERER AREAS PERERRERS include lt stdio h gt include lt winsock h gt define FLAG_OFF 0 define FLAG_ON 1 define SOCK_OK 0 define SOCK_NG 1 define
360. k The E71 RJ45 determines whether to use 10BASE T or 100BASE TX according to the hub A connector to connect the E71 to the 10BASE5 network for connecting a 10BASE5 AUI 3 10BASE5 connector cable transceiver cable A connector to connect the E71 to the 10BASE2 network for connecting a 10BASE2 4 10BASE2 connector coaxial cable A power supply terminal for supplying power to a transceiver in the 10BASE5 network 13 28VDC to 15 75VDC 6 Serial number display A display indicating the serial number printed on the rating plate 5 External power supply terminal 1 The LED on the connector does not turn on Depending on the serial number the connector orientation is left right reversal 25 1 LED indication QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 RUN ERR RUN ERR RUN ERR INIT COM ERR INIT COM ERR INIT L COM ERR OPEN 100M OPEN OPEN SD RD SD RD SD RD LED name Description RUN Indicates operating status ON In normal operation OFF An error has occurred gt Page 276 Section 16 4 1 INIT Indicates initial process status ON Normal completion OFF Not processed OPEN Indicates open process status ON An open process normally completed connection open OFF An open process not completed no co
361. k if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module COE7 An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module COE8 COE9 An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller
362. keep the bending radius near the connector reference value R2 above four times the outside diameter of the cable 3 QJ71E71 B2 i B QJ71E71 B2 RUN ERR INIT COM ERR 29 2 1 15 eo 23 65 0 93 i etes tl e 1 6 2 ET 4 1 egg 25 ie 3 Tor 1 Xd QU71E71 B2 2 23 0 91 90 3 54 11 5 0 45 27 4 1 08 pH 422 Unit mm in Appendix 13 Ascii Code List The following is the ASCII code table APPENDICES Higher 4 bits Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F Binary 0000 0001 0010 0111 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1111 0 0000 NUL DLE SP 0 1 0001 SOH DC1 1 A Q a q 2 0010 STX DC2 2 B R b r 3 0011 ETX DC3 3 C S 5 4 0100 DC4 4 D T d t 5 0101 ENQ NAK 96 5 E U e u 6 0110 ACK SYN amp 6 F V f v Lower 7 0111 BEL ETB 7 G Ww g w 4 bits 8 1000 BS CAN 8 H X h x 9 1001 HT EM 9 1010 SUB t J 2 7 1011 VT ESC K k c 1100 FF FS lt L 1101 GS 1110 SO RS gt F 1111 SI US _ DEL 423 ISI 9p02 OSV Xipueddy 424 INDEX 0 to 9 100BASE TX connection 68
363. length 0 SOCKET ERROR 1 Data sending Sockerror ERROR SEND 1 Error handling return SOCK printf n send data n s n s_buf To the next page APPENDICES 1 Perform receiving size check and receiving processing simultaneously rbuf 0 1 Receive data storage head index initialization recv size 0 Initialize the number of receive data while 1 length recv socketno char amp r buf rbuf idx BUF SIZE rbuf idx 0 1 Response data receiving if length 0 Is connection cut off Sockerror ERROR RECEIVE Error handling return SOCK if length SOCKET ERROR nErrorStatus WSAGetLastError if nErrorStatus WSAEWOULDBLOCK Sockerror ERROR RECEIVE 1 Error handling return SOCK else continue Repeat until messages are received else rbuf idx length 1 Update the receive data storage II position recv size length 1 Update the number of receive data if recv size RECV ANS 1 1 Have all response messages been received break 1 Stop repeating as messages have been received buf rbuf idx 0 Set NULL at the end of receive data printf n receive data n s n r_buf I strcpy char s buf 01FFO00A4420000000000500 DO to D4 batch read request II 1E frame strcpy char s buf 500000FFO3FF000018000A04010000D 0000000005 Il DO to D4 batch read request 1 frame length strlen char s bu
364. letion of an initial process and before the E71 is in the open acceptance enable status will cause an error and the E71 sends a connection forced close RST Point Change connection settings before executing the OPEN instruction Once an open process is performed an open request cannot be canceled before the open process is completed Perform a close process Execute the CLOSE instruction after the open process is completed 7 3 UDP IP Communications CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE This section describes UDP IP communications In UDP IP communications the system does not establish a connection and does not check whether each data has arrived at the destination normally thereby reducing the load on the line However UDP IP communications do not guarantee data reliability as the TCP IP communications do 7 3 1 Communication process Unlike TCP IP communications UDP IP communications do not require connections to be established with connected devices The server requests data reception and reads the received data Server Open Receive process reading Data sending request Close Data sending Data sending Connected device Open Data sending request Receive process reading Close
365. liance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives The Manual s Usage and Structure About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Section 1 2 1 3 1 4 Figure 2 1 2 2 2 3 POINT 2 4 2 5 2 7 Chapter 3 entire Section 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 7 4 8 1 5 1 Figure 5 3 1 Figure 5 4 5 5 5 6 POINT 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 8 2 3 5 9 1 1 2 5 9 3 Figure 5 9 5 5 9 6 3 5 9 7 6 2 7 1 7 2 Figure 7 3 1 Figure 7 3 2 2 Figure 7 5 2 8 2 Figure 8 3 1 Figure 8 3 2 2 Figure 8 5 1 8 6 2 9 2 3 2 Figure 10 1 POINT 10 6 10 8 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 2 3 11 3 7 Figure 11 3 3 error codes C1134 C1144 and 14 11 4 POINT 11 4 6 Figure Appendix 1 1 Appendix 2 1 2 2 2 Appendix 8 3 Appendix 11 Addition Section 1 2 5 6 2 2 1 2 6 5 4 2 11 3 6 11 3 2 error code 1F 11 3 3 error codes COF7 and C3004 Appendix 4 Appendix 7 Appendix 9 Appendix 11 Oct 2001 SH NA 080009 D Section 1 2 4 7 1 3 1 4 1 2 2 POINT 2 5 1 2 7 1 3 1 3 5 3 8 4 1 1 2 4 3 4 4 1 POINT 4 7 5 5 2 2 REMARKS 5 2 3 5 4 2 5 5 Table 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 6 3 10 1 Section 11 2 2 2 11 2 4 11 3 3 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 8 2 Appendix 9 Addition Section 10 9 428 2002 SH NA 080009 E Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 7 2 1 1 2 7 1 3 7 Table 5 1 Figure 5 2 2 REMARKS 5 2
366. m Procedure communications using a fixed buffer 145 Bumes SZ uononusu SAO ANG ue ezed 12 5 1 Parameter setting when using an interrupt program Configure the parameter setting on a programming tool to start up an interrupt program E71 CPU module Connection No 1 Control Program number Interrupt Connection No 2 interrupt pointer Ixx Setting SI No Setting Z BUFRCVS 2 0 of 1 BS to 15 Connection 16 255 1 Interrupt pointer setting The following is a setting example Project window gt Parameter gt PLC Parameter gt PLC System gt button Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting Interrupt Pointer Interrupt Pointer Start Count Item Description Setting range Set the start number of the interrupt pointer used in a Interrupt Pointer Start No ee 50 to 255 PLC Side program Interrupt Pointer Count Set the number of interrupt pointers used in a program 1 to 16 Start I O No Set the start I O number of an E71 0000 to OFEO Intelligent Module Among maximum 16 interrupt SI numbers control numbers Side Start SI No on the Ethernet module side to be set in the interrupt 0 to 15 program set the smallest numbers 0 t
367. m the close process to the system A Perform the close process to the system B End 217 c Precautions for writing parameter file or program file Write the same file to the system A and system B If different files are written to the systems or a file is written to only one system an error will result Write the file while the switch on the CPU module is set to STOP Write the file in the following procedure Acontinuation error occurs in the Perform the remote STOP to the control system CPU module standby system CPU module Perform the remote STOP to the standby system CPU module Write the file to the control system CPU module Write the file to the standby system CPU module 1 Perform the remote RUN to the standby system CPU module Perform the remote RUN to the control system CPU module Clear the error the standby system CPU module 2 End 1 After writing the parameter file reset the both CPU modules 2 When the operating status of the control system CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN check the error status of the standby system CPU module If an error has occurred set the error code 60104 to 5050 then turn on SM50 to clear the error 4 Communicating using a fixed buffer a Receive process in a standby system When data is sent to the E71 mounted with the standby system CPU module the data received by the E71 is discarded and the r
368. mation for System B connection int SendFlag Send completion flag int main WORD wVersionRequested MAKEWORD 1 1 Winsock Ver 1 1 request WSADATA int length 1 Communication data length unsigned char s buf BUF SIZE Send buffer unsigned char bufA BUF SIZE r bufB BUF SIZE 1 Receive buffer struct sck inf scA scB struct in hostdataA hostdataB External device side data struct qj71e71A qj71e71B 1 E71 side data BOOL DataRecv int unsigned char int 1 Receive processing function void Sockerror int int 1 Error handling function unsigned long ulCmdArgA ulCmdArgB 1 Non blocking mode setting flag ScA my addr s addr scB my addr s addr htonl INADDR ANY 1 External device side IP address ScA my port scB my port htons 0 1 External device side port number SCA qj addr s addr inet addr 192 0 1 252 E71 side IP address System A C00001FCh ScB qj addr s addr inet addr 192 0 1 253 1 E71 side IP address System B C00001FDh SCA qj port scB qj port htons 0x2000 1 E71 side port number ShutdownflagA ShutdownflagB FLAG OFF Shutdown flag OFF CloseflagA CloseflagB FLAG OFF 1 Connection end flag OFF nErrorStatus WSAStartup wVersionRequested amp wsaData Winsock initial processing ConnectLastErrorA ERROR NO ERROR 1 Connect processing error information initialization for System A ConnectLastErrorB ERROR NO ERROR
369. mber first five digits of 05051 or later If the E71 cannot communicate data when combined with a certain connected device the setting can be changed in the buffer memory address 30 1E gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 After changing the setting execute the reinitialization process Only the QJ71E71 100 can be used Usage depends on the QJ71E71 100 and a programming tool version gt Page 341 Appendix 3 2 Precautions for using the same program The QnA A series modules used for data communications between a CPU module and the connected device on the Ethernet network can be replaced by an E71 This section describes precautions for using the same program used in QnA A series modules a AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N Program of connected devices The following communication function programs of connected devices for an AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N can be used for communications with an E71 However because the response speed of the AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N is different from that of the E71 the program may not be used as is Before using the same program check the operation Communications allowed by using the program for an AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N on the connected device side Not allowed to use Connected E71 Function INe MET AJ71E71 S3 E71 AJ71E71 S3 i i 2 AJ71E71N E71 AJ71E71N E71 device Communications using a fixed buffer o o Procedure Exist Communications using a ra
370. me is calculated by setting value x 500ms Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET lt gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt Initial Setting Network Parameter Ethernet Initial Setting Module BAE r Timer Setting Module will operate with deFault values if setting is left blank Setting Value TCP ULP Timer _60 500 5 TCP Zero Window Timer 20 500 5 TCP Resend Timer 2o xso0ms TCP End Timer 4ofxsooms IP Assembly Timer 10 xsooms Response Monitoring Timer o xso0ms Dest Confirmation Start Interval 1200 x500ms Confirmation Interval Dest Confirmation Resend 3 rimes DNS Setting Input Format DEC m IP Address of DNS Server1 IP Address of DNS Server2 IP Address of DNS Server3 IP Address of DNS Server4 Cancel 344 APPENDICES Timer Setting Item TCP ULP Timer Description Set Time to Live during packet sending in TCP IP Setting range 2 to 32767 TCP Zero Window Timer Set the receive buffer value on the recipient If the receive buffer on the recipient has no free space window size 0 data sending is waited until the recipient has free receive buffer space At this time the sender sends packets for checking the sending window to the recipient according to the TCP zero window timer value to check the receiving status
371. ment except for when Non verified Reception is placed at the end of the packet elements Multiple Non verified Reception elements are placed in the Length calculating range while a Length element is not placed A Non verified Reception element is placed before a Length element in the Length calculating range 120 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 11 4 Execution Condition of Predefined Protocol Communication Communications using the predefined protocol can be executed when Predefined protocol ready X1D is on This section describes the operations of Predefined protocol ready X1D 1 When the power supply is on or reset The E71 checks the written protocol setting data when the power supply is on or reset If the protocol setting data is set correctly the E71 turns on Predefined protocol ready X1D then the protocols can be executed Predefined protocol ready X1D is used as an interlock signal when the protocols are executed If an error has occurred in the protocol setting data Predefined protocol ready X1D stays off and the error details are stored to the protocol setting data check area address 5320 to 5337 If no protocol setting data has been set the E71 does not check the data and Predefined protocol ready X1D stays off The information about whether protocol setting data has been registered can be checked in Number of registered protocols address 53286 and Protocol registrat
372. message can be received over the network 1 Operating procedure Use the following procedure 1 Connect the E71 to the line Set the switch on the CPU module to STOP Select Self Loopback Test under Mode and write 2 Network Parameter MELSECNETICC IE Ethernet Module Configuration the parameter to the CPU module Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Ethernet under Network Type Resetting the CPU module starts the test Test time is approximately five seconds The RUN and OPEN LEDs turn on during the test 5 Check the LED of the E71 after five seconds When the test is running normally the RUN LED turns on If the test fails the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on 1 For a QJ71E71 100 when the line is not connected the test is not performed and ends normally If an error is detected in the self loopback test the following causes are possible The error information is stored in Error log area address E5 in the buffer memory E71 hardware error Ethernet line error External power supply 12VDC error only 10BASE5 Point There is no hardware related problem even when the self loopback test is executed while the destination is online Because a packet collision occurs when there are many packets on the line the test may fail or may not be completed in five seconds In this case execute the test after sto
373. meter This eliminates the need to open close connections using a program Communications can be performed while the switch on the CPU module is set to STOP 1 If the program of the CPU module on the own station closes a connection the station does not enter the OPEN request wait status after the connection is disconnected Point When remotely controlling the CPU module from a connected device select Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time If Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time is selected the communication line is closed during remote STOP After the line is closed the line cannot be reopened on the CPU module side and remote RUN cannot be performed from the connected device 7 1 4 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE Open Setting Configure settings to open connections for data communications with connected devices XX Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET lt gt Select Ethernet under Network Type gt Open Setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 IP Address Port No Input Format Destination IP Address Fixed Buffer Pairing Communication Open Host Station Port No Existence 8020 Confirmation Open System Receive Procedure Exist Disable __ Confirm
374. mmand to the E71 of the own station from a connected device in the same Ethernet network Specification method ping IP Address Sample program IP Address of an E71 10 97 85 223 Window upon normal completion Window upon abnormal end Command Prompt Command Prompt C gt ping 180 97 85 223 C gt ping 18 97 85 223 Pinging 18 85 223 with 32 bytes of data 85 223 with 32 bytes of data from from prar 2 time eque timed out from caa 2 est ti 1 out from 29g Ht i s TTL 250 equest ed out b ed out 10 9 loss Ping stati und trip tim Packet ms Maximum ims Average a Action for abnormal end If the test fails check the following and perform the test again Whether the E71 is properly mounted on the base unit Connection to the Ethernet network Parameter settings written in the CPU module Operating status of the CPU module whether or not an error has occurred P address of the destination E71 specified using the PING command 359 18 DNid_ xipueddy x99u2 snjejs eur c xipueddy Appendix 5 2 Loopback test This section describes the loopback test 1 Method using the programming tool This test is to check whether the initial process for each module has been completed The test is executed on the network of stations connected to the programming tool and loopback test messages are sent sequentially to each E71 on the network and in the station number
375. mmunications are required on the programmable controller side For MC protocol communications refer to the following MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 9 1 Applications Applications of MC protocol communications are as follows 1 Data read write Data can be read written from to a CPU module device and intelligent function module buffer memory This allows a connected device to monitor the CPU module operation perform data analysis and manage production control 2 File read write Files such as a program and parameter stored in a CPU module can be read written This allows a connected device to manage CPU module files and switch execution programs 3 Remote control of a CPU module The remote operation allows a connected device to remotely operate a CPU module 6 4 Turning off the COM ERR LED The COM ERR LED on an E71 can be turned off from a connected device 5 Remote password lock unlock A remote password can be locked unlocked from a connected device 6 Access to a programmable controller in other stations over other networks In a system containing CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 and Ethernet access to a programmable controller in other stations can be performed over each network from a connected device 99 9 2 Communication Structure When a connected device sends a message to an E71 in the MC protoc
376. n SERIAL 110091 b000000000 D Serial No in Applicable standards first 5 digits a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IN JAPAN 2 Checking on the front of the module The serial number and function version on the rating plate are printed on the front at the bottom of the module QJ71E71 100 RUN ERR INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M SD RD 10BASE T 100BASE TX QJT1ET1 100 QJ71E71 100 5 2 Y 100915000000000 D Function version 418 APPENDICES 3 Checking on the system monitor product information list window The serial number and function version can be checked on the system monitor of the programming tool The Serial No column shows the serial numbers and the Ver column shows the function versions Because an E71 does not support the production number is displayed on the Production Number column Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt Product Information ist button Product Information List Point The serial number displayed on the Product Information List window of the programming tool may differ from that on the rating plate or on the front of the module The serial number on the rating plate or on the front of the module indicates the management information of the product The serial number displayed on the Product Information List window is the function
377. n e mail function Web function or MELSOFT connection which uses a dedicated connection can be executed while the ECPRTCL instruction is being executed When protocols which include Non conversion Variable are executed and the data length of the variable for one packet exceeds 1920 bytes the value of the CPU module device may not be acquired at one scan Do not change the value of the CPU module device specified in Non conversion Variable until the ECPRTCL instruction is completed Buffer memory is not affected by the sequence scan of the CPU module Assigning them in a variable enables more high speed process than assigning the CPU module device Ifthe protocol setting data is written while the ECPRTCL instruction is being executed protocol execution is canceled upon the writing completion Protocol setting data writing during the ECPRTCL instruction execution error code C430 occurs and the ECPRTCL instruction ends abnormally When the open setting for the specified connection and the communication type of the protocol executed does not match Connection number setting error error code C4074 occurs and the ECPRTCL instruction ends abnormally 243 244 4 5 Completion device D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status 5 1 in the following cases When the setting value of the control data is abnormal When an error is detected in the protocol setting data registered in GX Works2
378. n period of time it performs an alive check If the E71 cannot receive a response message from the connected device it closes the corresponding connection and issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module The following figure shows an example where an alive check message is resent twice Open completion signal address 5000 A response message cannot be received from the connected device E71 Alive check Alive check Alive check The last communications resent resent 1st time 2nd time Destination existence Destination Destination Destination confirmation starting existence existence existence interval value interval timer interval timer interval timer to the control system CPU gt gt gt lt gt module is issued confirmation confirmation confirmation request for system switching 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 System switching timing when ULP timeout is used If ACK is not returned from the connected device within the TCP ULP timer time when the connection is open in TCP IP or data is sent a sending error occurs and the E71 issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module The following figure shows an example where the number of retries is set twice BUFSND instruction E BUFSND instruction completion device 1 ACK is not returned from the connected device E71 Data command
379. n Timeout Setting 2 0 sec 0 0sec 30 0sec Issue system switch in communication error System switching settings when communication error occurs IP address DEC Port No DEC Fixed Buffer Communication Procedure 254 It is necessary to set the remote password if the system switch setting during communication error is enabled in Check Cancel End Item Description Setting range Station Station No Number and F Displays the settings configured in the basic setting Mode Setting Mode System A Station Station No Set the station number and mode of the system B Set a different System B Number station number from that of the system same mode as the Same as system A Setting Mode Setting Mode System A System B Input Format Select an input format Same as system A IP Address System A Displays the settings configured in the Ethernet operation setting Setting Set the IP address of the system B Set a different IP address from System B Same as system A that of the system A Issue system switch in Cable disconnection Select whether a system switching request is issued upon detection of Selected not timeout disconnection selected Cable Disconnection Timeout Set the time from when disconnection is detected until the system 0 0510 30 05 Setting Switching request is issued to the control system CPU module i I
380. n a microcomputer from written to an area with program an address after the last an address after the last address that be in the parameter setting has been specified address Gorrect the g P specified address In the block number specification of the tension fil ist block b ex ension ile register a block num Br block number exceeding the range of the corresponding memory cassette size has been specified The start address start device number and start step number of a command specified by a connected device has been set outside the range that can be Correct the value to the one specified within the range that can be For data read write in a microcomputer specified for each process program or file register values exceeding the CPU module parameter setting range has been specified 584 DIE number for an extension s Correct th block number file register does not exist Cc t the devi A file register cannot be specified uis b ME specification A word device has been specified for the command for bit devices The start number of bit devices has been Correct the command or specified using a value other than a specified device multiple of 16 in the command word devices 59 An extension file register cannot be Correct the device H specified specification The CPU modul d the E71 t dae bis Check the error code 5B ded to th d cod T
381. n communications using a fixed buffer data is sent received using dedicated instructions Sending data BUFSND instruction Receiving data BUFRCV instruction or BUFRCVS instruction When the Procedure Exist control method is used the CPU module and the connected device communicate on a 1 1 basis The CPU module sends receives data to from the connected device while handshaking with the connected device When the No Procedure control method is used the CPU module sends receives data to from the connected device in a non procedural manner E71 Fixed buffer BUFSND instruction CPU module S BUEREMVInstrueon 2 Connected devices where data communications can be performed Data communications can be performed with the following connected devices Devices in Ethernet where an E71 is connected Devices connected with the router relay function When using each fixed buffer numbers 1 to 16 as shown in the figure below set the destination devices and usage conditions e g for sending receiving and Procedure Exist No Procedure in the open setting to fix a connected device to each buffer Fixed buffer No 1 To send data to the connected device 1 Fixed buffer No 2 To send data to the connected device 1 Connected device 1 Fixed buffer No 3 To send data to the connected device 8 4 amp Connected device 28 136 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER Note the following points
382. n completion YC ON Open request OFF OFF XD For fixed buffer communication of connection No 7 ON YD Connection No 6 Detection of sending error or reception error OFF ON Open request OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 8 ON Connection No 7 XE Sending normal completion or reception completion YE ON Open request OFF OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 8 ON YF Connection No 8 Detection of sending error or reception error OFF ON Open request OFF Open completed for connection No 1 0 X10 Y10 Use prohibited ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No 2 um Y11 Use prohibited ON Open completion signal OFF 32 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Device Signal name Device Signal name i i number number E Open completed for connection No 3 m X12 Y12 Use prohibited ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No 4 a X13 Y13 Use prohibited ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No 5 2 X14 Y14 Use prohibited ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No 6 X15 Y15 Use prohibited ON Open completion signal OFF Open completed for connection No 7 2 X16 Y16 Use prohibited ON Open completion signal OFF X17 Open completed for connection No 8 YA7 COM
383. n for 15 Description A generic term for the partner products with built in EZSocket that supports a redundant system OM The E71 communicates with an OPS using a connection specified by a user POP3 The abbreviation for Post Office Protocol Ver 3 This protocol is used to transfer e mails from a mail server to a local computer QCPU A generic term for the Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU QCPU mounted station Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU The abbreviation for the programmable controller where the QCPU is mounted A generic term for the Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU BARES Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU READ The abbreviation for JP READ and GP READ RECV The abbreviation for JP RECV and GP RECV RECVS The abbreviation for Z RECVS REQ The abbreviation for J REQ JP REQ G REQ and GP REQ SEND The abbreviation for and GP SEND The abbreviation for Seamless Message Protocol SLMP This protocol is used to access an SLMP compatible device or a programmable controller connected to an SLMP compatible device from an external device SMTP The abbreviation for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol This protocol is used to transfer e mails over the Internet SREAD The abbreviation for JP SREAD and GP SREAD SWRITE The abbreviation for JPSSWRITE and GP SWRITE UINI The abbreviation for ZP UINI
384. n of an E71 5 1 Configuration of an E71 mounted System This section describes the configuration of the system where an E71 is mounted 5 1 1 Applicable modules and base units and the number of connectable modules 1 Connecting an E71 to a CPU module For the CPU modules and base units that can be used for an E71 and the number of connectable modules refer to the following User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used 2 Connecting an E71 in a MELSECNET H remote station For the base units that can be used for an E71 and the number of connectable modules refer to the following 1 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network ulejs s ue jo ejqejoeuuoo 34 pue spun eseq pue 99 5 1 2 60 For use with a Basic model QCPU or safety CPU When an E71 is mounted to a Basic model QCPU or a safety CPU the available functions are restricted as follows O Available x Not available Availability Function B M Safety CPU Connection with MELSOFT products and a GOT protocol communications Communications using SLMP Data communications using the predefined protocol Communications using a fixed buffer o Receive process using an interrupt
385. n of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 431 Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp The SD and SDHC logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of SD 3C LLC All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 432 SH NA 080009 Q Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s
386. n of the external device Check the open processing of the external device Correct the open settings of the communication parameters Review the Ethernet module s port number and the IP error history is sequentially displayed from address port number and open system of the external device in old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor 4 If the error details cannot be obtained in the step above perform the troubleshooting below Checking the LEDs gt Page 276 Section 16 4 Troubleshooting by symptom Page 278 Section 16 5 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 3 Checking with the Module Error Collection Function With the module error collection function the errors that have occurred in the E71 are saved into the CPU module This allows error details to be held even if the power is turned off or the CPU module is reset Check the errors collected by the CPU module on the Error History window This function is available only in the QJ71E7 1 100 with the serial number first five digits of 15042 or later Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt button Error History Serial Port PLC Module Connection USB System Image Stop Monitor Refine Search Match all of the criteria below 1 Model Name matching QJ71E71 100 2 Start matching 0000 Monitor Status 34 p Channel List Cle
387. n the E71 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing the process unit ms Kr Kdr Constant Refer to the table below Df Number of request data words ACK processing time of the between a random access buffer reading writing connected device completed and the connected device returning ACK QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 TCP IP UDP IP TCP IP UDP IP communications communications communications communications Kr Kdr Kr Kdr Kr Kdr Kr Kdr Communications using a binary code 3 1 0 004 2 1 0 005 9 4 0 008 6 6 0 008 Reading Communications using an ASCII NM 3 1 0 016 2 2 0 016 9 1 0 030 6 5 0 030 Communications using a binary code 3 1 0 006 2 1 0 005 9 5 0 014 6 6 0 012 Writing Communications using an ASCII 3 2 0 017 2 2 0 015 9 6 0 042 6 7 0 036 332 Calculation example 1 The time between the QJ71E71 B5 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing reading when the QJ71E71 B5 communicates with the personal computer in TCP IP and reads 508 word data of a binary code from a random access buffer unit ms 13 46 ACK processing time of the connected device ms 9 4 0 008 x 508 ACK processing time of the connected device Calculation example 2 The time between the QJ71E71 B5 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing writing when the QJ71E71 B5 communicates with the personal computer in TCP IP and wr
388. n to Simple project and Structured project of GX Works2 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module lt SH 080921 13JU69 gt GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual lt SH 080373 13JU41 gt Parameter settings for intelligent function modules monitoring operations and the predefined protocol support function of GX Works2 Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing monitoring and debugging 5 lg rd 1 CONDIMIONSIO RUSE 5 INTRODUCTIONE ST eer eau A An OAR d veu e d a RS 6 COMPLIANCE WITH THE AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 6 REBEVANMIMAN UALS cm 7 MANUAIBPAGEORGANIZATIONES rrr TE 14 T ae A een re Ore eee 15 Gee LEER So Cee 17 1 5 19 CHAPTER 2 PART NAMES 25 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 27 3 4 _ 1 lt 27 3 2 Performance re 27 3 3 F nctior List sio ev ete are _ eim rv eis VE 29 338 oo rtt rtt RR latet ec te tatg ant quater tede 29 3 3 2 Use with other functions llis e 31 3 4 Listof VO Signals obl
389. n3 Cut off the line Button5 gt ERES 4 Button4 Ends the program Checks the connection status ensiA EOL xipueddy ajdwes xipueddy pesn S LAN APIS aui uo 411 Sample program Form 1 vb Option Strict Off Option Explicit ON Imports System Imports System Text Imports System Net Friend Class Form1 Inherits System Windows Forms Form Region Windows Form Designer generated code Public Sub New MyBase New If m vb6eFormDeflnstance Is Nothing Then If m InitializingDeflnstance Then m vb6FormDeflnstance Me Else Try For the start up form the first instance created is the default instance If System Reflection Assembly GetExecutingAssembly EntryPoint DeclaringType Is Me GetType Then m vb6FormDeflnstance Me Endlf Catch End Try End If End If This call is required by the Windows form designer InitializeComponent End Sub To the next page 412 APPENDICES Form overrides dispose to clean up the component list Protected Overloads Overrides Sub Dispose ByVal Disposing As Boolean If Disposing Then If Not components Is Nothing Then components Dispose End If End If MyBase Dispose Disposing End Sub Required by the Windows Form Designer Private components As System ComponentModel IContainer Public WithEvents Command5 As System Windows Forms Button Public WithEvents Command4 As System W
390. nce specifications of an E71 Performance Specifications Specifications Item QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 10BASE2 100Mbps Data transmission speed Full duplex Half 10Mbps Half duplex duplex e Interface RJ45 Fixed to MDI AUI BNC Transmission method Base band Maximum node to node 9 2500m 925m 2 distance eo issi Transmission 100m specifications Maximum segment length 6 7 500 185 Q length between a hub and node Maximum number of connection connection 100 modules 30 modules nodes connection 5 maximum of 2 maximum of 4 segment segment levels levels Minimum interval between 8 2 5m 0 5m nodes Number of simultaneous 16 connections Connections usable on a program open connections Sending receiving Fixed buffer 1k word 16 data storage Random access buffer 6k words 1 memory Attachment 6k words 1 E mail Main text 960k words 1 Number of occupied I O points 32 points per slot I O assignment Intelligent 32 points Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 50A 0 50A 0 60A 12VDC external power supply capacity 3 Transceiver External dimensions 98 H x 27 4 W x 90 D mm 27 Specifications Item QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 100BASE TX 10BASE T 10BASE5 10BASE2 Weig
391. nction response to a KeepAlive ACK message 225 uonounJ Y90949 ZYL Open completion signal 3 If a response message cannot be received from the connected device If a response message cannot be received from the connected device or if an error has been detected using the alive check function the following processes are performed The corresponding connection will be forcibly closed The line is disconnected Open the connection using a user program again Open completion signal is turned off and the error code C035 is stored in the open error code storage area Ex Assuming that the values are set so that the number of retries may be three the E71 performs an alive check at the timing shown in the figure below an example of alive check using the PING command address 5000 226 Connection forced close error code C035H E71 The last Alive check Alive check Alive check RST sendin communications Alive check resent resent resent TCP only 9 1st time 2nd time 3rd time y Destination Destination Destination Destination Destination existence existence existence existence existence i confirmation starting confirmation confirmation 1 confirmation confirmation 1 interval timer value interval timer interval interval timer interval value value 1 value f value 4 1 gt 1 The values
392. nd Empty Project in Templates and set the project name e g AJSAMP and location Create a source file Open Solution Explorer Then right click Source Files and select Add Add New Item Set the file name e g and location and create a program according to the program example From the project setting window get WSOCK32 LIB linked Open Solution Explorer Then right click the project name AJSAMP and select Properties 5 Configuration Properties Linker Command Line Type WSOCK32 LIB in Additional Options and press the OK button On the Build menu click Build Solution to create an execution file AJSAMP EXE Exit Visual C NET Execute The following is an outline of how to implement a socket routine call Start v Socket created socket gt gt 9 9 Bind bind A Passive open Active open UDP 79 n t 5 250 Open listen connect lt I o og T accept e 3 P B do Y Communications send recv sendto recvfrom 2 i RE 2 Sending reception disabled shutdown ag o lt Y o8 Close closesocket Q Y Completed oO 3 0 0 06 06 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000099 9 391
393. ndom O access buffer Data read write in the CPU module E gt 1 Only 1E frame commands can be used for data communications To perform data communications using command other than the A compatible 1E frame commands create a new program Program for an AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N in the own station Because the assignment of the buffer memory areas for an E71 is different from that for an AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N a program for the AJ71E71 S3 and AJ71E71N cannot be used for an E71 Create a new program by referring to chapters that explain each function Program using an I O signal Programs cannot be used together with parameter settings on the programming tool APPENDICES b QE71 N Program of connected devices Programs of the connected devices for a QE71 N can be used for communications with the E71 except for the following programs Program for file operation related commands Program to access the data link system A QCPU Mode cannot be connected to MELSECNET Il or MELSECNET B However because the response speed of an E71 is different from that of a QE71 N the program may not be used as is Before using the same program check the operation Program for a QE71 N in the own station When using a program for the initial process and the termination process do not write the parameters of the E71 network parameters set on the programming tool to the QCPU Note
394. ndows Forms Cursors Default Me Command1 ForeColor System Drawing SystemColors ControlText Me Command1 Location New System Drawing Point 64 16 Me Command1 Name Command1 Me Command1 RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me Command1 Size New System Drawing Size 152 31 Me Command1 Tablndex 0 Me Command1 Text connect To the next page APPENDICES Form1 Me AutoScaleBaseSize New System Drawing Size 5 12 Me BackColor System Drawing SystemColors Control Me ClientSize New System Drawing Size 280 214 Me Controls Add Me Command5 Me Controls Add Me Command4 Me Controls Add Me Commanda3 Me Controls Add Me Command2 Me Controls Add Me Command 1 Me Cursor System Windows Forms Cursors Default Me Location New System Drawing Point 329 189 Me Name Form1 Me RightToLeft System Windows Forms RightToLeft No Me StartPosition System Windows Forms FormStartPosition Manual Me Text Form1 Me ResumeLayout False End Sub End Region Region Upgrade Wizard support code Private Shared m vb6FormDeflnstance As Form1 Private Shared m_InitializingDeflnstance As Boolean Public Shared Property Deflnstance As Form1 Get If m vb6FormDeflnstance Is Nothing OrElse m vb6eFormDeflnstance IsDisposed Then m InitializingDeflnstance True m vb6FormDeflnstance New Form1 m InitializingDeflnstance False End If Deflnstance m vb6eFormDeflnstance End Get Set m vb6FormDeflnstance Value End Set End Prop
395. nection where Send is selected in the open setting no paring open setting A connection where paring open is set 12 When the communication type of all protocols executed up to eight protocols is Receive Only A connection where Receive is selected in the open setting no paring open setting A connection where paring open is set 12 When the communication type of any protocol executed up to eight protocols is Send amp Receive When the communication types of protocols executed up to eight protocols are Send Only and Receive Only A connection where paring open is set 1 1 To specify a connection where open is set either of pairing opened connections can be specified 2 When a pairing opened connection is specified an extra connection is used 3 When the protocols executed include the communication type of Send amp Receive or Send Only and Receive Only pairing open setting is required CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Completion of the ECPRTCL instruction can be checked with Completion device D and D1 1 Completion device Turns on at the END process of the scan where the ECPRTCL instruction is D 0 completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ECPRTCL D 1 instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the sc
396. ned by the number of connections This setting cannot be configured when the own station is Unpassive E71 connecting the same port on a connected device set El multiple port numbers of the E71 However connections OA need to be opened by the number of connections E71 Connected device Multiple ports can be set for the same port on a connected io 15 device and on the E71 only when paring open has been set O o Consult with the network administrator for setting the port numbers of the E71 and the connected device and the IP address of the connected device 84 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 7 2 TCP IP Communications This section describes TCP IP communications 7 2 1 Establishing a connection TCP IP communications require establishing connections between communication devices When the server side device is in standby status after performing a Passive open process a connection is established after the client side device issues an open request Active open process to the server and a response is received In TCP IP communications the system establishes a connection and checks whether each data has arrived at the recipient normally thereby ensuring data reliability Compared to UDP IP communications however TCP IP places a greater load on the line Ex When the E71 is in Passive open status
397. ng e jo 6 2 165 12 9 3 1 Sample program procedures This section describes the procedures for a sample program a Sending side QCPU 1 side The following describes how communications are processed on the sending side QCPU 1 side 1 Seteach parameter on a programming tool and write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module and confirm that the initial process is completed 2 Perform the open process Active open of the connection number 1 3 Perform communications using a fixed buffer from the CPU module using the BUFSND instruction 4 After the data is sent perform the close process of the connection number 1 b Receiving side QCPU 2 side The following describes how communications are processed on the receiving side QCPU 2 side 1 Seteach parameter on a programming tool and write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module and confirm that the initial process is completed When the initial process is normally completed the connection number 1 waits for an Active open request from the connected device 2 Perform communications using a fixed buffer from the CPU module using the BUFRCV instruction 3 Datareceived in the corresponding fixed buffer data area in the E71 is read to the CPU module 166 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 2 Sample program a Program on
398. ng environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C104 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C105 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C106 C1104 System error The OS detected an error System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below
399. ng table lists the relationships between functions that can be used together Available x Not available or this function does not correspond to the functions in the Communication function column CC Link IE Communication Controller Network Communi method Link IE Field Sep pi Router Alive M cations Broadcast SH Network Pairing 4 Remote Communication function relay check using an communi MELSECNETIH B password UDP MELSECNET 10 function function auto open cations UDP port relay communications MC protocol communications o o x o Communications using 2 x O T O O fixed buffer Communications using o SLMP Data communications using o the predefined protocol Communications using a random access buffer E mail function x x x x x x x Communications using data is O link instructions File transfer FTP server function Web function 1 These functions cannot be used with an A compatible 1E frame 2 The auto open UDP port is excluded 3 These functions can be used only UDP IP communication 4 These functions cannot be used for communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method 157 uonoun4 g g su
400. ngth X Data Length Maximum Data Length 1 Setting Range 1 to 2046 Unit of Stored Data Lower Byte Upper Byte xl Byte Swap Disable Lower gt Upper x r Data Storage Area Specification Send Data Storage Area 1 Word Specifiable Device Symbol X Y M L B D W R ZR G Buffer Memory This element is used to send data in the device memory of a CPU module or buffer memory as a part of a send packet or to store a part of a receive packet to the device memory of a CPU module device or buffer memory The following table lists the items Item Description Element Name Set name of the element Fixed Length Sends and receives the data whose length is fixed When sending The data length at the time of the protocol execution is Variable Length specified and the data is sent When receiving The data of which the length is variable is received Fixed Length Variable Length Set the length of data to be sent and received Data Length Maximum Data For the variable length data set the maximum data length that can be specified to the data length storage Length area The range is 1 to 2046 When sending Each one word 2 bytes data in the data storage area is sent in the order of the lower byte to the upper byte When receiving The receive data is stored to the data storage area in the order of the lower byte to the upper byte Lower Byte Upper Byte Sjueulo 3 jex oed E L
401. nnecting the cable 1 Slide the retainer in the orientation A hold the connector on the AUI cable and pull out the cable 2 Slide the retainer in the orientation B 2 9 98 12312 0 94 229 75 6 2 3 Wiring with the QJ71E71 B2 The following describes connection and disconnection of the coaxial cable 1 Connecting the cable 1 Align the groove 1 with the groove 2 and push the connector in 2 While pushing the connector in rotate it one quarter clockwise until it securely locks into place 3 Check that the connector is locked 2 Disconnecting the cable 1 Rotate the connector one quarter counterclockwise and pull out the connector 76 CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION AND WIRING The following shows the composition of the BNC connector and coaxial cable Parts comprising the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable e e e External conductor Outer sheath Insulator 1 Plug shell e 2 Internal conductor Clamp Contact Nut Washer Gasket The following shows how to attach the BNC connector and the coaxial cable 1 Cut off the outer sheath of the coaxial cable by the length shown in the figure to left Take care not to damage the external conductor Cut off this portion of the outer sheath Clamp 2 Fix the nut washer gasket and clamp to the coaxial cable as shown in the figure to left and unfasten the external c
402. nnection SD Indicates whether data is being sent Flashing Data being sent OFF Data not sent 3 Page 277 Section 16 4 3 ERR Indicates whether the setting is correct ON The setting is incorrect Page 276 Section 16 4 2 OFF Correct setting 2 Indicates whether communication failure has occurred ON A communication failure has occurred gt 276 Section 16 4 2 OFF Normal communications in progress 100M Indicates a transmission speed ON 100Mbps OFF 10Mbps or a cable not connected RD Indicates whether data is being received ON Data being received OFF Data not received 3 277 Section 16 4 4 2 26 The OPEN LED turns on and off depending on the open status of user connections 1 to 16 The open status of the system connections e g automatic open UDP port is not included If the COM ERR LED is on it does not turn off even if the error cause is eliminated For how to turn off the LED refer to How to Turn Off the COM ERR LED lt s 330 Section 16 8 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the performance specifications functions CPU module signals and buffer memory areas of an E71 3 1 For the general specifications of an E71 refer to the following Safety Guidelines the manual included with the CPU module or base unit General Specifications 3 2 The following table lists the performa
403. ns cannot be performed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot perform communications using data link instructions Check item Is the communication status of the connected device normal Action Correct the error of the connected device Is the number of resends set upon every instruction execution Modify the program to set the number of resends upon every instruction execution Does an error occur even after the arrival monitoring time is increased Check and correct the arrival monitoring time Does an error occur even after the setting value in TCP Resend Timer in the initial setting is increased Check and correct the setting value in TCP Resend Timer Are the routing parameter settings correct Check the routing parameters and correct the error 15 the Station No lt gt IP information setting configured Set the Station No lt gt IP Information setting in the network parameter window MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 Page 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test gt Page 364 Appendix 6 1 16 5 14 Communications cannot be performed during OPS connection in a redundant system The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot
404. nsult your local Mitsubishi representative COF5 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative COF6 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative COF7 An error has occurred in the self loopback test Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data from the connected device after a certain period of time Check if the cable is disconnected Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi rep
405. nt other than a Length element an element error occurs To use a Length element one or more element s other than Length is are required When the number of digits of calculation result is greater than that specified in Data Length digits greater than the specified digit are omitted ignored Ex When the Data Length is 2 bytes and the calculation result is 123 bytes the data length is considered as 23 When a Non conversion Variable Variable length or Non verified Reception Variable number of characters is placed behind a Length and is not included in the Length calculating range place Static Data immediate after the Non conversion Variable or Non verified Reception When Code Type is ASCII Hexadecimal a corresponding packet is regarded as a mismatch packet if a string except for O to 9 A to F and a to f is received When sending data converted to ASCII characters use 0 to 9 or A to F When multiple Length elements are placed the calculating range cannot be set as follows A Length calculating range overlaps the others The calculating range of a Length is greater than that of the Length placed before Length element cannot be placed at the end of the packet elements 116 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL 3 Non conversion Variable Element Setting Non conversion Variable Send Element Name Fixed Length Variable Length Fixed Le
406. o 159 2 When receiving data The following is the parameter setting for data receiving Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 v Receive x No Procedure v Disable No Confirm 001 joe xl EN m m ___ ___ ___ ___ __ _ _ ___ ___ epe ee eee e pe pe fa fa fa fe KN EN eie ee Protocol Select UDP IP Fixed Buffer Select Receive Fixed Buffer Communication Select No Procedure Existence Confirmation Select No Confirm Destination IP Address Set FFFFFFFFy Destination Port No Set FFFFy 160 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 8 3 Precautions This section describes the precautions for broadcast communications 1 Port number To perform broadcast communications the user needs to determine the port numbers dedicated for data sending receiving for broadcast communications and specify these port numbers 2 Size of send receive data per sending receiving A maximum of 2046 bytes of data in the application data can be processed per sending receiving To send data with a size exceeding 2047 bytes divide the data into smaller chunks at the send source An E71
407. o 15 146 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 2 Interrupt settings The following is a setting example Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Interrupt Settings 14 Network Parameter Ethernet Interrupt Settings Module No 1 Input Format Detection Edge Detect v Completed _ Item Description Setting range Input Format The input format of each data is decimal number only Device Code Select a device code Select Fixed Buffer in this setting Fixed Buffer Set the connection number of the fixed buffer to trigger the Channel No Connection No 1 to 16 interrupt program Set the interrupt control number for the E71 for when an interrupt Interrupt SI No 0 to 15 request is issued from the E71 to the CPU module Bumes Jeyeurejeq 9 1 Do not set the same interrupt SI numbers as those to be set for an interrupt of other communications using a fixed buffer or the RECV instruction Point Interrupt SI numbers can be assigned by the user to receive up to 16 communications using a fixed buffer and communications using the RECV instruction in an interrupt program The user must manage the interrupt SI numbers assigned for receiving data ue Bursn uaym Bumes 62 147 12 6 Da
408. o may set all the MELSOFT products connected to the network as the target connections therefore the connected device target MELSOFT product cannot be specified Point When using a redundant system in the backup mode set the mode of the system B same as that of the system A If the mode differs between them an error will occur in the Redundant CPU Configure Cable disconnection timeout setting from several seconds to several ten seconds If the value is shorter than that a system switching request may occur due to such as noise CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 6 4 Data communications in a redundant system This section describes data communications using the E71 mounted on the main base unit in a redundant system Processes other than those described in this section are the same as those in a single CPU system 1 Initial process a Reinitialization process When performing a reinitialization process do not change the settings such as the own station IP address and Ethernet operation setting Doing so may cause a communication error When using the UINI instruction Execute the instruction after specifying for Specification of changed item 51 2 of the control data When directly writing to the buffer memory Write 1 to the bit 15 of Communication condition setting Ethernet Operation Setting area address without changing the value stored in the buffer memory area b Initial process using
409. oblem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor Check the operation of the connected device Check if the cable is disconnected C0474 error packet of ICMP was received x m 5 Check if there is problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor Check the operation of the connected device Check if the cable is disconnected C048 An error packet of ICMP was received 8 Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor Check the operation of the connected device Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time Check if the cable is disconnected C049 An error packet of ICMP was received Check if there is problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor If an alive check timeout occurs correct the IP assembly timer value of the connected device Check the operation of the connected device Because there may be congestion of packets on the line send data after a certain period of time CO4A An error packet of ICMP was received An IP assembly Check if the cable is disconnected timeout error has occurred in the connected device Check if there is a problem with the connection to the transceiver or terminating resistor If an alive check timeout occurs correct the IP assembly timer value of the connected devi
410. ock status no remote password Remote setting 20486 password 4 Lock status 50064 status Connection No 1 b0 OH storage Connection No 2 b1 area is Connection No 16 b15 Remote password status 0 Unlock status no remote password setting Remote 1 Lock status 20487 System port password Auto open UDP port b0 50074 information area piv MELSOFT application transmission port p dd UDP b1 area MELSOFT application transmission port TCP b2 FTP transmission port b3 46 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 20599 to 20603 5077 to 50781 Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability System port use prohibited designation 0 Use allowed 1 Use prohibited 20488 Systemport Auto open UDP port b0 50084 System port a39 u MELSOFT application transmission port information area pace UDP b1 m m MELSOFT application transmission port niis TCP b2 20489 to 20591 50094 to 506 area Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation For user 20592 open port 1 7 5070p 0 No designation 1 higher Notification accumulated count Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation For auto open UDP port MELSOFT application 20593 transmission port TCP UDP and FTP 2 T 507114 transmission port H
411. odule The E71 checks an entered remote password in data communications from a connected device using remote password protected connection Page 192 Section 14 3 22 CHAPTER 1 FEATURES 7 E mail sending receiving e mail function This function sends and receives e mails to and from a connected device in a remote location via the Internet For details refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application a E mail sending receiving through the CPU module The following data can be sent and received using the MSEND MRECV instructions The CPU module can receive send up to 6K word data from to a personal computer or other E71 modules as an e mail attachment The CPU module can send up to 960 word data to a personal computer or portable terminal as the main text of an e mail b E mail sending using the programmable controller CPU monitoring function Notification conditions CPU module status or device values that have been set using parameters are regularly monitored When the conditions are met up to 960 word data can be sent by either of the following data formats Attachment Main text Internet Sending receiving e mails Mail server Mail server Connected device 23 24 8 Data sending r
412. of Page 171 access buffer an E71 CHAPTER 13 Data communications are performed through a router and a gateway This function Page 186 Router relay function is not the function where an E71 operates as a router Section 14 1 Communications using an auto Communications are enabled without the open close processes after an E71 Page 191 open UDP port mounted station is started up Section 14 2 192 Remote password Unauthorized remote access to a CPU module is prevented Section 14 3 Hub connection status monitor The current connection status and transmission speed of an E71 and a hub and the Page 202 function only QJ71E71 100 number of times that the E71 detected disconnection can be checked Section 14 4 IP address in use detection If different stations in the same network use the same IP address the address in use Page 203 function only QJ71E71 100 can be detected Section 14 5 Network configuration in a Page 205 A network can be configured in a redundant system redundant system Section 14 6 Whether a connected device is normally operating after connection is established 225 Alive check function open process be checked Section 14 7 An error that has occurred in an E71 can be stored in the CPU module as error Module error collection function history The history data can be stored on a memory with the backup power feature Page 275 only QJ71E71 100 therefore error deta
413. off LEDs of the E71 or clears error information stored in the buffer ERRCLR Page 260 Section 15 11 memory ERRRD Reads error information stored in the buffer memory of the E71 Page 263 Section 15 12 UINI Re initializes the E71 Page 267 Section 15 13 227 suonongjsu Jo 1517 7 228 2 Dedicated instructions for using special functions The following table lists dedicated instructions for using special functions For details on the dedicated instructions refer to the following MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application Function Instruction Description MRECV Reads the received e mails E mail function MSEND Sends e mails READ Reads word device data from other stations RECV Reads data received from other stations Used in the main program RECVS Reads data received from other stations Used in an interrupt program REG Performs remote RUN STOP to CPU modules on other stations Reads writes the clock data of other stations Communications using 3 2l SEND Sends data to other stations data link instructions SREAD Reads word device data from other stations with a completion device SWRITE Writes word device data to other stations with a completion device WRITE Writes word device data to other stations ZNRD Reads word device data from other stations ACPU ZNWR Writes word device data to other stations ACPU CHAPTER
414. ogram turning on X21 allows the E71 mounted on the slot where the I O signals of X YOO to X Y1F are assigned to receive an e mail by execution of the MRECV instruction and send a response mail to the sending source by execution of the MSEND instruction X21 cet M60 M60 UOVG9858 F Vm MovP H200 00 Specify inquires to the server 02 Specify the first mail reading Specify the matching to the data length of a received mail Specify the matching to the header data length of the received mail pov 09 WovP D10 2 MRECV uo 00 0100 J Read the received mail RST M60 1 NO 2 K4 M70 5 Normal receiving of the e mail Wi m 44 4 Failure in the receiving of the e mail M70 MAIL RECV OK 0207 Text data normal 71 M _ E MAIL RECV 0207 1 Text data error M70 H1000 020 Specify the text M71 MVP KI 022 J Specify the sending destination No 029 Specify the send data length D30 J Specify the Subject length S MOVP E71 mail 0200 j Specify the Subject ZP MSEND Uo D20 D200 M10 Send an e mail N10 m1 14 N20 X Completion NO 21 2 Abnormal end 220 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS c Using the notification function Because a notification mail may be sent from both the control sy
415. ol message format the E71 performs the process according to the message During communications a CPU module including the E71 operates as a server and the connected device a personal computer or other terminals operates as a client Based on the command message received from the client the server the E71 automatically sends an appropriate response message Client Server Connected device Command message Application data Subheader Text command Header Ethernet Response message Application data Subheader Text command Header The frames that can be used with an E71 are as follows 4E frame QnA compatible 3E frame A compatible 1E frame When the connected device is a personal computer using a separately sold communication support tool MX Component allows a communication program for the connected device to be created without considering the MC protocol message format or sending receiving procedures Page 381 Appendix 9 0e 60606060060000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000009909 100 CHAPTER 9 MC PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS 9 3 Data Communication Procedure The following is a data communication procedure for MC protocol communications 1 Setthe parameters 7 5 Page 102 Section 9 4 2 Perform the open process and esta
416. on the PING test can be executed from a remote device b Operating procedure Use the following procedure 1 Click the PING Test button in the Ethernet Ethernet Diagnostics T Change Address Display ema Cume Cow eer Diagnostics window or History Status or Each Connection Status of Each Protocol LED Status Received E na Information send emt information X Diagnostics gt Ethernet Diagnostics gt etremet Address 0026 521F 774A Target Module Setting under Module No Auto Open UDP 1988 Pots ING Test Loop Test _ COMERR off Stop Monitor 357 18 DNid_ xipueddy x99u2 snjejs eur G xipueddy 2 Configure the settings and click the button PING Test 3 Click the Cie button MELSOFT Application 4 Thetest results are displayed PING Test Success Success Success Success Packets transmitted 4 Received 4 Lost 0 c Action for abnormal end If the test fails take the same action as that for the method using direct connection to the E71 gt Page 356 Appendix 5 1 1 358 APPENDICES 3 Method using the PING command The PING test can be also executed using the PING command The following shows an example of checking whether the initial process has been completed by issuing a PING co
417. on 16 6 Error code Error description Action 0050 0051 0052 00544 00554 The error details and how to troubleshoot the problem are the same as those for the end code returned to the connected device 0056 in data communications gt 300 Section 16 6 1 0057 0058 0059 00586 0060 0063 00A0 This request cannot be specified in connection with the Correct the request details connected device Correct the open setting 00A Contents of the request cannot be analyzed because Check and correct the text length or request data length of the Qn H the text length or request data length is too short header Then send data to the Ethernet module again 2 This request cannot be processed Correct the request details and command 8 Refer to the troubleshooting section of the user s manual to Errors detected by a programmable controller CPU hardware design maintenance and inspection for the CPU 4FFFy module used and take corrective action 7000 to Errors detected by a module such as a serial Refer to a manual such as a serial communication module user s communication module manual and take corrective action B0004 Refer to the CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual to Errors detected by a CC Link module and take corrective action The IP address setting value of the E71 for the initial C001 proc
418. on 8 45X or later is required For the compatible versions of MX Component refer to the following 1 MX Component Version Operating Manual 420 APPENDICES Appendix 12 External Dimension Diagram This appendix provides the external dimension diagrams of an E71 1 QJ71E71 100 98 3 86 INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M SD RD QJ71E71 100 d A RUN 10 100 1 2 1 oJ QJT1ET1 00 ND Vj 1 23 0 91 S 90 3 54 E 27 4 1 08 E Unit mm in When connecting a twisted pair cable keep the bending radius near the connector reference value R1 above four times the outside diameter of the cable The orientation of the connector is different rotated depending on the serial number 421 uoisueuuiq 21 xipueddy 2 QJ71E71 B5 i E QUE SPD COMERR OPEN SD RD 3 HE S 8 i K i i D 10 5 a Ps ix ROP 1 ic p HZ 12 2620 i DC power supply for amenas PXTPONER U a transceiver S 23 0 91 90 3 54 8 5 0 33 27 4 1 08 k Unit mm in 1 When connecting AUI cable
419. on is the same as Connection No 1 H H 21876 to 21895 gt er 3 5574 to 5587 Connection 10 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H H 21896 to 21915 1 5588 to 55984 Connection No 11 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 H H Predefined 21916 to 21935 559 to 55 21936 to 21955 55B0 to 55C3 21956 to 21975 b5C4 to 55071 21976 to 21995 55D8 to 55EBy 21996 to 22015 to 55 protocol support function execution status check area Connection No 12 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 13 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 14 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 15 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 Connection No 16 The bit configuration is the same as Connection No 1 22016 to 22559 5600 to 581 52 Use prohibited System area CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 22560 ia an 0 x 58203 wn station port No H 22561 and 22562 0 58214 and 58224 estination IP address H Destination Port 0 x 58234 estination Port No H 222564 o d 0 5
420. on subnet mask When not managed by the subnetwork the connected devices need not have subnet masks Set the network address of the corresponding class 187 2 Default router IP address Set the IP address of the router default router when the E71 communicates with the connected devices on other Ethernet networks via a router other than the one specified in the router information Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The subnet address of the default router is the same as that of the E71 on the own station Condition 3 The host address bits are not all or all 1 Point If the corresponding subnet address does not exist in the router information when the connection is opened or data communications are performed communications are performed via the default router 3 Router information a Subnet address Set the network address or subnet address 2 of the connected device when the E71 communicates with the connected devices on other Ethernet networks via a router other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A and C Condition 2 The host address bits are all O A If the class network address of the E71 on the own station differs from that of the connected device set the network address of the connected devic
421. onductor mn Washer Gasket Insulator Internal 3 the external conductor insulator and internal conductor by the length shown in the figure to left Cut off the external conductor to 5mm N the same length as that of the tapered section of the clamp and smooth it down to the clamp Clamp and external conductor 4 Solder the contact to the internal conductor Note the following Solder contact Make sure that soldered part does not swell l Make sure that there is no gap between the connector and the cable insulator and they do not cut into each other To prevent the insulator from deformation solder the contact quickly 5 Insert the contact assembled in the step 4 into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell Tf 2 9 ZE LZALZPO eui z9 CHAPTER 7 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURE 78 This chapter describes the procedure for communicating with connected devices after the E71 is connected to Ethernet For the procedure for connecting the E71 to Ethernet refer to PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION L gt 57 CHAPTER 4 Continued from PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION v Parameter settings Set parameters other than the basic setting and Ethernet gt 79 Section 7 1 operation setting when required Parameter setting of each function Starting the CPU module QCPU User s Manual Update the settings by powering off and on
422. onnected device a personal computer or other terminals operates as a client Based on the request message received from the client the server the E71 automatically sends an appropriate response message Ethernet Client Connected device Request message Access destination Header Subheader Command Response message Header Subheader Response data 10 3 Data Communication Procedure The following is a data communication procedure for SLMP communications 1 2 3 4 Set the parameters 7 105 Section 10 4 Perform the open process and establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device Page 85 Section 7 2 Page 93 Section 7 3 Once the connection is established the connected device sends an SLMP message The connection is closed after the communications are completed Point In the cases described below an E71 performs a remote password check when the connected device accesses the programmable controller If communications cannot be performed unlock the remote password Page 193 Section 14 3 2 When a remote password has been set in the CPU module When the connection for data communications with the connected device is to be subjected to the remote password check 104 CHAPTER 10 SLMP COMMUNICATIONS 10 4 Parameter Setting Set the following parameters for SLMP communications Basic s
423. onounj Jeujo UM esr Z 31 3 4 List of I O Signals The following table lists the I O signals for an E71 The I O signal assignment of when the start I O number of an E71 is 0000 the module is mounted on the slot 0 of a main base unit is listed below Device Device Signal name Signal name number number For fixed buffer communication of connection No 1 ON Connection No 1 ON At sending request or reception Sending normal completion or reception completion YO complete confirmation signal OFF OFF x1 For fixed buffer communication of connection No 1 ON Connection No 2 ON At sending request or reception Detection of sending error or reception error OFF complete confirmation signal OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 2 ON Connection No 3 ON At sending request or reception X2 Sending normal completion or reception completion Y2 complete confirmation signal OFF OFF x3 For fixed buffer communication of connection No 2 ON Connection No 4 ON At sending request or reception Detection of sending error or reception error OFF complete confirmation signal OFF For fixed buffer communication of connection No 3 ON R 6 Connection No 5 ON At sending request or reception X4 Sending normal completion or reception completion Y4 complete confirmat
424. or log block 5 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 Error log block 6 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20786 to 20792 5132 to 51384 10157 Z G Error log block 7 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20793 to 20799 5139 to 513F Error log block 8 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20800 to 20806 5140 to 5146p Error log block 9 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20807 to 20813 5147 to 51408 Error log block 10 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20814 to 20820 B14E to 5154 Error log block 11 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20821 to 20827 5155p to 51581 Error log block 12 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 20828 to 20834 B15C to 51623 Error log block 13 The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 49 Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability Sense Error log block 14 The bit confi tion is th Error log block 1 5163 to 5169 rror log bloc The bit configuration is the same as Error log block 1 SEE SEA Status storage Error log block 15 The bit confi
425. order 299 157 JOA 9 94 16 6 1 communications End codes returned to a connected device during data The following table lists the error codes stored in the end code appended to a response during data communications O Stored in the end code appended to a response Data communication type Error 06 Communications Communications Error description Action MC protocol h code vire using a fixed using a random communications buffer access buffer When each communication 00 Normal completion is normally completed the error code 00 is stored Check and t th The device range destination of devices lie i 024 2 specified start device and to be read written from to is incorrect the number of points Codes for the command response type of a subheader are not within the specifications Check and correct the MC protocol communications 00 to 3C command response type set ner for the connected device Communications using a fixed buffer 60 Nun Because the E71 Communications using a random access 50 b ter 82 automatically adds the n Uii 24H command response type In communications using a fixed buffer if the user setting is not the data length setting is smaller than Ue required actual data amount the remaining data is Check and correct the data processed as the second data In this length case a sub
426. ource station Network parameter setting inati inati Relay E71 Transfer destination Relay destination Station lt network No network No ISTIS No 3 1 Network No 2 Standby system E71 Station No 2 Control system E71 Station No 1 E71 Station No 1 E71 Station No 2 QnPRH CPU Network No 1 Request destination station E71 Station No 3 221 ulejs s juepunpai e ui suoneoiunuiuioo p 9 vL uonouny uiejsAs If system switching occurs change the routing parameter settings using the RTWRITE instruction so that request source station or relay station accesses the destination through the station of the new control system after system switching Request source station Network parameter setting R 5 E E Relay E71 ransfer destination Relay destination ME QCPU Station network No network No station No No 3 N the parameter Network No 2 setting using the RTWRIT instruction Standby system Control system E71 E71 E71 E71 Station Station Station Station CPU No 1 No 1 No 2 No 2 Network No 1 Request destination station E71 Station No 3 8 When the CPU module accesses a programmable controller on another station using data link instructions a Redundant system suppor
427. ove the cause that turned on the ERR LED or COM ERR LED Check the cable connection In addition perform a line test to check if there Are the cables properly connected is a problem with the cable connection and the Ethernet line gt Page 354 Appendix 5 Correct the IP address router setting and subnet mask setting of the own Are the parameter settings correct station Is the program correct Correct the send program of the connected device If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test 7 Page 364 Appendix 6 1 277 9 jues s jou AS eu EVOL 16 5 Troubleshooting by Symptom The following describes how to troubleshoot for each phenomenon When an error occurs in the E71 identify the cause with the programming tool s Page 273 Section 16 2 16 5 1 device Communications cannot be performed with the connected The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the E71 cannot communicate with the connected device Check item Action Is the RUN LED of the E71 on Does the connected device conform to the Ethernet standard Reset the CPU module If resetting the CPU module does not turn on the RUN LED on the E71 the hardware of the E71 may be
428. ow according to the Ethernet operation setting 1 When Always wait for OPEN is selected for the Ethernet operation setting As the E71 is set to always wait for open a connection is established when an Active open is requested from the connected device This eliminates the need for open close processing programs on the E71 side Parameter communications Power on completed o 1 Open status Open enable status closed Active open acceptance enabled Closed status Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal address 5000H Open request signal address 5002H SYN ACK FIN ACK fe f to SYN ACK FIN ACK SUOHESIUNWWOD dl dOL 2 2 uedo 727 89 90 After parameter communications check that the initial process of the E71 is normally completed Initial normal completion signal X19 ON After the initial process is normally completed the connection enters open enable status and the E71 waits for an open request from the connected device The E71 starts the open process upon receiving the open request SYN from the connected device When the open process is normally completed Open completion signal address 5000 b0 turns on and data communications are enabled The E71 starts the close process upon receiving the close request FIN from the connected device When the close process is completed Open
429. packet size of receive data is smaller than that set in protocol 014 Insufficient receive data data 104 Data not matched The receive data do not match the value set in protocol data When ASCII Hexadecimal is set in Code Type data not in ASCII 11u ASCII binary conversion error code are received 124 Data length error The received Length value exceeded 2046 bytes The Length value received from the connected device does not match 304 Data length size error the actual length Verification not performed 8 HTTP status storage area address 5101 to 51771 The following table lists the HTTP status storage areas The buffer memory addresses of the error log block are those of the error log block 1 For the addresses of the error log block 2 and later refer to the list of buffer memory addresses 7 gt 35 Section 3 5 2 Buffer memory name Address Description The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered is stored 0 No error no registration of error log 1 or more The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered Error log pointer 51014 If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error log is registered in the error log block 16 area When the number of errors reaches 17 the error log is then registered in the error log block 1 area again The number of times the HTTP response code was returned from the E71 to the Web b
430. parameter settings Check if the mail server system is down Check if there is any error in the communication path Is a device other than the E71 sending the data If EUC or SHIFT JIS is used perform the following Send an e mail from a personal computer to the own station Check the header information of the received e mail sent by the own station For Outlook Express select Properties Details In the header information check that the setting is Content Type text plain charset iso 2022jp If it is charset EUC jp or charset SHIFT JIS correct it Is the E71 sending the data Because the E71 does not decode received data it cannot receive an e mail normally Try to send an e mail from a device other than the E71 Did the sending device send the e mail in the ASCII code or convert the ASCII code further into the ASCII code Check the following Convert the e mail attachment into the binary code and send it Check if the sent data e mail attachment is not in the ASCII code When the destination is a personal computer use another mailer If the received e mails differ depending on the mailer used check the mailer settings Check if the encoding and decoding methods of the mail server differs from those of Ethernet 287 eq jouueo UY ZL g 9L 9 16 5 13 communications using data link instructio
431. pend 4 uti 14 3 2 Remote password setting processes unlock and lock processes 14 3 8 Remote password check 14 3 4 Comparison of functions according to the remote password check status enabled disabled 14 3 5 Precautions sid sue brote een P eh bere Me pha bete ere 14 3 6 Parameter settings anino ieia E a 14 4 Hub Connection Status Monitor 14 5 IP Address in Use Detection Function 14 6 Redundant System Function aaa eeaeee 14 6 1 System switching request to the control system CPU module 14 6 2 Communication path bypass function 14 6 3 Parameter 2 en 14 6 4 Data communications in a redundant system TAT Alive Check Function eroe bruree eI nee uie CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 1 List of Dedicated Instructions 15 2 Parameter Settings for Using Dedicated 5 15 2 1 When using data link 5 15 3 Precautions for Dedicated 1 5 15 4 Organization of the Dedicated Instruction Sections 15 5 ZROPEN ERE P AU adt p b utat
432. perform communications during OPS connection in a redundant system Check item Action Is OPS connection set under Open system of the open setting Set OPS connection under Open system of the open setting Is the own station port number of the E71 correct Correct the own station port number of the E71 Is the IP address of the OPS correct Correct the IP address of the OPS Point The MELSOFT connection and MC protocol cannot be used together for a connection set for the OPS connection In addition a port set for the OPS connection can be connected using EZSocket only If the action above does not solve the problem there may be other causes or the connected device may be in failure 288 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 5 15 Systems cannot be switched in a redundant system The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when systems cannot be switched in a redundant system Check item Action Has the E71 issued a system switching request to the CPU module Use SD1590 of the control system CPU module to check if the E71 has issued a system switching request Check Error log area address to 17444 of the E71 connected to the control system CPU module Then correct the error Has Issue system switch in communication error been selected in Redundant settings Select Issue system switch in communication error in the Redundant settings
433. perly operating C179 An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating 17 An error was returned from the DNS server Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating 324 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error 4 Error description Action code Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP C17B4 An error was returned from the DNS server server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP 17 error was returned from the DNS server server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properl
434. ple 2 Calculating range when its start is 3 and end is 30 Example 3 Calculating range when its start is 1 and end is 32 APPENDICES 2 Non conversion Variable a Procedures The E71 processes a Non conversion Variable element as follows When the setting for Unit of Stored Data is Lower Byte Upper Byte When the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the last device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of 004 Ex When sending data whose length is an odd number Band dat Connected Word Specified device No byte swap Data length storage area 0 0005H 5 04H 03H 02H 01H Data storage area 1 0201H 1 Data are not sent 2 0403H 1 3 0605 02H Byte swap Ex When receiving data whose length is an odd number Word Specified device No byte swap Data length storage area 0 0005H Data storage area 1 0201H 2 0403u Connected Send data device 3 0005 Receiving 2 Word Specified device Byte swap Data length storage area 0 0005H Data storage area 1 0102H 2 0304H 3 0500 When the setting for Unit of Stored Data is Lower Bytes Only T
435. pletion device 1 ACK TCP only ACK TCP only Sending data Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Execute the BUFSND instruction The data is sent The send data in the fixed buffer number 1 is sent to the connected device by the send data length When the connected device receives the data from the E71 the connected device sends a response to the E71 When the E71 receives the response from the connected device the E71 stops sending data If a response is not sent within the response monitoring timer value a data send error occurs 1 After the data send process abnormally ends execute the BUFSND instruction again to repeat the send process 1 Refer to the section describing the initial setting when adjusting the monitoring timer value 344 Appendix 4 1 Point The items configured in the open setting become enabled when Open completion signal of an E71 is started up Do not send data command before data communications are completed or a response is received in response to the previous data command When an E71 communicates data with multiple connected devices data can be sent sequentially however switching the connected devices before sending receiving data is
436. pping data communications between other devices 364 APPENDICES Appendix 6 2 Hardware test H W Test The RAM and ROM of an E71 are checked 1 Operating procedure Use the following procedure 1 Setthe switch on the CPU module to STOP Select H W Test under Mode and write the parameter to the CPU module Network Parametor MELSECNET CC IH Ethernet Module Configuration X Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Ethernet under Network Type Resetting the CPU module starts the test Test time is approximately five seconds The RUN and OPEN LEDs turn on during the test 4 Check the LED of the E71 after five seconds When the test is running normally the RUN LED turns on If the test fails the RUN and ERR LEDs turn on If an error is detected in the hardware test H W test the following cause is possible The error information is stored in Error log area address 5 in the buffer memory E71 RAM ROM error Point If the test fails perform it again If it fails again there may be a hardware problem with the E71 Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 365 5159 onsouBeiq jJjes 9 xipueddy 1591 159 2 9 xipueddy Appendix T Differences from Ethernet Modules of Other Series This section describes the differences between an E71 and Ethernet modules of other series
437. program o x Pairing open Broadcast communications Communications using random access buffer Remote password o Router relay function Communications using an auto open UDP port Connected device alive check function E mail function o x CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communications Communications using data link instructions o o Receive process using an interrupt program File transfer FTP server function Web function 1 This function be used in a Basic model QCPU with the function version B or later For the version of a programming tool check the corresponding software version gt 420 Appendix 11 1 2 The connection numbers 1 to 8 only can be specified If the specified value is out of range an OPERATION ERROR error code 4101 occurs 3 When the target station of the SREAD SWRITE instructions is a Basic model QCPU or safety CPU the read notification device to the target station set to the argument D3 is ignored The operation of the SREAD SWRITE instructions is the same as that of the READ WRITE instructions For the SREAD SWRITE instructions refer to the following 1 MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 1 3 For use in a multiple CPU system When using an E71 in a multiple CPU system refer to the following
438. que If the terminal screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the terminal screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable Be careful not to let any foreign matter such as wire chips get inside the module They may cause fire as well as breakdowns and malfunctions of the module A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Setup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used the system before cleaning the module retightening the terminal screws connector screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to f
439. r 70 Transceiver cable 70 Transmission specifications 27 Troubleshooting 273 U UDP IP communications 93 425 ndum Pe APO ERE 227 Universal model QCPU 16 Unlock 193 Unpassive ke es 89 Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP 69 Web function 30 When using data link instructions 229 Wiring Ron 73 Wiring with the 71 71 100 73 Wiring with the QJ71E71 B2 76 Wiring with the QJ71E71 B5 74 WRITE edian eas met ai ails ne Ends eiim den 228 Z ZIBUERGVS z sug cu EN MA 257 nh aps nee nisle 228 cate bate eel a ea 228 ZP BUERGV sos 2065 a i RIBERA 253 ZP BU FSND A ee Sake ees 249 ZP CLOSE pane ba dee be pibe 236 ZPSERRGER he Ee a 260 ZP ERRRD bo aoe hips ee lee 263 2 eet eae che ee Dee 232 Fad 267 427 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Dec 1999 SH NA 080009 A First Edition Oct 2000 SH NA 080009 B Reflect the contents of the function version B
440. r However these functions do not have any limit Therefore when the send function is executed once to transmit data the receiving side needs to execute the recv function once or more to read the data send and recv are not proportional to 1 1 execution For this reason the receive process above is required 387 epis eoi eg y uo ajdwes 0 xipueddy 388 2 When the receive process of the connected device is not supported When the receive process of the connected device is not the one shown in 1 the following may occur when Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission is set for communications When batch reading is executed from the connected device using the MC protocol data cannot be normally read After replacing the E71 which does not support the TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission function with the alternative module supporting the function data cannot be normally read Even though the value in Received TCP packet count Address 1B8 and 1B9 j in the buffer memory was changed data cannot be received If these errors occur select Disable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission APPENDICES Appendix 10 1 wnen visual C NET is used single CPU system This section describes the program execution environment data communication details and a sample program for when Visual NET is used on the program of a connected device
441. r memory For the error occurred when the communication ends abnormally refer to the error code stored in the buffer memory Page 304 Section 16 6 3 j02010Jud jo adA uoee jo uonejedo g xipueddy 0901044 peuyepeug pue 8 xipueddy 373 3 When the communication type is Send amp Receive When the packet is sent once and the sending completes normally the status of the E71 changes to the receive wait status The process completes when the data received from a connected device match the receive packet expected packet and the receive process is performed E71 Send data Data Header Receive data 1 Connected Not matched Head Dat pa Receive packet pe ie e device ted ket packet Discarded Data Receive data 2 gens eere mme menm Data Sixteen receive packets can be specified Received The operation image of Send amp Receive is as follows a When the instruction ends normally ECPRTCL instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Waiting time Waiting time to send to receive Send packet Receive data The receive data matched the receive packet expected packet Connected device Send packet L 4 Rece
442. ram or microcomputer program cannot be written while the CPU module is running Set the switch on the CPU module to STOP and write the data 300 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Data communication type Error nave Communications Communications Error description Action MC protocol code GNE using a fixed using a random communications buffer access buffer 56 The connected device specified a wrong Correct the device H device specification The number of points for command specified by a connected device exceeds the maximum number of processing points number of processes that can be executed per communication for each Correct the specified points process or the start address device Addresses from the start address start number and step number device number and start step number to the specified number of points exceed the largest addresses device number and step number for each process The byte length of a command is not ithin th defined by th wi B e Check the data length of command and set the data 57H When data is written the set number of write data points is different from the gam specified number of points A monitor request was issued even Register the monitoring though monitoring data is not registered data Data cannot be read For data read write i
443. range specified for the loopback test request designation Programming Stations connected tool to the programming tool Station No 1 Station No 3 Station No 9 Station No 7 Station No 5 Network No 1 The loopback test is executed from the station No 1 through the station No 5 on the network Station No 2 Station No 4 Station No 6 Station No 8 No 1 1 Because the E71 of function version and QnA A series modules do not have a function for responding to this request the test results cannot be checked a Applications The test can be executed only by specifying the network number for the test and target station number range Point For the E71 mounted station subjected to the loopback test do not specify the MELSOFT application transmission port UDP IP as a valid port for the password check The loopback test cannot be executed 360 b Operating procedure Use the following procedure Change P Address Display Cou iem amp tatus of Each Protocol LED status Ecmalntormeton Send intermation 109725222 Ethemet Address 0026 921F 774A Auto Open UDP 1388 Port Network 1 Station No 1 Groun No 1 Em sismo ING Test Loop Test Loopback Test r Setting Item Network No Number of mm Node Node EN Confirmation Nodes
444. re Exist MC protocol communications select Procedure Exist Fixed Buffer Communication 102 CHAPTER 10 SLMP COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 10 simp COMMUNICATIONS SLMP is a protocol that enables connected devices to access SLMP supporting devices over Ethernet SLMP communications are available among devices that can receive send messages in the SLMP control procedure This function is available only in the QJ71E71 100 with the serial number first five digits of 15042 or later For SLMP communications refer to the following SLMP Reference Manual 10 1 Applications Applications of SLMP communications are as follows 1 Data read write Data can be read written from to a device of the CPU module where an E71 is mounted and intelligent function module buffer memory This allows a connected device to monitor the operation of the CPU module where an E71 is mounted perform data analysis and manage production control 2 Remote control of a CPU module The remote operation allows a connected device to remotely operate a CPU module where an E71 is mounted 3 Turning off the COM ERR LED The COM ERR LED on an E71 can be turned off from a connected device suoneounddy LOL 103 10 2 Communication Structure When a connected device sends a message to an E71 in the SLMP message format the E71 performs the process according to the message During communications a CPU module including the E71 operates as a server and the c
445. reception status signal address 5005 Point Do not perform a receive process using I O signals and using the dedicated instruction together for the same connection Doing so will result in malfunction When receive data is read from the same connection the BUFRCVS instruction for an interrupt program cannot be used together 82 69 5 5 If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status 52 1 255 6 Program example The following shows a sample program that reads the receive data from the fixed buffer of connection number 1 when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F 256 SM400 _ 20480 _ 7 UO 0920482 20 920485 K4M40 7 M5000 x19 MO M40 M500 7 LPLS Ms0o M5001 ZP BUFRCV K1 D5000 D500 M500 M500 M501 yt Process upon completion M501 Process upon abnormal end Point P For safety CPUs data stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module cannot be used The program must be modified using the I O signals of the intelligent function module corresponding to the buffer memory For use with safety CPUs refer to the following 1 QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIO
446. recommended to prevent communication problems When a connection opened using the UDP IP protocol is used change the setting values in the communication address setting area before sending or receiving data to switch the connected devices 138 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 2 No procedure The following is the data send process performed in the fixed buffer number 1 area for the connection number 1 Initial process Open process Sending data Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal o address 5000H b0 BUFSND instruction completion device BUFSND instruction completion device 1 BUFSND instruction Sending data T Fr Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 ON Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Execute the BUFSND instruction The data is sent The send data in the fixed buffer number 1 is sent to the connected device by the send data length The E71 stops sending data After the data send process abnormally ends execute the BUFSND instruction again to repeat the send process Point During UDP IP communications when the internal process of an E71 is normally completed the data send process ends even if the communication line
447. red 0 No inquiry has been made to the server 1 or more The cumulative number of inquiries to the server Server communication error count 58764 The cumulative number of communication errors returned in response to inquiries to the receive mail server is stored 0 No communication error between servers no inquiry 1 or more The cumulative number of communication errors Error log write count Receiving error log write pointer 58774 58784 The cumulative number of registrations in the receiving error log block area is stored 0 No error or no inquiry to the server 1 or more The cumulative number of writes to the error log block area The number of the error log block where the latest receiving error log is registered is stored 0 No error registration of error log 1 or more The number of the error log block where the latest error log is registered If the pointer value is 16 it means that the latest error log is registered in the receiving error log block 16 area When the number of errors reaches 17 the error log is then registered in the error log block 1 area again 297 1517 9 94 Buffer memory name Address Description Error log block Error code 5879 An error code indicating the error details is stored Command code 587A The system command code of the error message is stored From 58786
448. resentative C100 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative C101 A response could not be received from the DNS client Check the address of the DNS server Check if communications with the DNS server can be performed using the PING command Check if the IP addresses of the own station and the DNS server belong to the same class If they belong to different classes check the router setting C102 A response from the SMTP layer could not be received Check if the SMTP server name has been registered in the DNS Delete the SMTP server name and change the setting to the IP address setting Then check the operation Check if communications with the SMTP server can be performed using the PING command 318 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Error description Action C103 System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operati
449. resentative COCB Another send request was issued before the send process has not been completed Wait for completion of transmission before sending the next send request COCC System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative COCF System error The OS detected an error Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 313 1511 JOA 9 94 JANG eui ui peJojs sepoo 009 9 9L Error description Action code CODO Incorrect data length was specified Correct the specified data length 1 Th
450. ress This setting is not required because the ARP function can be used IP address Received upon an Active open Port number Received upon an Active open c Communication protocol TCP IP is used 2 Outline of the program example a Program on the CPU module side Because parameters are set on a programming tool no program is required b Program on the connected device side Write data to the data registers DO to D4 five points of the redundant CPU control system in word units using the library described above If data write from the system A side fails due to a communication error or other reasons at this time data are written from the system B side to the data registers of the redundant CPU control system APPENDICES 3 Programming tool setting Set the parameters using a programming tool as shown below a Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting b Open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 Send ow Procedure Exist x Disable Confirm x _ 2000 n n 4 4 e e KN KER eee 4 4 4 4 4 jeje eee ee KN KER EN 4 ajdwes 0 xipueddy 0 EnSIA u8SuM 2 0 xipueddy APIS uo 5
451. rk configuration setting in CC IE Field configuration window 2 pPmde2 5 5 Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if it is needed No Setting Already Set Start No Module During Other Station Access 1 Please input 16 point unit HEX to start I O No in which module is mounted Routing Parameters Assignment Image Group Setting Check End Cancel Print Window Print Window D b Ethernet operation setting The following is an example of the Ethernet operation setting Ethernet Operation Setting r Communication Data Code r Initial Timing c Do not wait For OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time ASCII Code c Always wait For OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Address Setting Send Frame Setting Input Format ec Ethernet v2 0 IP Address 192 IEEE802 3 Binary Code Bunjes Z G LL SUONEDIUNWWOYD ejduex3 Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting Use the KeepAlive C Use the Ping Log 125 Open setting The following is an example of the open setting Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 _x Predefined protocol Enable x No Confirm __ 81921 ER
452. rocedure Exist control method and No Procedure control method This section describes the differences between the Procedure Exist and No Procedure control methods Item Message format Difference Procedure Exist Data is sent received in a fixed data format No Procedure Data is sent received in the message format of the connected device A response to data receiving A response to data receiving is sent A response to data receiving is not sent Data code Communications can be performed using a binary code or ASCII code Communications are performed using only a binary code Data length specified using a dedicated instruction Specified by the number of words Specified by the number of bytes Amount of application data per communication Maximum of 1017 words Maximum of 2046 bytes Point A connection with a connected device is dedicated for No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer MC protocol communications and Procedure Exist communications using a fixed buffer and random access buffer cannot be performed at the same time as No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer 135 1SIX3 eJnpeooJg 94 seoueJellld 2 12 2 Communication Structure This section describes the structure of communications using a fixed buffer 1 Data flow I
453. rocedures 1 Sending procedure To send data by broadcast communications set the IP addresses of the connected devices where the E71 sends data to FFFFFFFF and perform the open process The E71 sets all the host address bits to 1 and sends data over the Ethernet network 2 Receiving procedure To receive data as data for broadcast communications set the IP addresses of the connected devices that send data to the E71 to FFFFFFFF and the port numbers to and perform the open process 157 seunpeooJd Buiweoej Duipues 82 jseopeolg g zi The following is the outline of the internal process of E71 when data is received in the No Procedure control method or by broadcast communications The values specified in the buffer memory addresses 14 and 285 to 5 are used for the IP addresses and port numbers of the E71 in the own station as well as those of connected devices Data received Is the IP address of the own station E71 the same as that of the receive data request destination NO Is the network address subnet address in the IP address of the own station E71 the same as the network address subnet address of the received data Are all the bits of the host address of the received data 1 YES NO YES Is Destination IP address FFFFFFFFH Simultaneous Broadcast No 15 Destination IP address the same as that o
454. rogram on the receiving side QCPU 2 side Fixed buffer No 1 receive program SM400 UO Mov G20480 UO gt gt MOV G20482 20 UO i Mov G20485 K4M40 M5000 X19 MO M40 M500 ME PLS M5001 M5001 E ZP BUFRCV uo K1 D5000 D500 M500 M500 M501 Mt Process upon completion M501 Process upon abnormal end Point Secure sufficient device areas according to the maximum length of data sent from the send source to prevent the device areas used for other purposes from being overwritten by the receive data CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS USING A RANDOM ACCESS BUFFER This section describes communications using a random access buffer 13 1 Applications In communications using a random access buffer data can be freely read from and written to any connected device not including an E71 A random access buffer is used as a common buffer area for all the connected devices in the Ethernet network E71 Connected device Connected device Random access Writing buffer Reading Reading Writing Connected device Connected device Reading Writing Reading Connected device Point Data communications sending receiving by e mail using a CPU module cannot be used together with communications using a random acces
455. rogram to restart the main program 144 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 5 Parameter Setting Set the following parameters to perform communications using a fixed buffer Basic setting 7 Page 80 Section 7 1 2 Ethernet operation setting 7 Page 81 Section 7 1 3 Open setting lt Page 83 Section 7 1 4 Network Parameter Ethernet Open Setting Module No 1 Fixed Buffer Pairing Communication Open gt Receive _ v Procedure Exist x Disable Existence Confirmation No Confirm v 97 85 2000 Destination Fixed Buffer Port IP Address and Port No will be displayed by the selected format Please enter the value according to the selected number Cancel Item Description Setting range Fixed Buffer Fixed Buffer Communication Select whether to use the fixed buffer for connection with the connected device for sending or receiving Select the communication method for communications using a fixed buffer Send Receive Procedure Exist No Procedure E Select whether to disable or enable the pairing open for communications using Disable Faing Open a fixed buffer 2 Page 155 Section 12 7 Enable Select whether or not to use the alive check function Page 225 Existence Confirmation B Select No Confirm to send data by broadcast communications during No Confir
456. ror Error exists incorrect The class or subnet address differs from that of the E71 The same IP address has been set to multiple target E71 modules Correct the set values of the Ethernet operation settings The same network number or station number has been set to multiple target E71 modules The Ethernet line is heavily loaded including a case where an error equivalent to the error codes C0304 and C031 is occurring Perform the PING test on the No response module When the test is completed normally correct the set values in the basic settings When the Ethernet line is not heavily loaded perform the test again Error exists No error Error code The routing parameter is not set an error equivalent to the error code C080 is occurring The MELSOFT application transmission port UDP IP for the target E71 is locked with the remote password Correct the set value of the routing parameter Disable the remote password setting and write the parameter to the CPU module The target E71 is a function version A module Check the module name and function version No error Error exists The Ethernet line is heavily loaded including a case where an error equivalent to the error codes C0304 and C031 is occurring When the Ethernet line is not heavily loaded perform the test again Point P For an E71 where the loopback test failed check the error and tak
457. rowser Log counter 5101 to 51066 is stored HTTP 5108 The HTTP response code in case of an error is stored response code Destination IP 5109 to 510A The IP address of the server in case of an error is stored address The time when the error occurred is stored in the BCD code Error b15 to b8 b7 to 60 log Month 01H to 12H Year 00H to 99 Last two digits of the year block b15 to b8 b7 to Error time 510By to 510E Hour 00H to 23H Day 01H to 31H 615 to b8 b7 to bO Second 00H to 59u Minute 00H to 59H 615 to 6867 to bO Year 00u to 991 First two digits of the year Day of the week 0 to 6 1 An error log block area consists of 16 error log blocks that have the same data order 296 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 9 E mail status storage area address 5870 to 5FFF When the stored count exceeds the count starts from again The following table lists the details of the e mail status storage area The buffer memory addresses of the error log block are those of the error log block 1 For the addresses of the error log block 2 and later refer to the list of buffer memory addresses L gt Page 35 Section 3 5 2 a Receive area Buffer memory name Address Description Number of mails remaining on the server 58704 The number of remaining e mails returned when the E71 inquired the receive mail server is stored
458. rrors SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO 258 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that reads the receive data from the fixed buffer of connection number 2 when the I O signals of the E71 are X YOO to X Y1F El Enable the interrupt program 150 SM400 86 ZBUFRCVS U0 K2 D700 Execute the BUFRCVS instruction IRET 2 019 259 15 11 zP ERRCLR This instruction turns off LEDs of the E71 or clears error information stored in the buffer memory ZP ERRCLR Command 21 Available device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent 2 Index Constant Setting data system user File JEN function module register Others register device Zn Bit Word Bit Word uoco S1 01 1 2 If the own station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later or Universal model QCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Start I O number of the E71 00 to FE The first two digits Character string BIN Un Un n User of the three digit I O number 16 bit 51 Start number of
459. ruction completion device 1 Fixed buffer reception status signal Address 5005H b0 ACK TCP only Receiving data enpeooJg epeq y eged 141 142 Confirm the normal completion of the initial process Initial normal completion signal X19 Establish a connection between the E71 and the connected device and confirm the normal completion of the open process of the connection number 1 Receive data from the connected device Fixed buffer reception status signal address 50051 b0 ON Execute the BUFRCV instruction to read the receive data length and receive data from the fixed buffer number 1 Fixed buffer reception status signal address 50051 b0 OFF End the receive process If the data receive process is abnormally ended execute the BUFRCV instruction again to repeat the receive process Point The items configured in the open setting become enabled when Open completion signal of an E71 is started up When the buffer memory area that stores Fixed buffer reception status signal is turned off and on execute the BUFRCV instruction When abnormal data is received Fixed buffer reception status signal does not turn on In addition data is not stored in the fixed buffer number 1 area CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER 12 4 2 Data receiving using an int
460. s Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module COED An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module COEE COEF An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU An error was detected in the programmable controller CPU Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error exists in the programmable controller CPU If an error exists take the action required to correct it Replace the power supply module programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module Check that the CPU module and each intelligent function module are properly mounted on the base unit Check that the programmable controller CPU is not in the reset status Check if an error ex
461. s H D t H D 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 5555 39H 41H 42H 43H poste AEn iem qoc 7 13 Random access buffer Physical address L Logical address 2680H 9856 12H 34H OH 0 2681H 9857 56H 78H 1H 1 e 2682H 9858 2H 2 2689H 9865 BCH 9H 9 10 words s 3E7FH 15999 17FFH 6143 Response format from the E71 to the connected device eed v l Subheader End code 45H 32H 30H 30H esuodseJ pue puewwo Sejdwexy EYE 181 2 Reading data from a random access buffer upon read request from a connected device a Communications using a binary code Command format from the connected device to the E71 Subheader Start address Data length L H D 61H OOH 14H 0 OAH OOH Response format from the E71 to the connected device Subheader code Text 10 words L L H D L 1 00H 34H 12 78H 56H BCH BCH 9AH Mr Random access buffer Physical address L Logical address 2680H 9856 0 2694H 9876 12H 14H 20 2695H 9877 56H 78H 15H
462. s buffer Only one of the functions can be used at one time The e mail sending function using the E71 programmable controller CPU monitoring function can be used together with communications using a random access buffer 171 e uc gt t o o 13 2 Communication Structure This section describes the structure of communications using a random access buffer 1 Data flow The data flow in communications using a random access buffer is as follows The FROM TO instructions or intelligent function module devices are used to access a random access buffer from a CPU module E71 Writing data CPU module access Read request m RS Using the FROM TO instructions or an intelligent function module device Point Communications can be performed only with connected devices where communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method are set using the connection with Open completion signal of an E71 on Communications are performed asynchronously with the program If synchronization is required use communications using a fixed buffer 2 Connected devices where data communications can be performed Data communications can be performed with the following connected devices Devices in Ethernet where an E71 is connected Devices connected using the router relay function 172 CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATIONS
463. s using a binary code 14 0 009 13 0 008 21 0 012 19 0 011 2 reading Communications using an ASCII 18 0 015 13 0 017 23 0 020 18 0 020 5 EEG Communications using a binary code 14 0 009 13 0 008 21 0 020 19 0 013 9 writing M 16 0027 14 0 027 22 0 037 20 0 033 code 8 1 The time from when the E71 receives the request data from the personal computer until it completes the process is shown below Connected device personal computer command message ACK TCP only Response only 71 CPU module scan time 72 When data is sent through the tracking cable of a redundant system add the tracking transfer time For data transfer time of when the tracking cable is used refer to the following 1 QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 333 334 Calculation example 1 The time between the QJ71E71 B5 receiving request data from a personal computer and it completing reading when the QJ71E71 B5 communicates with the personal computer in TCP IP and reads 100 point data of an ASCII code from the data register D in the own station unit ms Assume that the scan time of the QJ71E71 B5 mounted station is 10ms the command data length is 21 words and the response data length is 211 words 37 64 ACK processing time of the connected device ms 23 0 020 x 21 211 10x 1 ACK processing time of the connected device
464. saData wVersion LOBYTE wsaData wVersion printf AJ_test Start n Socketno socket AF INET SOCK STREAM 0 if socketno INVALID_SOCKET Sockerror ERROR_SOCKET return SOCK_NG To the next page Create socket for TCP IP 1 Error handling 393 0 EnSIA uSUM 0 xipueddy ajdwes o xipueddy epis aeui 5 lt pesn s 3N 5 394 1 hostdata sin familyzAF INET hostdata sin port sc my port hostdata sin addr s addr sc my addr s addr if bind socketno LPSOCKADDR amp hostdata sizeof hostdata SOCK OK Bind Sockerror ERROR BIND Error handling return SOCK aj71e71 sin_family AF_INET aj71e71 sin_port sc aj_port aj71e71 sin_addr s_addr sc aj_addr s_addr if connect socketno LPSOCKADDR amp aj71e71 sizeof aj71e71 I SOCK_OK 1 Connection Active open SockerrorrGRROR CONNECT Error handling return SOCK Closeflag FLAG ON Connection completion flag ON 1 Set non blocking mode ulCmdArg 1 ioctlsocket socketno FIONBIO amp ulCmdArg 1 non blocking mode strcpy char s buf O3FFO00A4420000000000500112233445566778899AA DO to D4 batch write request 1E frame strcpy char s_buf 500000FFO3FF00002C000A14010000D 0000000005112233445566778899AA DO to D4 batch write request frame length strlen char s buf if send socketno char s buf
465. se eene Leere eer Tee Leoleo Tracking cable gt Disconnected 5 5 QJ71E71 100 station No 1 Operating as a control system Operating as a standby system V 8 Scan time of the system CPU 5 System system Standby system Tsw d 4 hn System B Standby system Control system Scan time of the system B CPU i QJ71E71 100 station No 2 Operating as a standby system Tnc Operating as a control system LLL 1 For details on CPU system switching time refer to the following 1 QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 339 Appendix 2 Port Numbers Used for the E71 The following table lists port numbers reserved for an E71 system Port number Application 1388 5000 Auto open UDP port Default value 13894 5001 MELSOFT application transmission port UDP 138A 5002 MELSOFT application transmission port TCP 1 The port number can be changed Ex The port number can be changed by overwriting the buffer memory address Automatic open UDP port number address 20 14 340 Appendix 3 New and Improved Functions APPENDICES The following table lists the new and improved functions in the E71 and supported versions of modules and programming tool How to see
466. settings The following table lists connections that can be monitored Target connection User Connection No Connection 1 to Connection 16 System Connection Auto Open UDP Port FTP Transmission Port TCP IP MELSOFT Application Transmission Port TCP IP MELSOFT Application Transmission Port UDP IP Dedicated Instruction CC Link IE NET 10 H Relay Transmission Port HTTP Port HTTP Protocol b System switching request operation CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS The E71 monitors communications with the connected device for an error using the alive check function and TCP ULP timer 1 Connected device Control system system A Standby system system B om E D Jen Deje l al IERI jur 1 ED Co Tracking cable A communication error occurred ICAIC E Control system system A Standby system system B n noonon noon 2819 00000 ye E g 1B
467. side the allowable range Specify the channel number from 1 to 8 Change the channel number COB74 A channel number currently in use was specified Perform communications again after the current communications are completed The network number or PC number is outside the COB8 allowable range Correct the network number or PC number H A response from the programmable controller CPU 15 Check the programmable controller CPU operation faulty Perform the open process Check the operation of the connected device The open process of the TCP connection has not been Nec de After sending a close request FIN from the connected device to the E71 perform the open process again and wait for 500ms more Because the close process is in process using the Perform the open process and send the request CLOSE instruction a send request cannot be accepted Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module COBBy System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative E UTRUM Open the communication line COBC
468. sing a binary D1 0 110 1017 System length code Number of words Procedure exists communications using an ASCII 1 to 508 code Number of words No procedure communications using a binary 1 to 2046 code Number of bytes D1 1 Stores the data read from the fixed buffer data area to Receive data System D1 amp n starting from the smallest address 257 3 Functions This instruction reads the receive data for fixed buffer communications of the connection specified by S1 for the module specified by Un CPU module E71 Fixed buffer data area D1 Receive data length No 1 Receive data BUFRCVS No n Receive data No 16 Operation while the BUFRCVS instruction is being executed Program Scan END process Interrupt program BUFRCVS instruction Executed Receiving data Storing the receive data The Z BUFRCVS instruction is executed in an interrupt program and the process is completed within one scan Point To read receive data using an interrupt program configure both the interrupt settings and interrupt pointer setting parameters of the programming tool gt Page 146 Section 12 5 1 When receive data is read from the same connection the BUFRCV instruction for the main program cannot be used together 4 Errors dedicated instruction ends with an error Diagnostic e
469. ss completed Check the operation of the connected device COCA The transmission interval of UDP is too short Check if a send request is being repeatedly issued Increase the send interval Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module COC2 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module COC3 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The UINI instruction has been executed during Qu Execute the UINI instruction after closing all connections communications Enable the router relay function and perform the initial process send request was issued to the connected device Set the correct dat
470. ssue system switch in communication error Select whether a system switching request is issued upon a communication error Selected not selected System switching settings when communication error occurs Set the target connection where a communication error will cause a System switching request to be issued Target connection 213 9 uonouny uiejsAs 9 214 1 The settings of the auto open UDP port MELSOFT application transmission port are enabled when the following conditions are satisfied When the following conditions are not satisfied the system switching request is not issued even if a communication error occurs in the target connection The remote password setting is enabled The remote password is unlocked 2 Do not set the connection with any of the following settings as the target connection If set the system may be consecutively switched in the redundant system if a communication error occurs due to cable disconnection or power off of the connected device Initial timing in the Ethernet operation setting Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Protocol in the open setting UDP Existence confirmation in the open setting Confirm 3 It is recommended that the connection set to MELSOFT connection under Open system of the open setting is not set as the target connection Doing s
471. ssword Remote Password Setting Remote Password Detail Setting Password Setting User Connection No Characters that can be used in password oy 4 characters Numbers A Z a z Connection 1 Connection 2 Connection 3 Connection 4 Special characters Connection 5 Connection 6 Connection 7 Connection 8 Password Active Module Setting Connection 9 Connection 10 Connection 11 Connection 12 Password Connection 13 Connection 14 Connection 15 Connection 16 Condition Note Please enable the existence confirmation Function in case of using the UDP TP protocol System Connection FTP Transmission Port TCP IP MELSOFT Application Transmission Port TCP IP r MELSOFT Application Transmission Port UDP IP Dedicated Instruction CC Link IE NET 10 H Relay Transmission Port If you enable the remote password the dedicated instructions and the CC Link IE NET 10 H Relay Transmission Function is relay transmission Function can not be used Port HTTP Protocol Clear End Cancel If the remote password of the port is enabled the existence confirmation Function will be enabled automatically Necessary Setting No Setting AlreadySet When the remote password is enabled write the parameter to the programmable controller and reset it or turn off the power and turn on the power again End Cancel Item Description Setting ran
472. stem and standby system in either of the following conditions perform the process that discards the same e mail that is received later on the receiving side personal computer The CPU operating status has been set as the notification condition The device data set as the notification condition is being tracked 4 By setting the following SM devices as notification conditions the system mode in the redundant system can be identified with a notification mail The devices can be used as conditions for identifying the system having the same e mail SM1511 System A identification flag M1512 System B identification flag SM1515 SM1516 operating system status 7 Communicating over CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 a When a redundant system is in the network When performing access through a redundant system change the routing parameter settings on the request source station or relay station using the RTWRITE instruction at system switching b When performing access through a redundant system To access another station through Ethernet using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 relay communications set the routing parameters on the request Source station or relay station To perform access through a redundant system set the station that becomes a control system as a routing station Request s
473. ster File register R ZR Buffer memory G device Send receive area for predefined protocol support function address 4800 to 4FFF 1 Do not set local devices 2 Set within the device range specified in the Device window of PLC Parameter The following describes the configuration of the data storage area a When Fixed Length Variable Length is Fixed Length An area starting from the device number which is specified in the Element Setting window is considered as the data storage area The data storage area to be occupied varies depending on the setting of Unit of Stored Data When Lower Byte Upper Byte is selected the same size as the data length is occupied However when the data length of a send packet is an odd number the upper byte lower byte for Byte Swap of the last device is not sent When the data length of a receive packet is an odd number the last data is stored with one byte of 00 When Lower Bytes Only is selected twice the size of the data length is occupied Word Specified device 0 Send Data storage area packet Send packet The user stores the send data Data storage area Receive packet The E71 stores the receive data Receive Data storage area packet 118 CHAPTER 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING THE PREDEFINED PROTOCOL b When Fixed Length Variable Length is Variable Length An area starting from th
474. t the unlock command is received until the lock command is received communications Auto open UDP port After an initial process is completed communications are enabled After an initial process is completed communications are enabled from the time that the unlock command is received until the lock command is received User open port Communications using SLMP Auto open UDP port After an open process is completed communications are enabled After an initial process is completed communications are enabled Use MC protocol to communicate with the CPU module where a remote password is set because SLMP does not have unlock and lock commands Communications using the predefined protocol After an open process is completed communications are enabled After an open process is completed communications are enabled Communications using the predefined protocol support function Procedure exists Communications using a fixed buffer No procedure Communications using a random access buffer After an initial process is completed communications are enabled by establishing a connection in GX Works2 After an open process is completed communications are enabled After the remote password is entered communications are enabled The remote password lock process is automatically performed when the protocol setting data are closed After an open process is completed communica
475. ta Format Communication data consists of a header and application data 12 6 1 Header The header for TCP IP or UDP IP is used Because an E71 automatically adds and deletes a header the user setting is not required 1 Detailed header sizes a TCP IP Ethernet IP TCP 14 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes b UDP IP Ethernet IP UDP 14 bytes 20 bytes 8 bytes 12 6 2 Application data This section describes the application data configuration 1 Procedure exists In the application data for communications with the Procedure Exist control method the following data code is expressed in a binary code or an ASCII code To switch between a binary code and an ASCII code use the Ethernet operation setting Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Operation Setting 148 CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER a Format Communications using a binary code Application data area command message Maximum of 2 bytes 2 bytes 1017 words A 4 P Communication Subheader Data length Text request source setting command L H L Communication Subheader End code request destination V A 7 1 byte 1 byte Y Application data area Response Communications using an ASCII code Application data area command message EU Maximum
476. tation failed to be acquired Check that the e mail is not compressed or encrypted C154 An error has occurred upon receiving a mail An e mail Check if the e mail specifications such as the encoding decoding cannot be read from the server style and file format on the sending side are the same as those for the Ethernet module C160 A response was received from the DNS server after Check if the network is heavily loaded R timeout Check the status of the DNS server Check if the network is heavily loaded C1614 A response from the DNS server could not be received Check the status of the DNS server Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C1624 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual for each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Checkifthe operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module C1634 System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is
477. ted data link instructions By specifying the destination in Target station CPU type of the control data in any of the following data link instructions access can be performed to the control system standby system or system A system B READ SREAD instructions WRITE SWRITE instructions REQ instruction Operation performed for access to the control system standby system or the system A system B example of executing the READ instruction When the target station is the standby system because the received command is addressed to the control system CPU module Target station CPU type 3D0 j data is relayed to the control system CPU module through the tracking cable to read the data in the control system CPU module QCPU E71 H HREADH Channel 3 Own station Control system Standby system target station kd id jr EM 9 v i E J w TS Tracking cable 5L 00000 oo NT 3 nooo CME Device EH 59 Le D 222 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS b Process at abnormal end When a data link instruction is executed for the specified control system CPU module or standby system CPU module in a redundant system the data link instruction may result in an error if system switching occurs in the target station error codes 42444 4248
478. tem switching occurs again and the standby system is switched to the control system the RECV instruction and interrupt program are executed using the data held in the buffer memory area RECV instruction execution request and the interrupt factor of the interrupt program When the SEND instruction is executed for the standby system When the standby system receives data from the sending station it holds data in the buffer memory area instruction execution request address 205 CD and the interrupt factor interrupt pointer of the interrupt program When system switching occurs and the standby system is switched to the control system the RECV instruction and interrupt program are executed using the data held in the buffer memory area RECV instruction execution request area and the interrupt factor of the interrupt program 223 5 juepunpai e po vL uonouny ulejsAs 9 Using the file transfer FTP server function a Precautions for writing a parameter file or program file Write the same file to the system A and system B If different files are written to the systems or a file is written to only one system an error will result Write the file while the switch on the CPU module is set to STOP Write the file in the following procedure Log in the E71 mounted on the main base unit of the system A CPU module Log in the E71 mounted on th
479. temporarily stores a subsequent receive data in its internal buffer for the operating system until the current receive process is completed If data with a size exceeding the capacity of the internal buffer approximately 40KB is received by broadcast communications the data is discarded In communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method the E71 sends a command message to the connected device waits for a response message then sends the next command message Therefore the user need not take account of the above mentioned internal buffer for the operating System suonneoaeld suoneoiunululo2 jseopeoJg 821 161 12 9 Example of Communications Using a Fixed Buffer This section describes an example of communications using a fixed buffer in the Procedure Exist control method between an E71 and the connected device 12 9 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used for explanation purpose QCPU 1 QCPU 2 10 97 85 222 10 97 85 223 Ethernet 12 9 2 Parameter setting This section describes a parameter setting example 1 Sending side QCPU 1 side The following is an example of the parameter settings of the sending side QCPU 1 side a Basic setting The following is an example of the basic setting Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Modi
480. th Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Completion device Turns on at the END process of the scan where the UINI instruction is D1 0 completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the UINI instruction 01 1 Normal completion Abnormal end Stays off and does not change Turns on at the END process of the scan where the UINI instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the UINI instruction is being executed Close process Program END Scan _ process END process END process F N process Initial normal completion signal X19 Open completion signal address 5000H UINI instruction Completion device Completion device 1 Reinitialization specification address 1FH b15 INI dZ 29 Internal process of the E71 The ZP UINI instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the reinitialization command Point aa Processing reinitialization Requesting L7 Initializing the module reinitialization 1 i 1 i 1 To re initialize the E71 note the following Terminate all data communications with connected devices check that all connections are closed then re initialize the E71 Do not perform a reinitializ
481. th the E71 The communication path needs not to be changed manually Application that operates on the OPS except the MELSOFT products such as GX Developer GX Works2 GX Developer PX Developer monitor tool 1 Operation example of a redundant system supported application at a communication error The following provides an example of redundant system supported application operation if an error occurs during communications with the control system CPU module 1 During normal communications Connected device The station number 1 is operating as a control system and the station number 2 as a standby system The redundant system supported application is communicating with the control system CPU module communications 069716 069169 2 Upon a communication error Connected device The station number 1 is operating as control system Redundant system supported and the station number 2 as a standby system Without application system switching uonouny uiejsAs Operation of the redundant system supported application aa re Because a communication error has occurred between uonouny ssed q uonesiunwuwoy z
482. the device that stores control data User system Device name The start number of the bit device in the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 260 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Control data 261 Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by 51 0 System area Stores the status at completion 00004 Normal completion 51 1 Completion status System Values other than 00001 error code Abnormal end Specify error information to be cleared 00005 Initial error code 0001 to 00104 Open error code for a connection with the connected device 0100 Error log block area Clear target 01016 Communication status status for each As described in 51 2 User specification protocol the left 01024 Communication status e mail receiving status 01034 Communication status e mail sending status FFFFy Clears all of the above Specify the function to be cleared 0000 81 3 00004 COM ERR LED off error code clear m ieee specification FFFFy FFFFy Error log clear S1 4 to System area S1 7 3 Functions N This instruction turns off the COM ERR LED and clears error information listed below for the module T 2 specified by Un Q a Target Function j g E Error information to be cleared Item specification specif
483. the first argument can be omitted 2 The file registers set for each local device and program cannot be used 1 Setting data Setting data Description Set by Data type Start I O number of the E71 00 to FE The first two digits Character string BIN S Un Un 2 User of the three digit number 16 bit N S1 Start number of the device that stores control data User system Device name T 2 The start number of the bit device the own station that D1 turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction System Bit D1 1 also turns on if the instruction ends abnormally 263 264 2 Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by 51 0 System area Stores the status at completion S1 1 Completion status 00004 Normal completion E System Values other than 0000 error code Abnormal end Specify error information to be read Read information 0000 Initial error code 0000p oie specification 0001 to 00104 Open error code for a connection 0001 to 0010 veer with the connected device 51 3 le Specify whether to read the latest itor information 00004 iser 00004 Reads the latest error information specification Stores the error information that has been read 51 4 Error information 00004 No error System Values other than 0000 error code Abnormal end S1 5 to System area S1 7 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS
484. the sending side QCPU 1 side The following is a program on the sending side QCPU 1 side Open process program SM400 UO MOV G20480 UO MOV G20482 KAM20 M20 020 7 M1000 PLS M1001 M1001 X19 MO M20 1 M f MovP D100 ZP OPEN UO K1 D100 M100 M100 M101 1 ME SET M110 M101 SET M111 2 6 2 e ejduex3 621 167 168 Fixed buffer No 1 send program gt gt M3001 D300 D301 D302 D303 M300 Process upon completion M3000 X19 MO PLs M3001 MOV K3 MOV K1234 MOV K5678 K8901 ZP BUFSND Uo Ki D3000 D300 M300 M301 M301 Process upon abnormal end La La Lo L CHAPTER 12 COMMUNICATIONS USING A FIXED BUFFER Close processing program MO PLF M160 1 M160 M150 PLS M161 M6000 PLS M6001 M6001 MO ZP CLOSE U0 K1 D200 M200 M161 M210 SET M210 E M200 M201 SET M202 M201 p qp T sET M203 N RST M210 7 o g 3 e ejduex3 621 169 170 b Receiving side QCPU 2 side The following is a p
485. the table Numbers in quotation marks in the table represent the first five digits of the serial number of each module O Available No version restriction x Not available Version of E71 Version of Version of GX Version of GX Function Reference QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 CPU module Developer Works2 Functi anaes Version 7 81 5 rt for IEEE 802 3 fi Secti later of A 03102 Mi Functi Reinitialization ied Page 348 version B or j process with later of Appendix he program Function 4 2 version 03061 Reinitialization later of Function 03102 267 process with version B or Section he UINI later of 15 13 instruction 03102 Reinitialization process of the Changing the E71 ransmission Function 267 speed and the version D or 1 ur x x Section communication later of 15 13 mode with the 11012 UINI instruction TCP Maximum Function Funcion Page 348 Sedment version B or version or Appendix lator of 4 05051 05051 Page 87 4 Re open process of the E71 later of iaterot O O O 05051 05051 Function Function i Page 81 Alive check Check using version B or version B or Version 8 05F Section function KeepAlive later of later of 713 05051 05051 Func
486. thernet network Parameter settings written in the CPU module Operating status of the CPU module whether or not an error has occurred IP addresses set in the programming tool and the PING test target station Whether the connected device has been reset after the E71 was replaced APPENDICES 2 Method using direct connection to the CPU module This test is to check the existence of an E71 that has completed the initial process on the same Ethernet network where a station connected to the programming tool exists or to check the existence of a connected device such as a personal computer having a specified IP address by directly connecting the programming tool and the CPU module Programming tool Specifying the station executing the test using the network No and station No PING test executing station Specifying the target station using the IP address Ethernet E71 PING test target station 4 This also applies to QnA A series modules However for an AJ71E71 AJ71E71 B2 and AJ71E71 B5 software versions S and later are required 2 The PING test cannot be executed on the own station a Applications By specifying the execution station and the target stati
487. tial process before performing communications with the connected device COD8 The number of blocks exceeded the range Correct the specified value for the number of blocks COD9 The subcommand value is incorrect Correct the specified value for the subcommand Correct the IP address and host name of the Ethernet module CODA A response to the PING test could not be received where the PING test is executed within the time of the communication time check Enable the Ethernet module where the PING test is executed to perform communications Complete the initial process CODB The IP address and host name of the Ethernet module Correct the IP address and host name of the Ethernet module to for the PING test are incorrect perform the PING test Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module CODCy System error The OS detected an error 3 Check if the power capacity is sufficient 4 Check if the hardware is normal according to the manual each module If the actions above do not solve the problem please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Follow the procedure below 1 Check if each module is properly mounted on the base unit 2 Check if the operating environment of the Ethernet module conforms to the general specifications of the CPU module
488. tialization 5 348 Remote password 192 Remote password check 194 Str A pf ncs UM Ana 228 Retainerz cv ute DAP be S Tem EE 74 dao dtes pb OE I red 71 RGS8C U Eh VERO RD 71 RJ45 68 Router information 188 Router IP address 190 Router relay function 186 Safety CPU 4 lil cmo cR 16 Self diagnostic 1 56 364 Self loopbacktest 80 364 SEND 4 had 04 Sen es ed 228 Send frame 81 Shielded twisted pair cable STP 68 Aiea Pea eed 16 420 Special 30 SREAD Z cp dak ale tute A 228 Start l O a Ae 80 Station 80 Straight cable te ge ehe da Ed 68 Subnet 5 188 Subnet mask vay 16 Subnet 187 SWRITE etg ors Rial d 228 System 59 TCP existence confirmation 81 TCP IP communications 85 Transceive
489. timing Using this port makes the E71 ready for communications upon completion of an initial process thus enabling communications without using any programs regardless of the open status of connection numbers 1 to 16 1 Open and close timing The port automatically opens according to the registered parameter settings upon completion of the initial process of the E71 In addition it automatically closes when the E71 mounted station is powered off or reset Point The E71 enables communications using an auto open UDP port after the initial process is normally completed and the E71 on the own station waits for communication requests to itself auto open The E71 accepts requests from anywhere as long as they are addressed to the E71 itself When a communication request is accepted from the connected device the corresponding port number is occupied until the process is completed Even if the next communication request is accepted during this time the communication process will be waited To change the auto open UDP port number a reinitialization process is required Page 344 Appendix 4 uogeouddy uedo oiny ue suonesiunwwoy Z pL 191 14 3 Remote Password The CPU module can be protected by a remote password Point A remote password is to prevent unauthorized access e g Corruption of programs and data from connected devices However this function does not
490. tination including the causes in the Description column and whose error codes are stored in the error log area Errors returned in communications using a fixed buffer end code Errors returned in communications using a random access buffer end code Errors returned in communications using the MC protocol Specified data error Errors where the source cannot be found Errors that have occurred in MC protocol communications Errors that have occurred in communications using a random access buffer End code or error code for each command Page 292 Section 16 6 5 Errors occurring in data communications using the predefined protocol Setting data error Receiving error Page 293 Section 16 6 6 Page 295 Section 16 6 7 Errors response commands occurring in communications with the destination using the file transfer FTP server function Specified data error Communication error Refer to the QnUCPU User s Manual Communication via Built in Ethernet Port Errors occurring in communications using the Web function Communication error Page 296 Section 16 6 8 Errors occurring when an e mail is received Setting data error Receiving error Page 297 Section 16 6 9 a Errors occurring when an e mail is sent Setting data error Sending error Page 299 Section 16 6 9 b Errors occurring in communications using data link instructions from the
491. tings x x x O O Open process with the program O Open process 1 Open process with parameter settings x x x x 2 Communications using a Procedure Exist fixed buffer No Procedure x o Communications using a random access buffer MC protocol communications o o Communications using data link instructions x x x Interrupt process upon BUFRCVS instruction x x x x data receiving RECVS instruction x x x x Send receive with the program x x x x E mail function Send with the auto notification function x x x x File transfer FTP server function x x x Web function x x x x Broadcast communications x Communications with the switch on the CPU module to STOP x Selection of the communication data code ASCIl binary CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network x 5 MELSECNET H 10 relay communications Router relay function x Connected device alive Ping KeepAlive x x x x Pairing open x Unit of each timer setting 500ms x5 Fixed Fixed Fixed value for data communications 2s O Fixed O 5 0 x i MELSOFT products UDP IP x Installation of EEPROM x x x 6 TCP Maximum Segment Size Option transmission x o Hub connection status monitor fun
492. tion Connection up to 17 MELSOFT roducts in TCP IP version B 6 05 96 P an later of or later CHAPTER 8 communications 02122 Easy access to Easy other stations Function Function connection with Access to the version B or version B 96 MELSOFT station with the later of later of CHAPTER 8 products same station 05051 05051 number Monitoring of Page 273 various E71 CHAPTER status 16 Version 6 PING Function Function or later Ethernet test loopback 354 version B version A or diagnostics test via later later of 02092 Appendix 5 Ethernet board PING test 357 V 7 through a CPU m Appendix module 5 1 2 341 pue xipueddy P Version of E71 Version of Version of GX Version of GX Function Reference QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 CPU module Developer Works2 Specification of station numbers Universal Vsus Function 65 to 120 for data link instructions model QCPU version D or E for access to CC Link IE iator of x x with function O O Controller Network and CC Link saga version B or MELSEC Q IE Field Network later of 09042 L Ethernet Interf Target station CPU type Function Function Function MEE specification for data link version D or version D or version D or
493. tion No IPAddrss Port No COOF 0000 0000 0001 2000 10 97 24 1 2000 Error End Code SubHeader Command Code Connection No Clear History PING Test Loop Test COM ERR Off Start Monitor Stop Monitor 204 CHAPTER 14 OTHER FUNCTIONS 14 6 Redundant System Function This section describes functions used when the E71 is mounted on the main base unit in a redundant system When the E71 is mounted on an extension base unit skip this section 14 6 1 System switching request to the control system CPU module This function issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module if the E71 mounted with the control system CPU module in a redundant system detects a communication error or disconnection Connected device A communication error occurred Control system system 4 S Tracking cable System switching request 1 Conditions under which a system switching request is issued The E71 issues a system switching request when the following conditions are satisfied Condition Description After a connection is opened the existence of the connected device cannot be Alive check Communication error confirmed detection response is not r
494. tion the error is not detected If a station and another station with the same IP address exist on the same network another The station that has been already station cannot be connected to the network connected to the network continues The COM ERR LED turns on and COM ERR communications even if the station LED lit confirmation X1C turns on with the same IP address is connected The module connected later EE 2 e his station cannot be connected to the network resulting in an error p faim IP address IP address IP address IP address 10 97 24 1 Already in use 10 97 24 2 10 97 24 3 10 97 24 1 Already in use MAC address MAC address MAC address MAC address 00 26 92 89 2E 89 00 26 92 45 16 CC 00 1A 4D 5D 5D D8 00 26 92 DE 26 90 1 Checking the IP address already in use The following two methods are available Checking buffer memory areas Checking using the Ethernet diagnostics a Checking buffer memory areas Both the station already connected to the network and the station with the same IP address station connected to the network later and the MAC addresses of the
495. tions are enabled from the time that the unlock command is received until the lock command is received After an open process is completed communications are enabled After an open process is completed communications are enabled from the time that the unlock command is received until the lock command is received E mail function After an initial process is completed data sending and receiving are enabled 2 After an initial process is completed data sending and receiving are enabled 2 Web function CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 relay communications Communications using data link instructions After an initial process is completed communications are enabled After the remote password is entered communications are enabled The remote password lock process is automatically performed when the Web browser is closed After an initial process is completed communications are 197 pJOMsSeg 9jouloH pr peigesip pejgeuo snjejs suonounj Jo VEVL Function Remote password check setting Disabled Enabled Within Ethernet communications are File transfer FTP server function enabled with the connected device that has completed an open process After an open process is completed communicat
496. tocol setting data error information address 53244 data to 53274 and correct the error Point When an error is detected in the edited protocol check that the conditions for element placement are satisfied in the Packet Setting Especially the following conditions must be satisfied When a Non conversion Variable Variable length or Non verified Reception Variable number of characters is placed behind a Length and is not included in the Length calculating range place Static Data immediate after the Non conversion Variable or Non verified Reception When multiple Length elements are set in one packet configure the setting so that each Length calculating range does not overlap the others 282 16 5 8 buffer CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING Data cannot be sent with communications using a fixed The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot send data with communications using a fixed buffer Check item Has the connection with the connected device been opened Check the corresponding bit of 5000 in the buffer memory Action Open the connection with the connected device Check if the open close processes for I O signals and the OPEN CLOSE instructions are not used together for the same connection If so correct the program Read Open error code address 124 7 in the communication status storage area Then check the error details and correct the error
497. tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal applicability 20 144 Initial process Auto open UDP port number 13884 x H parameter eee setting area System area x 154 to 1Dp TCP Maximum Segment Transmission setting area 04 Enable TCP Maximum Segment Size Option 30 transmission 80004 Disable Maximum Segment Size 8000 x Option transmission Re initialization makes the set value effective Communication condition setting Ethernet Operation Setting area Communication data code setting 61 0 Binary Code 1 ASCII Code TCP existence confirmation setting b4 0 Use the Ping Initial process 1 Use the KeepAlive parameter Send frame setting 65 setting area For 0 Ethernet reinitialization 1 IEEE 802 3 Setting of write enable disable at RUN time b6 31 0 Disable On 1 Enable Initial timing setting 68 0 Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time 1 Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time Reinitialization specification 615 0 Reinitialization process complete reset by the system 1 Reinitialization process request set by the user Bits other than those described above are reserved for system use 36 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Initial value Programming Decimal Application Name Hexadecimal tool setting Hexadecimal Decimal appiicability Connection No 1 Usage of f
498. turns on upon abnormal end Completion device 1 t waiting time to receive or the time specified by the destination alive check timer E71 The receive data A did not match the A receive packet expected packet Connected device Receive data Receive data 1 When the receive packet expected packet is not matched to the data by the waiting time to receive or when the existence of a connected device cannot be checked within the time specified by the destination alive check timer the time calculated based on the destination existence confirmation starting interval timer value destination existence confirmation interval timer value and Destination existence confirmation resending time the instruction ends abnormally Point P When variables are included in receive packet expected packet elements variable data are not verified Receive packets expected packets can be specified up to 16 When multiple receive packets expected packets are specified the received data are verified with the registered receive packet expected packet in order of registration When the receive packet expected packet is matched to the data the receive process is completed The following verification is not performed The receive packet number which is matched in the verification is stored in the control data of the ECPRTCL instruction and the buffe
499. ue is set by the CPU module Any time During on On the rising edge During off On the falling edge No symbol TL zi a 230 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 Available devices The following devices can be used Internal device Constant File register Bit Word K H X Y M L F V B T ST C D W R ZR KO 0 1 For bit data a bit specified word device can be used For example Word device Bit No is used for the bit specification of a word device The bit number is specified in hexadecimal For example the bit 10 of DO is specified by DO A However bit specification cannot be used for timer T retentive timer ST and counter C For details on each device refer to the following User s manual for the CPU module used function explanation program fundamentals 3 Data type The following data types can be used Data type Description Bit Bit data or the start number of bit data BIN 16 bit 16 bit binary data or the start number of word device BIN 32 bit 32 bit binary data or the start number of double word device BCD 4 digit Four digit binary coded decimal data BCD 8 digit Eight digit binary coded decimal data Real number Floating point data Character string Character string data Device name Device name data suonoes pejeoipeg eui jo
500. uiry Interval PLC Inquiry Interval Condition Device Correct the following so that the sending time of the SMTP server and the E71 becomes shorter than the value set in PLC Inquiry Interval Reduce the load on the SMTP server When the SMTP server and the E71 are connected via routers or other devices connect the E71 to the same main line as the SMTP server Were the second and subsequent sendings performed using the programmable controller CPU monitoring function If the action above does not solve the problem check the following s the e mail parameter setting of the E71 correct s the mail server system down s there any error in the communication path 286 CHAPTER 16 TROUBLESHOOTING 16 5 12 An e mail cannot be received The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when an E71 cannot receive an e mail Check item Action Was the MRECV instruction executed Correct the execution conditions of the MSEND instruction Was the MRECV instruction completed normally Check the error code in the MRECV instruction completion status area and correct the error Does the receive data exist in the device Shorten the inquiry interval Check if there is any error in the communication path Check the number of e mails remaining on the mail server Is the receive data value incorrect Are the characters in the subject garbled Check and correct the e mail
501. umber of protocols executed including canceled protocols S 0 Execution count result When cancel request is executed to the second protocol 2 is stored 5 1 Completion status Protocol cancel request error error code C404 Matched receive packet number of the executed S410 to S 17 Matched receive packet No 1 to 8 protocol Operations of the E71 If the cancel request is executed when any protocol is not being executed the E71 completes the cancel without any process Point If any data is received from the connected device after the protocol whose communication type includes receiving is canceled the data will be discarded The E71 checks whether any cancel request exists at periodic processing For this reason it may take some time to process the cancellation after the cancel request is executed JOlHdOdd9 19 245 c Timing chart The E71 performs the following process according to the timing of cancel request Protocol execution status E71 i 1 address 54C0 operations at cancel request 0 Unexecuted No process The E71 cancels the sending and terminates the dedicated instruction 1 Waiting for transmission forcibly The E71 terminates the dedicated instruction forcibly at sending 2 Sendin d completion x The E71 cancels the receiving and terminates the dedicated instruction 3 Waiting for data reception forcibly m The E71
502. undant system This section provides information on mounting an E71 on the extension base unit of a redundant system a System configuration The following shows the system configuration Control system Standby system ees 06915 errem Tracking cable Extension cable Extension base unit Ethernet Connected device b Restrictions on the use of the functions Restrictions are the same as those of when an E71 is mounted on a main base unit except for the following restrictions Because an E71 does not issue a system switching request to the control system CPU module the System switching does not continue communications To continue communications even when the E71 experiences a communication error or when the cable is disconnected mount the E71 on a main base unit Dedicated instructions cannot be used To use dedicated instructions mount the E71 on a main base unit The following restrictions apply to communications via modules mounted on an extension base unit An access destination that can be specified a control system CPU module or standby system CPU module or a system A CPU module or system B CPU module varies according to the MC protocol dedicated command If systems are switched during MC protocol communications or communications using
503. ve check message to the connected device and waiting for the response 1 Parameter setting To enable the alive check function select Confirm under Existence Confirmation in the open setting Page 83 Section 7 1 4 In TCP IP communications the following methods can be selected in the Ethernet operation setting gt 81 Section 7 1 3 2 Alive check method The following alive check methods are available a Check using the PING command This method is used for a connection opened using TCP IP or UDP IP The E71 performs an alive check by sending the PING command ICMP echo request response function to the connected device with which communications have not been performed for a certain period of time and waiting to see whether the response is received 1 The E71 automatically sends an echo response packet when it receives a PING echo request command It sends a response to the received PING command even if the connection used in the data communications with the connected device is closed b Check using the KeepAlive function This method is used for a connection opened using TCP IP The E71 performs an alive check by sending an alive check ACK message to the connected device with which communications have not been performed for a certain period of time and waiting to see whether the response is received 2 2 The connection may be disconnected if the connected device does not support the TCP KeepAlive fu
504. ve wait timeout error Packet size error Check if the cable is disconnected Correct the connection setting of the specified connection number and execute the protocol again Check that there is no error in the connected device Check that the sending from the connected device is not interrupted Check that there is no data lost due to a receive error Check that there is no error in the data packet sent by the connected device Check the data sent by the connected device To send data that exceeds 2046 bytes from the connected device divide the data into several parts and send them separately C417 Data length setting error data quantity setting error Check the maximum allowable data length and specify the maximum length or less in the data length storage area Check the maximum allowable data quantity and specify the maximum quantity or less in the data quantity storage area C420 Flash ROM write error Write the data again If an error still occurs even after rewriting replace the module C4214 Flash ROM write count over limit error Replace the module because the number of writes exceeded the limit C4304 Protocol setting data writing during the ECPRTCL instruction execution If the ECPRTCL instruction is under execution cancel the instruction and write the protocol setting data 327 JONG eui U peJojs sepoo 0109 9 9 1
505. when changing connected devices During TCP IP communications a connected device can be changed only when the connection with the connected device is not established when Open completion signal is off During UDP IP communications a connected device can be changed regardless of the status of connection with the connected device Point When changing connected devices do not use the pairing open or alive check function When No Procedure is selected for a connection the connection is dedicated to No Procedure communications using a fixed buffer after the open process is completed When Procedure Exist is selected for a connection the following data communications can be performed after the open process is completed MC protocol communications Communications using a fixed buffer using the Procedure Exist control method Communications using a random access buffer 3 Processes during data sending receiving a When data is sent When a CPU module executes the BUFSND instruction the E71 sends data of the applicable fixed buffer number to the connected device that is specified in Communication address setting area addresses 285 to 5Fy and 5038 to 506 corresponding to the fixed buffer number b When data is received An E71 processes the data that is received from the connected device set in the communication address setting area corresponding to the fixed buffer number In addition wh
506. wice the size of the data length is occupied For the upper data the E71 ignores the data at sending and adds 00 to the data at receiving Sjueuigje jexyoed ejeq g g xipueddy Joo010Jgd peuijepeug eunjonujs ejeq pue uonejedo 8 xipueddy 379 3 Non verified Reception The following shows the usage example for a Non verified Reception element Example of a packet format of the connected device Necessary information for users Variable number of 2 bytes 5 bytes 5 bytes characters 1 byte Country Manufacturer Product EXT code code code Reading data 2 bytes Identification code When the information is unnecessary for users and the data including the number of characters Non verified reception is are variable set in the elements Example of a packet setting lt 2 bytes 14 2 bytes Variable number of characters 1 byte Static data Non verified reception variable number of characters Static data Setting the packet format as above and setting the Non verified Reception enable the followings Only necessary information can be stored in a device of the CPU module or the buffer memory Only one protocol packet is required even when the data that may change in each communication are included in the receive packet 380 APPENDICES Appendix 9 usage e
507. xample of MX Component Ap MX Component is an ActiveX control library that supports all the communication routes between a personal computer and programmable controller Communications can be performed with a simple process without considering different predefined protocols of each communication This appendix describes how to create a program and sample programs using MX Component pendix 9 1 How to create a program Visual Basic NET 2003 is used for the following procedure E Commu Menu Help Protocol Network No Station No Time out Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 2E71_Sample 1 Follow the wizard to configure communication nication Setup Utility settings from the personal computer to the programmable controller For some controllers settings are configured only using the program without using any wizard In the wizard configure Communication Setting Wizard PC side necessary settings such as a logical station Please select the PC side UF ET GG number connection module type and connection Communication setting Cxedmuus ome destination programmable controller Protocol TCP Network No Station No 60000 ms 2 Paste the ACT control icon onto the form Then set the logical station number set in Step 1 to the control as its property 381 e 8 2819 MOH 6 xipueddy
508. xecution protocol number to the control data of the ECPRTCL instruction Is the communication status of the connected device normal Correct the error in the connected device Has an open or initial error occurred in the error log area Check and correct the error 1 For details on the settings refer to Page 242 Section 15 7 3 If the action above does not solve the problem perform the following tests on the E71 to check for hardware error Hardware test 7 gt 365 Appendix 6 2 Self loopback test 7 Page 364 Appendix 6 1 281 BunoousejqnoJ 9 eq jouueo 969 16 5 7 The protocol setting data cannot be read written The following table lists how to troubleshoot the problem when the protocol setting data cannot be read or written Check that GX Works2 and the CPU module are connectable on the Transfer Setup of GX Works2 before troubleshooting the problem 1 To read the protocol setting data Check item Action Are the values in Protocol setting data error information address 5324 to 53274 and Number of registered Write the protocol setting data to the E71 because they have not been written protocols address 5328 set to 0 2 To write the protocol setting data Check item Action Did the ERR LED turn on after writing the protocol setting Check the values in Pro
509. y LD Completion device 1 F Connection y closed The ZP CLOSE instruction is executed on the rising edge OFF ON of the close command Point Do not perform close process using I O signals and using the dedicated instruction together for the same connection Doing so will result in malfunction 1501244 9 94 4 Errors If a dedicated instruction ends with an error Completion device D1 1 turns on and the error code is stored in Completion status 52 1 237 5 Program example The following shows a sample program that closes the connection number 1 when the I O signals of the E71 are 00 to X Y1F PLF M160 1 M160 M110 M161 1 M6000 PLS M6001 1 M6001 MO ZP CLOSE Uo K1 D200 M200 1 M161 M210 ME SET M210 1 200 M201 ME SET M202 1 M201 M203 1 RST M210 1 RST M110 1 Point For safety CPUs data stored in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module cannot be used The program must be modified using the I O signals of the intelligent function module corresponding to the buffer memory For use with safety CPUs refer to the following QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 238 CHAPTER 15 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 15 7 GPECPRTCL This instruction executes the protocols registered in the flash ROM of the E71 using the predefined protocol support
510. y char s buf 500000FF03D000002C000A14010000D 0000000005112233445566778899AA DO D4 batch write request frame addressed to control system length strlen char s buf printf Send starts Press any key n Dmykeyin getchar Waiting for key input SendFlag FLAG OFF 1 Send completion flag OFF 1 System A send processing if CloseflagA FLAG ON amp amp SendFlag FLAG OFF if send socketnoA char s buf length 0 SOCKET ERROR 1 Data send System A printf n Send data System A n s n s buf Send data display System SendFlag FLAG ON Send completion flag ON Receive processing if DataRecv socketnoA bufA ANS 1 TRUE Data receive printf n Receive data System A n s n bufA Receive data display else printf Receive failure System A M else printf Send failure System A Wn To the next page APPENDICES System B send processing if CloseflagB FLAG ON amp amp SendFlag FLAG OFF if send socketnoB char s buf length 0 SOCKET ERROR 1 Data send System B printf n Send data System n s n s buf Send data display System B SendFlag FLAG ON 1 Send completion flag ON Receive processing if DataRecv socketnoB r bufB RECV ANS 1 TRUE Data receive printf n Receive data System n s n bufB Receive data display else printf Receive failure
511. y operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP C17D4 An error was returned from the DNS server server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP An error was returned from the DNS server server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating Check if the IP address of the DNS server is correct Check if the mail server names SMTP server names and POP C17Fy An error was returned from the DNS server server names are correct Check with the network administrator if the DNS function of the server specified in the DNS setting is properly operating The device specified in Condition Device in News Correct the device settings in the PLC parameter window and C1804 Setting is outside the range set in the Device tab of specify the condition devices within the range of the device the PLC parameter window settings Try again An illegal request was made If the same error occurs the Ethernet module may have a hardware error Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 2 A response to th
512. y the IP address of the connected device 1 to broadcast User S2 6 Destination port No Specify the port number of the connected device 1 H to broadcast User Destination MAC address Specify the MAC address of the connected device n 000000000000 FFFFFFFFFFFF User 233 82 9 94 3 Functions This instruction performs the open process for a connection specified by S1 for the module specified by Un The setting value used for the open process is selected by 52 0 Completion of the OPEN instruction can be checked with Completion device D1 0 and D1 1 Completion device Turns on at the END process of the scan where the OPEN instruction is D1 0 completed and turns off at the next END process Completion device Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the OPEN instruction D1 1 Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal end Turns on at the END process of the scan where the OPEN instruction is completed and turns off at the next END process Operation while the OPEN instruction is being executed END END END Program process process __Scan__ process OPEN instruction h Executed Completion device TA Completion device 1 Connection opened The ZP OPEN instruction is executed on the
513. zation specification address 1F 615 turns sseooJd uonezijeniuies Zp xipueddy 0 and Initial normal completion signal X19 turns on If the reinitialization process fails an error code is stored in the initial error code storage area b Sample program The following two methods are available Using the dedicated instruction UINI instruction Writing directly to the buffer memory Point Do not use the method using the dedicated instruction UINI instruction and the method by writing directly to the buffer memory together 349 c Using the dedicated instruction UINI instruction The following shows an example where the reinitialization process is performed using the UINI instruction and the OPEN instruction is executed after the process is completed When the I O signals of the E71 are X Y00 to X Y1F SM400 UO MOV G20480 UO G20482 K4M20 M6500 IM SET M2500 M2500 X19 1 0252 J 0203 0255 5 0255 6 ZP UINI D250 M250 RST M2500 RST M3001 M250 M251 Mt Process upon completion SET M3000 M251 Process upon abnormal end To the next page 350 APPENDICES M3000 UOG31 F UO 8105 HO Process upon completion RST M3000 SET M3001 UO 5 G105 HO

Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents